ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP User Manual

ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP User Manual
User Manual
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP
Catalog Numbers 280E, 281E, 284E
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required
to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a
hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and
recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert
people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert
people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Allen-Bradley, ArmorConnect, ArmorStart, ControlLogix, DeviceLogix, On-Machine, PowerFlex, RSLinx, RSLogix 5000, RSNetWorx, and StepLogic are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance
If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions. It has been
designed and tested to meet the following directives.
Low Voltage and EMC Directives
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive and Council Directive
2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) by applying the following standard(s):
• Bulletin 280E/281E: EN 60947-4-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4-1: Contactors and motorstarters — Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters.
• Bulletin 284E: EN 61800-5-1 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems — Part 5-1: Safety requirements
— Electrical, thermal and energy.
• Bulletin 284E: EN 61800-3 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems — Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods.
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - June 2015
3
Notes:
4
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - June 2015
Table of Contents
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Low Voltage and EMC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 280E, 281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full-Voltage Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensorless Vector Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Embedded Switch Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switched vs. Unswitched Control Power Input/Output (I/O)
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EtherNet/IP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Embedded Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-mail Notification Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EtherNet/IP LED Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Module LED Status and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gland Plate Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory-Installed Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional HOA Keypad Configuration
(Bulletin 280E, 281E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function
(Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Brake Contactor and Connector (Bulletin 284E only) . . . .
EMI Filter (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Brake Connector (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Contactor (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shielded Motor Cable (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
16
16
17
18
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
22
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
27
5
Table of Contents
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and
Maintenance
6
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions for Bulletin 284E Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
280E, 281E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
280E, 281E Daisy Chain (DR) Conduit Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
284E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
284E Daisy Chain (DR) Conduit Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
280E, 281E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin . . . . . . . .
284E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mount Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power, Control, and Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Conduit/Knockout Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Designations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Power Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24V DC Control Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ArmorStart with EtherNet/IP Internal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Cord Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Supply Considerations for Bulletin 284E Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting MOVs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets. . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other System Design Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Notes (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Safety Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding PE or Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shield and Grounding of Motors and Motor Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Cable Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unshielded Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shielded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shield Terminating Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ArmorConnect Power Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ArmorConnect Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Power Overview Using 6/5 Pin Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Power using 4-Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter . . . . . . . .
ArmorConnect Cable Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
29
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
37
38
38
38
39
40
40
41
44
45
45
45
46
46
48
48
48
48
49
49
50
50
50
50
51
52
52
52
55
55
57
58
Table of Contents
Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect
Three-Phase Power Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet and I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Locking Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
60
61
63
64
Chapter 3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and
Device Level Ring Technology
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to EtherNet/IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linear Network Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Level Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Nodes on a DLR Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EtherNet/IP General Wiring Guideline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requested Packet Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
67
70
71
71
73
73
73
74
74
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gateway Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring EtherNet/IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Configure the Network Address Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save the Relation List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DHCP IP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Rockwell Automation Embedded Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-mail Notification Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Statistics Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Manager Cmd Object Info Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ring Statistics Web Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
78
78
78
79
81
83
84
85
85
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix
5000
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Connect and Configure ArmorStart with Add-On-Profile (AOP) . . . 98
Offline Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Parameters Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
7
Table of Contents
Online Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internet Protocol Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-Generated Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
105
106
107
108
109
110
Chapter 6
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Keypad Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Keypad and HOA Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E
Programmable Parameters
Basic Setup Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 280E, 281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Status Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Produced Assembly Config Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User I/O Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Display Group (Bulletin 280E, 281E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Setup Group (Bulletin 280E, 281E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Status Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Produced Assembly Config Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User I/O Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive I/O Configuration Group (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Display Group (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Advanced Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault
without Restarting the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linear List of Parameters for Bulletin 280E, 281E and
Bulletin 284E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
128
129
129
129
129
129
138
139
141
145
146
148
149
149
159
160
163
166
168
170
175
179
189
190
201
Chapter 8
How to Configure an Explicit Message Programming ControlLogix Explicit Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Table of Contents
Setting Up the MSG Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Formatting an Explicit Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Performing Explicit Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overload Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Imbalance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3 Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Bus Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EEPROM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EtherNet/IP LED Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Module LED Status and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Module Fault LED Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault 11 Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting Device to Factory Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
211
211
211
212
212
212
212
213
213
213
213
213
213
213
213
214
214
214
214
214
214
214
215
215
217
217
219
221
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 280E, 281E Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 284E Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP67 Dynamic Brake Diagnostic (DB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB1 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 - Dynamic Brake. . .
DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB1 Overcurrent Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
229
230
230
230
231
232
232
232
233
9
Table of Contents
DB1 Undercurrent Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB1 Switch Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB1 Open Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB1 VBus Link Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB1 Comm Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB1 Thermal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Control Supervisor Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Fault - Fan RPM Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAN Fault Handling with Firmware 66.21 of 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Status, Warning Bit 5:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Status, Parameter 62:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annunciation using PLC Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Drive Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshoot and General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks . .
Specific Issues on Your DLR or Linear Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshoot Intermittent Ethernet Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Etherner Managed Switch Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internet Group Multicast Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Local Area Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Module Removal and Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal of Control Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting Source Brake Fuse Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
234
234
234
235
235
235
235
235
235
236
236
236
237
241
241
242
245
247
249
249
250
251
252
252
252
253
254
Chapter 11
Specifications for EtherNet/IP
Bulletin 280E, 281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Overload Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contactor Life Load Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Overload Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Altitude Rating for 280/281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Altitude Rating for 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
259
260
264
267
268
270
270
270
Chapter 12
Accessories
10
Industrial Ethernet Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Code Connectivity (M12) – 1585D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor and Brake Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
271
271
273
273
273
Table of Contents
Three-Phase Power Field-Installed Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Sealing Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Handle and Cord Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Dynamic Braking Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Minimum Resistance and
Recommended Modules for Option DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Bulletin 284E Option (-DB) – IP20 Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Recommended Dynamic Brake
Modules for Option DB1 (IP67 Resistor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Motor Controller in a Single Branch ArmorStart Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Multiple-Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Group
Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Installation – General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating According to 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complete Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanatory Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and
291E Controllers (a). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers (b) . . . .
Combined Load Conductors (c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
285
287
287
289
295
295
295
Appendix B
CIP Information
High Level Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Codes and Name Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIP Explicit Connection Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIP Object Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identity Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Manager Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Owner Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listen Only Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class 3 CIP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Input Point Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Output Point Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
297
297
297
298
298
299
299
301
301
302
306
306
307
307
308
308
309
309
310
310
311
11
Table of Contents
CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Group Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Input Group Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x001D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Output Group Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x001E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Supervisor Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overload Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x002C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Level Ring (DLR) Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qos Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPI Fault Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPI Alarm Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x0098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x00B4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP/IP Interface Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x00F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Link Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS CODE 0x00F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
313
313
314
314
314
314
316
316
318
318
319
319
320
320
321
321
325
325
327
327
328
328
329
329
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix
DeviceLogix Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
DeviceLogix Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Import and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Appendix D
Renewal Parts
Bulletin 280E, 281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
341
341
342
343
343
344
346
346
Appendix E
System Design Considerations When General Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Reasons to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Using a Line Reactor
Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
12
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Table of Contents
Appendix F
Application Examples
Manual Brake Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
284 - VFD Preset Speed Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceLogix Ladder Editor Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ArmorStart 280 and 281 Status Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Fault Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits . . . . . .
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Status Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Fault Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Report the RPM of the 284 Internal Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to report the Heat Sink Temperature of the 284 . . . . . . . . . .
How to Report the Last Four Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Report an IP Address Conflict Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demand Torque Off Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypad Disable with DeviceLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
349
352
357
358
358
359
360
360
361
361
362
363
364
364
364
365
365
366
366
366
13
Table of Contents
Notes:
14
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
1
Product Overview
Bulletin
280E/281E
Type
284E
EtherNet/IP
Horsepower Range:
0.5…10 Hp (0.37…7.5 kW)
0.5…5 Hp (0.4…3.0 kW)
✓
—
—
✓
Starting Method:
Full-Voltage and Reversing
✓
—
Sensorless Vector Control
—
✓
Environmental Rating:
✓
IP67/NEMA Type 4
✓
Control Voltage:
✓
24V DC
✓
Operational Voltage Ratings:
200…480V AC
✓
—
380…480V AC
—
✓
Rated for Group Motor Installations
✓
✓
Local logic using
Logix
✓
✓
Four Inputs
✓
✓
Two Outputs
✓
✓
I/O Capability:
Network Communications:
EtherNet/IP
LED Status Indication
✓
✓
✓
✓
Gland Plate Entry:
Conduit Entrance
✓
✓
ArmorConnect® Power Media
✓
✓
Quick Disconnects (I/O, Communications, Motor
Connection, Three-Phase, and Control Power)
✓
✓
Extended Length Motor and Brake Cables
✓
✓
Factory Installed Options:
Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) Keypad
✓
✓
Source Brake Contactor
—
✓
Dynamic Brake Connector
—
✓
Output Contactor
—
✓
EMI Filter
—
✓
Shielded Motor Cable
—
✓
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
15
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Introduction
This chapter provides a brief overview of the features and functionality of the
ArmorStart® EtherNet/Industrial Protocol (IP) Distributed Motor Controllers,
Bulletin 280E, 281E, and 284E.
Description
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Distributed Motor Controllers are integrated, preengineered, motor starting solutions. Bulletins 280E and 281E are used for fullvoltage and reversing applications, respectively. Bulletin 284E is used in variable
frequency applications where more precise motor control is needed. The
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller offers a robust IP67/UL Type 4/12
enclosure design, that is suitable for water wash down environments.
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller includes an embedded dual port switch that
supports Device Level Ring (DLR) applications. It supports IEEE 1588 end-toend transparent clock. This allows synchronization within a distributed network
of devices. Transparent clocks in combination with enhanced or managed
ethernet switches are able to adjust for network introduced timing delays and
improve the performance of motion applications.
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP network address can be configured dynamically or
statically via the embedded Web Server. In addition, the controller’s IP address
can be manually set via three IP address switches found on the I/O section of the
device.
The controller’s embedded web server allows the user to check status, diagnostics,
and perform simple device configuration using a standard web browser. It also
supports SMTP protocol that allows the user to configure the device to send an
alert e-mail of potential issues.
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller is a modular “plug and play”
(PnP) design that offers simplicity in wiring and installation. The quick
disconnects for the I/O, communications, and motor connections reduce the
wiring time and minimize wiring errors. The controller offers, as standard, four
configurable (sink/source) DC inputs and two sourcing solid state outputs, to be
used with sensors and actuators respectively, for monitoring and controlling the
application process. The ArmorStart controller’s light-emitting diode (LED)
status indication and built-in diagnostics capabilities allow ease of maintenance
and troubleshooting. The optional Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad
configuration allows local start/stop control.
An Add-On-Profile (AOP) for ControlLogix is available. AOPs streamline the
programming and installation by eliminating the task of individually configuring
the device tags.
The copy and paste function allows easy configuration of multiple ArmorStart
controllers. RSLogix 5000 revision 17.01 or later is required to implement AOP
support.
16
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Overview
Chapter 1
The ArmorStart controller and associated motor cable have been evaluated as a
system by UL and is suitable for group installation. ArmorStart controllers
contain a UL Listed disconnect that in many applications, eliminates the need for
additional components.
Examples that are given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic
explanation should not be used for product selection because not all
combinations produce a valid catalog number.
Catalog Number Explanation
Figure 1 - Catalog Number Explanation for 280E, 281E
280
a
E – F
b
12Z – 10
c
d
e
a
Code
Description
280
281
Full Voltage Starter
Code
Reversing Starter
10
25
E
EtherNet/IP
c
Code
F
Enclosure Type
Description
g
h
h
Option 1
Short Circuit Protection
(Motor Circuit Protection)
Description
Code
3
10 A Rated Device
25 A Rated Device
b
Description
f
e
Bulletin Number
Code
C – CR – Option 1
3FR
Description
Hand/Off/Auto Selector Keypad
Hand/Off/Auto Selector Keypad with
Forward/Reverse
f
Overload Selection Current Range
Code
Description
A
0.24…1.2 A
B
0.5…2.5 A
C
1.1…5.5 A
D
3.2…16 A
IP67/ UL Type 4/12
g
d
Control and 3-Phase Power Connections/Motor Cable Connection
(CR: Conduit/Round Media) or (RR: Round/Round Media) or (DR: D/Round Media)
Description
Code
Control Power
3-Phase Power
Motor Cable
Contactor Size/Control Voltage
24V DC
12Z
23Z
CR
blank
Conduit Entrance
Conduit Entrance
CR
W
Conduit Entrance
Conduit Entrance
3 m, unshielded cordset
male 90°
No cable
3 m, unshielded cordset
male 90°
DR
blank
Conduit Daisy Chain
Conduit Daisy Chain
DR
W
Conduit Daisy Chain
Conduit Daisy Chain
No cable
Round Media (Male
Receptacle)
Round Media (Male
Receptacle)
Round Media (Male
Receptacle)
3 m, unshielded cordset
male 90°
Round Media (Male
Receptacle)
No cable
RR
blank
RR
W
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
17
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Figure 2 - Catalog Number Explanation for 284E
284 E – F
a
b
c
V D2P3 D – 10 – CR – Option 1 – Option 2 – Option 3
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
a
d
f
i
Bulletin Number
Torque Performance Mode
Control Voltage
Option 1
Code
Description
284
VFD Starter
Code
Description
Code
Description
V
Sensorless Vector Control
and Volts per Hertz
Z
24V DC
b
Code
Description
E
EtherNet/IP
380…480V
Enclosure Type
Description
F
Type 4 (IP67)
j
Option 2
Code
Description
10
10 A Rated Device
DB
blank DB Brake Connector
D1P4
1.4 A, 0.4 kW, 0.5 Hp
25
25 A Rated Device
DB1
blank
D2P3
2.3 A, 0.75 kW, 1.0 Hp
Connectivity to IP67
DB Resistor
D4P0
4.0 A, 1.5 kW, 2.0 Hp
SB
blank
Source Brake
Contactor
D6P0
6.0 A, 2.2 kW, 3.0 Hp
SB
W
D7P6
7.6 A, 3.3 kW, 5.0 Hp
Option 3
Control and 3-Phase Power Connections / Motor Cable Connection
(CR: Conduit/Round Media) or (RR: Round/Round Media)
Description
Code
Control Power
No cable
k
h
Operation
Description
Code
Description
Code
Code
3
Short Circuit Protection (Motor
Circuit Protector)
Output Current
c
Description
Hand/Off/Auto Selector
Keypad with Jog Function
g
e
Communications
Code
3-Phase Power
Motor Cable
CR
blank
Conduit Entrance
Conduit Entrance
3 m, unshielded
cordset male 90°
CR
N
Conduit Entrance
Conduit Entrance
3 m, shielded
cordset male 90°
CR
W
Conduit Entrance
Conduit Entrance
Conduit Daisy Chain
Code
Description
EMI
EMI Filter
OC
Output Contactor
No cable
3 m, unshielded
cordset male 90°
DR
blank
Conduit Daisy Chain
DR
N
Conduit Daisy Chain
DR
W
Conduit Daisy Chain
RR
blank
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
RR
N
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
3 m, shielded
cordset male 90°
RR
W
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
No cable
3 m, shielded
cordset male 90°
Conduit Daisy Chain
No cable
Conduit Daisy Chain
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
3 m, unshielded
cordset male 90°
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three-phase squirrelcage induction motors as follows:
Bulletin 280E, 281E: up to 10 Hp (7.4 kW) at 480V AC
Bulletin 284E: up to 5 Hp (3.0 kW) at 480V AC
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controllers accept 24V DC control voltage. The control
voltage provides power to inputs (unswitched) and outputs (switched).
Unswitched control voltage is used to ensure no loss of sensor or other field input
status under normal operation.
18
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Overview
Mode of Operation
Chapter 1
Bulletin 280E, 281E
Full-Voltage Start
This method is used in applications requiring across-the-line starting, where full
inrush current and locked-rotor torque are realized. The ArmorStart Bulletin
280E offers full-voltage starting and the Bulletin 281E offers full-voltage starting
for reversing applications.
Figure 3 - Full-Voltage Start
100%
Percent
Voltage
Time (seconds)
Bulletin 284E
Sensorless Vector Control
Sensorless vector control provides exceptional speed regulation and very high
levels of torque across the entire speed range of the drive. Features include:
• Autotune feature allows the motor controller to adapt to individual motor
characteristics.
• Able to develop high torque over a wide speed range and adapts to
individual motor characteristics.
Figure 4 - Sensorless Vector Control
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
19
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Description of Features
Overload Protection
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller incorporates, as standard,
electronic motor overload protection. This overload protection is accomplished
electronically with an I2t algorithm. The ArmorStart controller’s overload
protection is programmable via the communication network, providing the user
with flexibility.
The Bulletin 280E, 281E overload trip class can be selected for class 10, 15, 20
protection. The Bulletin 284E overload trip class is Class 10 only. Ambient
insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload (see Chapter 11
for the specification for overload trip curves).
Embedded Switch
Technology
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller includes embedded switch technology as
standard. Each ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller consumes one Common
Industrial Protocol (CIP) connection. The ArmorStart controller consumes a
Class 3 connection when RSLogix 5000 software displays the AOP.
In general, for a Device Level Ring (DLR) or linear network keep individual
segments to 50 nodes or less. In addition, it is important to reserve a minimum of
10% of available bandwidth to allow for processing of explicit messages.
Common features are:
• Designed according to the ODVA specification for EtherNet/IP.
ODVA specification found at http://www.odva.org/
• Embedded switch technology is designed to enable end devices to form
linear and ring network topologies
• Supports DLR protocol
• Supports IEEE 1588 transparent clock for CIP Motion and CIP Sync
applications
• Supports the management of network traffic to ensure timely delivery of
critical data, that is, QoS and IGMP protocols are supported
Note: DLR ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs)
connected to two different subnets.
20
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Overview
Switched vs. Unswitched
Control Power Input/Output
(I/O) Connections
Chapter 1
The voltage at terminals A1/A2 supplies power to the ArmorStart outputs.
Removing this power or placing the ArmorStart disconnect in the “OFF”
position disables the outputs.
The unswitched power A3/A2 supplies power to the input and communication
module. This power is not affected by the state of the disconnect switch. This
ensures that anytime the controller can communicate, the state of the inputs is
correct.
Figure 5 - Input and Output Configuration
EtherNet/IP Ports
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller includes a dual port Ethernet switch that
supports 10/100 Mbps It utilizes a sealed D-coded micro (M12) style ethernet
connector. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled as the
factory default. Before using your adapter in an EtherNet/IP network, you may
need to configure an IP address or set the address statically.
ATTENTION: To avoid unintended operation, the adapter must be assigned a fixed IP
address. If a DHCP server is used, it must be configured to assign a fixed IP address for
your adapter.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of
process control.
Embedded Web Server
The embedded web server allows the user to view information and configure the
ArmorStart controller via a web browser. The default login is “Administrator”.
There is no password set by default.
IMPORTANT
The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel. If the
Login and password are lost, you will need to reset the device to factory defaults
via the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Note: The configuration will be lost.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
21
Chapter 1
Product Overview
E-mail Notification Configuration
The embedded web server supports configuration of the Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol (SMTP). Once properly configured, the motor controller e-mails the
user with specific fault/trip messages.
EtherNet/IP LED Status
Indication
Figure 6 - EtherNet/IP LED
EtherNet/IP LED status and diagnostics consists of four LEDs.
• Link Activity/Status LEDS
– Ethernet Link1 Activity/Status (Port 1) – LED Color: Bicolor
(Green/Yellow)
– Ethernet Link2 Activity/Status (Port 2) – LED Color: Bicolor
(Green/Yellow)
• “MOD” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the ethernet module status
• “NET” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the ethernet network status
Control Module LED Status
and Reset
Figure 7 - LED Status
Indication and Reset
The Control Module LED status and diagnostics consists of four status LEDs
and a Reset button.
• POWER LED
The LED is illuminated solid green when switched (+A1/A2) control
power is present and with the proper polarity.
• RUN LED
This LED is illuminated solid green when a start command and control
power are present.
• NETWORK LED
This bicolor (red/green) LED indicates the status of the internal
communication link.
• FAULT LED
This indicates a Controller Fault (trip) condition.
The “Reset Button” is a local trip reset.
22
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Overview
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
Chapter 1
EtherNet/IP devices have Electronic Data Sheets (EDS). These are specially
formatted text files, as defined by the CIP specifications, that represent the object
model of the device. EDS files contain details about the readable and
configurable parameters of the EtherNet/IP device. They also provide
information about the I/O connections the device supports and the content of
the associated data structures. EDS files are used by EtherNet/IP device
configuration tools, such as RSNetWorx™ for EtherNet/IP, and data servers such
as RSLinx® Classic.
EDS files for all ArmorStart EtherNet/IP devices can also be uploaded directly
from the device via the web server interface. Rockwell Automation product EDS
files are also available on the internet at: http://www.ab.com/networks/eds.
Fault Diagnostics
Fault diagnostics capabilities that are built in the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting
and quick restarting.
Protection Faults
Protection Faults are generated when potentially dangerous or damaging
conditions are detected. Protection Faults are also known as “Trips.”
Table 1 - Protection Faults
Bulletin 280E, 281E Trip Status
Bulletin 284E Trip Status
PowerFlex® 40 Fault Codes
Short Circuit
Short Circuit
—
Overload
Overload
(Drive Codes 7 and 64)
Phase Loss
Phase Short
(Drive Codes 38…43)
Reserved
Ground Fault
(Drive Code 13)
Reserved
Stall
(Drive Code 6)
Control Pwr Loss
Control Pwr Loss
—
Input Fault
Input Fault
—
Over Temperature
Over Temperature
—
Phase Imbalance
Over Current
(Drive Codes 12 and 63)
A3, Unswitched Power Loss
A3, Unswitched Power Loss
—
Reserved
Internal Comm
(Drive Code 81)
Reserved
DC Bus Fault
(Drive Codes 3, 4 and 5)
EEprom
EEprom
(Drive Code 100)
Hdw Flt
Hdw Flt
(Drive Codes 70 and 122)
Reserved
Restart Retries
(Drive Code 33)
Reserved
Misc. Fault ➊
(Drive Codes 2, 8, 29, 48 and 80)
➊ Included is DB1 monitoring or resistor issue.
Parameter Group “Start Protection,” Parameter 24 “PrFault Enable” is used to
enable and disable the above protection faults. See Parameter 61 “LastPR Fault”
for additional details of the last protection fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
23
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Standard Features
Inputs
The EtherNet/IP version includes four 24V DC inputs that are single keyed (two
inputs per connector) and sourced from A3/A2 control power. The inputs use
two M12 connectors. Each input has an LED status indication. They are
configurable as sinking or sourcing.
Outputs
The EtherNet/IP version includes two self-protected solid state outputs that are
single keyed (one per connector), sourced from A1/A2 control power. Outputs
are sourcing type with a maximum current per output point of 0.5 A DC. The
outputs use one M12 connector per output, each having LED status indication.
For high duty cycle applications, consider using an interposing relay to reduce the
wear on the internal output.
Gland Plate Entrance
The ArmorStart controller offers three different methods of connecting
incoming three-phase and control power to the device. One method that is
offered is the traditional conduit entrance with a 0.75 in. and a 1 in. conduit hole
opening. The second method that is offered is daisy chain (feed through) power
reducing the need for additional components such as junction boxes. The third
method offers connectivity to the ArmorConnect power media. Factory-installed
receptacles are provided for connectivity to both three-phase and control power
media.
Motor Cable
With every ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller, a 3-meter unshielded
4-conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard. If the optional
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filter is selected for Bulletin 284E units, a
shielded 4-conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard.
DeviceLogix
DeviceLogix™ is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. DeviceLogix is programmed locally
using the AOP and implements Boolean math operations, such as, AND, OR,
NOT, Timers, Counters, and Latches. DeviceLogix can run as a stand-alone
application, independent of the network. However, 24V DC via A3 unswitched
control power, must be maintained.
24
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Overview
Factory-Installed Options
Chapter 1
Optional HOA Keypad Configuration (Bulletin 280E, 281E only)
The ArmorStart controller offers two optional factory-installed Hand/Off/Auto
(HOA) configurations: Standard and Forward/Reverse HOA.
Figure 8 - Optional HOA Configuration (Bulletin 280E left, 281E right)
Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function (Bulletin 284E only)
The HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function allows for local start/stop control
with capabilities to jog in forward/reverse motor directions.
Figure 9 - Optional HOA with Jog Function Configuration
Source Brake Contactor and Connector (Bulletin 284E only)
An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake On/
Off. The motor brake contactor is powered from the main power circuit. The
configuration of the R1 relay controls the function of the brake. A customer
accessible 3 A fuse is provided to protect the brake cable. Included is a 3-meter,
3-pin cordset for connection to the motor brake as standard.
EMI Filter (Bulletin 284E only)
The EMI filter is required to be CE compliant. When selected, a 3-meter,
shielded 4-conductor motor cordset is provided as standard. The filter must only
be used in installations with solidly grounded AC supply distribution and must
be bonded to the power distribution ground.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
25
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Dynamic Brake Connector (Bulletin 284E only)
The user selectable DB Option includes a 3-meter, 3-pin cordset for connection
to an IP20 Dynamic Brake Module. See Chapter 11 for available dynamic brake
modules.
Note: The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor cannot be used with the -DB
factory-installed option.
IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor (Bulletin 284E only)
The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor design offers simplicity in wiring and
installation. The user-selectable DB1 option provides the quick connector and an
internal resistor monitoring circuit board. The cable lengths available are 0.5 m
and 1.0 m. The IP67 Dynamic Brake is separately ordered. See Chapter 11 for
available IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistors.
Note: The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor is used only with the -DB1
factory-installed option. Only the specified IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor can be
used based on the VFD horsepower. Connecting resistors other than those
specified, result in a DB1 fault.
Output Contactor (Bulletin 284E only)
An internal contactor is sourced from the 24V DC (A1/A2) control voltage to
isolate the load side of the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller. When control power is applied to A1/A2, the output contactor
closes. When control power is removed, the output contactor opens. There is no
other switching element that allows alternate control of the output contactor. A
sequenced stop involving the output contactor cannot be performed.
Shielded Motor Cable (Bulletin 284E only)
If the EMI Filter is selected, a 3-meter, shielded 4-conductor cordset is provided
as standard.
26
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Overview
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP
Features
Chapter 1
Figure 10 - Bulletin 280E, 281E ArmorStart with EtherNet/IP
Communication Protocol
Local Disconnect
LED Status
Indication and Reset
Control Module
IP Address Notation Area
2 Outputs (Micro/M12)
Hand-Off-Auto Keypad
4 Inputs (Micro/M12)
IP Address Switches
Motor Connection
Ethernet Ports (DLR)
Figure 11 - Bulletin 284E ArmorStart with EtherNet/IP Communication Protocol
Local Disconnect
LED Status
Indication and Reset
IP Address Notation Area
Control Module
2 Outputs (Micro/M12)
Hand-Off-Auto Keypad
4 Inputs (Micro/M12)
Source Brake Connection
IP Address Switches
Motor Connection
Ethernet Ports (DLR)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
27
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Notes:
28
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Receiving
It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before
accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the item(s) received
against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is the responsibility of the
user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the
freight bill. If any concealed damage is found during unpacking, it is again the
responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent. The shipping container must
be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual
inspection of the equipment.
Unpacking
Remove all packing material, wedges, or braces from within and around the
Armorstart distributed motor controller. Remove all packing material from the
device(s). Check the contents of the package. Contact your local Allen-Bradley®
representative if any items are missing.
IMPORTANT
Before the installation and start-up of the drive, a general inspection of mechanical
integrity (i.e. loose parts, wires, connections, packing materials, etc.) must be made.
Inspecting
After unpacking, check the item(s) nameplate catalog number(s) against the
purchase order. See Chapter 1 for an explanation of the catalog numbering system
that aids in nameplate interpretation.
Storing
The controller should remain in its shipping container before installation. If the
equipment is not to be used for a period of time, it must be stored according to
the following instructions to maintain warranty coverage.
• Store in a clean, dry location.
• Store within an ambient temperature range of –25…+85 °C
(–13…+185 °F).
• Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, noncondensing.
• Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive
atmosphere.
• Do not store equipment in a construction area.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
29
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual, the following
statements, that are general to the system, must be read and understood.
General Precautions
SHOCK HAZARD: Risk of electrical shock. Do not disconnect
or connect power cables under load.
ATTENTION: Total circuit impedance must be low enough to ensure any short
circuit or ground fault current is large enough to operate the fuse or circuit
breaker. Failure to comply can result in death, personal injury, and/or
equipment damage.
ATTENTION: The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive
parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing,
testing, servicing, or repairing the assembly. Component damage may result
if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static
control procedures, see Publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding against Electrostatic
Discharge, or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage
components or reduce product life. Wiring or application errors, such as
undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive
ambient temperatures, may result in malfunction of the system.
ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated
machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and
subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: To prevent electrical shock, open the disconnect switch before
connecting and disconnecting cables. Risk of shock – environment rating
may not be maintained with open receptacles.
Precautions for Bulletin 284E
Applications
WARNING: The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to
discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on a drive, verify
isolation of mains supply from line inputs (R, S, T [L1, L2, L3]). Wait three
minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may
result in personal injury or death.
Darkened display LEDs are not an indication that capacitors have discharged
to safe voltage levels. Risk of shock – environment rating may not be
maintained with open receptacles.
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC
drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation,
startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to
be used for manufacturing purposes. All dimensions are subject to change.
Dimensions
280E, 281E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin
Figure 12 - Dimensions for Bulletin 280E, 281E (CR Option)
351
[13.82 ]
290
[11.42 ]
189
[7]
268
[10.55]
287,5
[11.32 ]
6,8
[.27 ]
150
[6 ]
3,02
[ .12 ]
MOTOR CONNECTION 185 [7.3] M22 CORDSET
MOTOR CONN ECTION 243 [9.57] M35 CORDSET
373
[14.69 ]
11
[ .43 ]
195
[7.68 ]
67,9
[3]
1 in. CONDUIT OPENING
39
[2]
47
[1.85 ]
0.75 in. CONDUIT OPENING
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
31
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
280E, 281E Daisy Chain (DR) Conduit Entrance
Figure 13 - Dimensions for Bulletin 280E, 281E (DR Option)
351
[13.82]
290
[11.42]
30,5
[1.20]
189
[7]
268
[10.55]
287,5
[11.32]
3,02
[.12]
6,8
[.27]
150
[6]
MOTOR CONNECTION 185 [7.3] M22 CORDSET
MOTOR CONNECTION 243 [9.57] M35 CORDSET
NOTE: Cord grips are supplied separately
373
[14.69]
15,48
[.6]
195
[7.68]
80,32
[3.2]
67,95
[2.7]
34,5
[1.4]
61
[2.4]
32
95,5
[3.8]
THOMAS AND BETTS
2922NM CORD GRIP
5262 SEALING RING
141 LOCKNUT
1/2" KNOCKOUT ( 22mm)
OR EQUIVALENT
4 PLACES (supplied separately)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
284E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin
Figure 14 - Dimensions for Bulletin 284E (CR Option)
2HP or less 420.38 [16.55]
3HP or greater 444.38 [17.50]
290
[11.42]
236
[9]
268
[10.55]
287,5
[11.32 ]
3,02
[.12 ]
6,8
[.27 ]
MOTO R CONNECTION 266.9 [10.51]
373
[14.69]
11
[.43 ]
195
[7.68 ]
67,9
[3 ]
1 in. CONDUIT OPENING
39
[2 ]
47
[1.85 ]
0.75 in. CONDUIT OPENING
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
33
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
284E Daisy Chain (DR) Conduit Entrance
Figure 15 - Dimensions for Bulletin 284E (DR Option)
420.38 (16.55) (1 Hp or less @ 230V AC, 2 Hp or less @ 480...575V AC)
444.38 [17.50] (3 Hp or greater @ 480...575V AC)
290
[11.42]
30,5
[1.20]
236
[9]
268
[10.55]
287,5
[11.32]
6,8
[.27]
3,02
[.12]
NOTE: Cord grips are supplied separately
MOTOR CONNECTION 266.9 [10.51]
373
[14.69]
15,48
[.6]
195
[7.68
80,32
[3.2]
67,95
[2.7]
34,5
[1.4]
61
[2.4]
95,5
[3.8]
34
THOMAS AND BETTS
2922NM CORD GRIP
5262 SEALING RING
141 LOCKNUT
1/2" KNOCKOUT ( 22 mm)
OR EQUIVALENT
4 PLACES (supplied separately)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
280E, 281E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin
Figure 16 - Dimensions for Bulletin 280E, 281E (RR Option)
3 Hp and less @ 480V AC
10 Hp @ 480V AC
351
[13.82]
290
[11.42]
351
[13.82]
290
[11.42]
268
[10.55 ]
268
287,5
[10.55] [11.32 ]
203.2
[8]
CABLE
KEEP OUT
6,8
[.27 ]
10 A Short Circuit
Protection (M22)
77,6
[3]
203.2
[8]
CABLE
KEEP OUT
287,5
[11.32]
6,8
[.27 ]
25 A Short Circuit
Protection (M35)
77,6
[3 ]
60,6
[2 ]
25,5
[1 ]
60,6
[2 ]
68
[2.68 ]
25,5
[1 ]
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
68
[2.68 ]
35
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
284E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin
Figure 17 - Dimensions for Bulletin 284E (RR Option)
2 Hp or less at 480V
290
[11.42]
3 Hp or greater at 480V
419,53
[16.52]
290
[11.42]
444,38
[17.50]
268
[10.55]
287,5
268
[10.55] [11.32]
6,8
[.27 ]
25 A Short Circuit
Protection (M35)
77,6
[3 ]
60,6
[2 ]
60,6
[2]
25,5
[1]
36
6,8
[.27 ]
10 A Short Circuit
Protection (M22)
77,6
[3]
68
[2.68 ]
30,4
[1 ]
25,5
[1 ]
68
[2.68 ]
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
287,5
[11.32 ]
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Mount Orientation
The recommended mounting orientation of ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller
is the vertical configuration. This is especially important for the Bulletin 284.
This allows proper air flow over the heat sink. Improper mounting or debris build
up reduces air flow and increased internal temperatures. This may reduce the
overall life of the product. For alternate mounting contact your local sales
representative.
IMPORTANT
Operation
Chapter 2
For proper heat dissipation and product operation, mount in the vertical orientation
as shown.
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three-phase
squirrel-cage induction motors as follows:
Bulletin 280E, 281E: 0.24…16 A; 200V AC, 230V AC, 460V AC; 50/60 Hz.
Bulletin 284E: up to 5 Hp (3.0 kW) @ 480V AC
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Distributed Motor Controller accepts a control
power input of 24V DC.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
37
Chapter 2
Wiring
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Power, Control, and Ground Wiring
Table 2 provides the power, control, and ground wire capacity and the tightening
torque requirements. The power, control, ground, and terminals accepts a
maximum of two wires per terminal.
Table 2 - Power, Control, Ground Wire Size, and Torque Specifications
Terminals
Wire Size
Torque
Wire Strip Length
Power
and
Ground
Primary/Secondary
Terminal:
1.5…4.0 mm2
(#16 …#10 American Wire
Gage (AWG))
Primary Terminal:
10.8 lb•in
(1.2 N•m)
Secondary Terminal:
4.5 lb•in
(0.5 N•m)
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Control Inputs
1.0 mm2…4.0 mm2
(#18…#10 AWG)
6.2 lb•in
(0.7 N•m)
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Standard Conduit/Knockout Size
The following table shows conduit or cord grip size and the diameter of the
punched hole. For example, 0.5 in. conduit requires a hole punch of 0.885 in. for
proper installation.
Table 3 - Conduit and Knockout Sizes
38
Conduit/Cord Size
[mm]
Conduit/Cord Size
[in.]
Actual Hole
Diameter [mm]
Actual Hole
Diameter [in.]
16.00
0.50
22.48
0.885
21.00
0.75
28.32
1.115
27.00
1.00
34.59
1.362
35.00
1.25
43.21
1.701
41.00
1.50
49.48
1.948
53.00
2.00
61.34
2.415
63.00
2.50
73.91
2.910
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Terminal Designations
Chapter 2
As shown in Figure 18, the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains
terminals for power, control, and ground wiring. Access can be gained by
removing the terminal access cover plate.
Figure 18 - ArmorStart Power and Control Terminal Connections
(applies to Bulletin 280E, 281E, and Bulletin 284E)
Detail A
See Detail A
Table 4 - Power, Control, and Ground Terminal Designations
Terminal Designations
No. of Poles
Description
A1 (+)
2
Control Power Input
A2 (–)
2
Control Power Common
A3 (+)
2
Unswitched 24V Control
PE
2
Ground
1/L1
2
Line Power Phase A
3/L3
2
Line Power Phase B
5/L5
2
Line Power Phase C
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
39
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Control Power Wiring
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller uses 24V DC control power for
communications and I/O. The control power terminal connections are labeled
A1, A2, and A3. Switched power supplies the outputs. Unswitched power
supplies logic power and sensor inputs.
24V DC Control Power
• 24V DC (–15%, +10%)
• A1 = Switched +V
• A2 = Common for both switched and unswitched (–V)
• A3 = Unswitched +V
Input and Output Characteristics
• 5-pin female connectors (M12)
• 4 fixed inputs (two per connector) – software selectable sink or source
• 2 sourcing outputs DC (solid-state) – (one per connector)
Input and Output Power Connection
• Sensor Power is sourced from +24V supplied from A3(+) and A2(–).
• Output power is sourced from +24V supplied from A1(+) and A2(–).
• Max. current per output point is 0.5 A and is not to exceed 1.0 A total
IMPORTANT
40
Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms, that can exceed 20 A. The
power supply must be capable of supporting this amount of instant power demand
when multiple ArmorStart controllers are turned ON simultaneously. For supplies
without this capacity, it is recommended to apply unswitched power (A3-A2) first and
after a 2…4 second delay, apply switched power. If control power falls below 19V DC,
there is a higher risk of communications issues or device faults.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
ArmorStart Controller with
EtherNet/IP Internal Wiring
Chapter 2
Figure 19 - ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Bulletin 280E Controller with HOA Diagram
Contactor
140M
L1
L2
L3
Motor
AS Logic
Control
Power
Sense
140M
Off/Tripped
On
7A
Class CC
F
AS Logic
Control
Current supplied by
control power due to the
power supply voltage
being greater than A3
voltage
26V
2.5A
Class CC
2A SC Protected
Port 2
Output A
Note: This power supply is not
present in the Status Only versions.
24V
A1
A2
Port 1
140M Trip
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
140M Status
1 Ampere
Total
FA
Reversed bias
under normal
operation
2A SC Protected
Ethernet
Logic
Output B
11 25V DC
+24V DC Status
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Not Used
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
24V DC
A3
11 25V DC
PTC
300mA Max
Current supplied from A3 when
A1 control power is lost
5V DC
AS Logic Circuits
Input 3
Input 2
Input 1
Input 0
Short
Detect
+5V DC
4 Inputs
50mA Max/input depends
on sensor attached to input
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
41
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Figure 20 - ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Bulletin 281E Controller with HOA Diagram
ArmorStart Ethernet REV with HOA Diagram
Reverser
140M
L1
L2
L3
Motor
AS Logic
Control
Power
Sense
Off/Tripped
140M
7A
Class CC
On
F
FB
AS Logic
Control
2.5A
Class CC
2A SC Protected
Note: This power supply is not
present in the Status Only versions.
Current supplied by
control power due to the
power supply voltage
being greater than A3
voltage
26V
Output A
AS Logic
Control
24V
A1
A2
Port 2
Port 1
R
RB
140M Trip
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
140M Status
1 Ampere
Total
FA
Reversed bias
under normal
operation
2A SC Protected
Ethernet
Logic
Output B
11 25V DC
+24V DC Status
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Not Used
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
24V DC
A3
+5V DC
11 25Vdc
PTC
300mA Max
Current supplied from A3 when
A1 control power is lost
5Vdc
Input 3
Input 2
Input 1
Input 0
Short
Detect
4 Inputs
50mA Max/input depends
on sensor attached to input
42
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
AS Logic Circuits
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
Figure 21 - ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Bulletin 284E Drive Diagram
Output Contactor
Option
Sensorless Vector Control
140M
L1
L2
L3
Filter
Option
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
BR+ BR-
Source Brake
Option
R1
R2
Fan
Off/Tripped
A1
A2
7A
Class CC
1 Ampere
Total
Current supplied by
control power due to the
power supply voltage
being greater than A3
voltage
26V
O
Output
Contactor
Output A
12
04
13
R1
PF40
R2
14
15
08
07
16
17
09
18
RJ-45
19
R3
Note: This switch is controlled
by the Control Power Logic
sense. If control power is
present, switch is closed.
Prevents drive from running
when there is no power for the
fan
B
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Brake CNTR Status
Reversed bias
under normal
operation
Output B
140M Trip
140M Status
Source Brake
Option
2A SC Protected
06
05
24V DC
2A SC Protected
2.5A
Class CC
11
03
Dynamic Brake
Connector
Option
140M
On
02
01
3A
Class CC
AS Logic
Control
Power
Sense
Motor
11 25V DC
+24V DC Status
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Output CNTR Status
1
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
1 - Output CNTR Status not
available when SM option specified
24V DC
11 25V DC
A3
Port 1
4 Inputs
50mA Max/input depends
on sensor attached to input
+5V DC
Port 2
Current supplied by
A3 when A1 control
power is lost
Input 3
Input 2
300mA Max
Input 1
Input 0
PTC
5V DC
AS Logic
Circuits
Ethernet
Logic
Short
Detect
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
43
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Recommended Cord Grips
Figure 22 - Cord Grips for ArmorStart Devices with 10 A Short Circuit Protection Rating
0.75 in. Lock Nut
1 in. Lock Nut
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2931NM
0.75 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Control Power Media
Cordset - Example:
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2940NM
1 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Three-Phase Power
Media Cordset - Example:
Cat. No. 889N-M65GF-M2
Cat. No. 280-PWR22G-M1
Figure 23 - Cord Grips for ArmorStart Devices with 25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating
0.75 in. Lock Nut
44
1 in. Lock Nut
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2931NM
0.75 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Control Power Media
Cordset - Example:
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2942NM
1 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.70…0.95 in.
Used with Three-Phase Power
Media Cordset - Example:
Cat. No. 889N-M65GF-M2
Cat. No. 280-PWR35G-M1
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
AC Supply Considerations for Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems
Bulletin 284E Units
ATTENTION: The Bulletin 284E contains protective Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOVs) that are referenced to a ground. These devices should be disconnected if
the Bulletin 284E is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution
system.
ATTENTION: Do not remove this jumper, that is shown in Figure 25, if the unit
is equipped with an EMI filter installed.
Disconnecting MOVs
IMPORTANT
Do not apply the EMI filter option to grounded or ungrounded Delta power source.
The EMI option requires a solidly grounded Wye (Y) power source (i.e. 480/277 or
400/230V AC 3-Phase). If applied to a grounded or ungrounded 480V AC Delta
power source, the EMI filter will not function properly and will be damaged.
To prevent drive damage, the MOVs connected to ground must be disconnected
if the drive is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution system
where the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the
nominal line-to-line voltage. To disconnect the MOVs, remove the jumper shown
in Figure 25, Bulletin 284E Jumper Removal.
1. Before installing the Bulletin 284E, loosen the four mounting screws.
2. Unplug the control module from the base unit by pulling it forward.
Figure 24 - Bulletin 284E Removal of Control Module
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
45
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Figure 25 - Bulletin 284E Jumper Removal
Remove Jumper
Group Motor Installations for
USA and Canada Markets
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor controllers are listed for use with each other
in group installations per National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 79,
Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery. When applied according to the
group motor installation requirements, two or more motors, of any rating or
controller type, are permitted on a single branch circuit. Group motor
installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and Canada.
Note: For additional information regarding group motor installations with the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller, see Appendix A.
Wiring and Workmanship
Guidelines
46
In addition to conduit and seal-tite raceway, it is acceptable to use cable that is
dual rated Tray Cable Exposed Runs (TC-ER) and Cord, STOOW, for power
and control wiring on ArmorStart installations. In the USA and Canada
installations, the following guidance is outlined by the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and NFPA 79.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and
supervision verify that only qualified persons service the installation, and where
the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical
damage, using mechanical protection, such as struts, angles, or channels, Type TC
tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC
(Metal Clad) cable and is identified for such use with the marking Type TC-ER
(Exposed Run)➊ shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization
equipment or device as open wiring. The cable shall be secured at intervals not
exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) and installed in a “good workman-like” manner.
Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided by an
equipment grounding conductor within the cable.
➊ Historically, cable meeting these crush and impact requirements was designated and marked “Open Wiring”. Cable so marked is
equivalent to the present Type TC-ER and can be used.
While the ArmorStart controller is intended for installation in factory floor
environments of industrial establishments, the following must be considered
when locating the ArmorStart controller in the application:
• Cables, including those for control voltage including 24V DC and
communications, are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic
on a continuous basis.
• Location of the ArmorStart controller to minimize exposure to continual
traffic is recommended. If location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable,
other barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be
considered.
• Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent
exposure and/or damage.
• Additionally, if conduit or other raceways are not used, it is recommended
that strain relief fittings be used when installing the cables for the control
and power wiring through the conduit openings.
The working space around the ArmorStart controller may be minimized as the
ArmorStart does not require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance
while energized. In lieu of this service, the ArmorStart controller is meant to be
unplugged and replaced after proper lockout/tag-out procedures have been
employed.
The Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) is a factory-installed option that the user may select.
The HOA keypad may require the ArmorStart controller to be selected and
installed as follows if the application requires frequent use of the hand operated
interface by the equipment operator:
1. They are not less than 0.6 m (2 ft) above the servicing level and are within
easy reach of the normal working position of the operator.
2. The operator is not placed in a hazardous situation when operating them.
3. The possibility of inadvertent operation is minimized.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
47
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
If the operated interface is used in industrial establishments where the conditions
of maintenance and supervision verify that only qualified persons operate and
service the ArmorStart controller's operator interface, and the installation is
located so that inadvertent operation is minimized, then other installation
locations with acceptable access can be provided.
Other System Design Considerations
The user should keep 3-phase power cabling at least 150 mm (6 in.) away from
the EtherNet/IP network to avoid noise issues. EtherNet/IP is an unpowered
network therefore, if device status is important when the power distribution
disconnect is in the OFF position, the A3 terminal must have an unswitched
power source.
Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC)
The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance.
General Notes (Bulletin 284E only)
• The motor Cable should be kept as short as possible to avoid
electromagnetic emission and also capacitive currents.
• Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee
an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements.
Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance.
• Using an EMI filter, with any drive rating, may result in relatively high
ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in
installations that are solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power
distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and
should exclude any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent
disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground
connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically
checked.
• When using a shielded motor cable the drain wire should be bonded to
chassis ground at the motor. The recommended motor connection should
use a shielded concentric connector. This provides 360° shielding. A single
point connection can be used but is less effective.
Wiring
Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups: power,
control, and signal. The following recommendations for physical separation
between these groups, are provided to reduce the coupling effect:
48
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
• Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should
be 16 cm (6 in.).
• Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding/
armor with equivalent attenuation.
• Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits.
• Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups
should be 8 cm (3 in.).
Grounding
An effectively grounded product is one that is “intentionally connected to earth
through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and
having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages that
may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons” (as defined by
the US National Electric Code NFPA70, Article 100B). Grounding is done for
two basic reasons: safety (defined above) and noise containment or reduction.
While the safety ground scheme and the noise current return circuit may
sometimes share the same path and components, they should be considered
different circuits with different requirements.
Grounding Safety Grounds
The object of safety grounding is to verify that all metalwork is at the same
ground (or Earth) potential at power frequencies. Impedance between the drive
and the building scheme ground must conform to the requirements of national
and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. These vary based on
country, type of distribution system and other factors. Periodically check the
integrity of all ground connections.
General safety dictates that all metal parts are connected to earth with separate
copper wire or wires of the appropriate gauge. Most equipment has specific
provisions to connect a safety ground or PE (protective earth) directly to it.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
49
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Grounding PE or Ground
The safety ground - PE, must be connected to earth ground. This point must be
connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground rod, bus bar, or
building ground grid. Grounding points must comply with national and local
industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. Some codes may require
redundant ground paths and periodic examination of connection integrity.
IMPORTANT
Shield and Grounding of
Motors and Motor Cables
To avoid electrolytic corrosion on the external earth terminal, avoid spraying
moisture directly on the terminal. When used in washdown environments
apply a sealant or other corrosion inhibitor on the external ground terminal to
minimize any negative effects of galvanic or electro-chemical corrosion.
Ground connections should be inspected regularly.
The motor frame or stator core must be connected directly to the PE connection
with a separate ground conductor. It is recommended that each motor frame be
grounded to building steel at the motor.
Motor Cable Considerations
Most recommendations regarding motor cable address issues are caused by the
nature of the drive output. A PWM drive creates AC motor current by sending
DC voltage pulses to the motor in a specific pattern. These pulses affect the wire
insulation and can be a source of electrical noise. The rise time, amplitude, and
frequency of these pulses must be considered when choosing a wire/cable type.
The choice of cable must consider:
1. The effects of the drive output once the cable is installed
2. The need for the cable to contain noise that is caused by the drive output
3. The amount of cable charging current available from the drive
4. Possible voltage drop (and subsequent loss of torque) for long wire runs
Keep the motor cable lengths less than 13.7 m (45 ft) unless otherwise noted in
the device specifications.
Unshielded Cable
Properly designed multi-conductor cable can provide good performance in wet
applications, significantly reduce voltage stress on wire insulation, and reduce
cross coupling between drives.
50
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
The use of cables without shielding is generally acceptable for installations where
electrical noise created by the drive does not interfere with the operation of other
devices such as: communications cards, photoelectric switches, weigh scales, and
others. Be certain the installation does not require shielded cable to meet specific
EMC standards for CE, C-Tick, or FCC. Cable specifications depend on the
installation type.
Figure 26 - Unshielded Multi-Conductor Cable
Shielded Cable
Shielded cable contains all general benefits of multi-conductor cable with the
added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise that
is generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should
be given for installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive
proximity switches, and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in
the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar
location, imposed EMC regulations, or a high degree of communications/
networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.
An acceptable shielded cable has four XLPE insulated conductors with a 100%
coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire)
surrounded by a PVC jacket.
Figure 27 - Shielded Cable with Four Conductors
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
51
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Shield Terminating Connectors
The cable connector that is selected must provide good, 360° contact and low
transfer impedance from the shield or armor of the cable to the conduit entry
plate at both the motor and the ArmorStart controller for electrical bonding.
SKINTOP® MS-SC/MS-SCL cable grounding connectors and NPT/PG
adapters from LAPPUSA are good examples of this type of shield terminating
gland.
Figure 28 - Terminating the Shield with a Connector
ATTENTION: Shielded connector or motor cable is mandatory for CE
compliant installations
ArmorConnect Power Media
Description
Details of ArmorConnect Power Media are described in Publication 280PWRSG001, ArmorConnect Power and Control Media.
The ArmorConnect power media offers both three-phase and control power
cable cord set systems including patchcords, receptacles, tees, reducers and
accessories to be used with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. These
cable system components allow quick connection of ArmorStart Distributed
Motor Controllers, reducing installation time. They provide for repeatable,
consistent connection of the three-phase and control power to the ArmorStart
Distributed Motor Controller and motor by providing a plug-and-play
environment that also avoids system mis-wiring.
IMPORTANT
52
ArmorConnect connections should be made hand tight. See the ArmorConnnect
instructions for recommended tightening torque. The use of a tool to help in the
tightening of the connector is not recommended.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controllers (Bulletins 280E, 281E, and 284E), use only motor and power cables
that are listed for use with ArmorStart.
ArmorConnect power cables are UL 2237 Listed.
IMPORTANT
The ArmorStart UL listing does not permit using a third party or un-listed motor and
power cable assembly. Using a cable assembly that is not permitted results in a loss of
Listing and does not comply with NFPA 79 or the NFPA 70 (NEC) (see 110.3(B) of the
NEC).
For reference, the UL White Book states the following for power media cable
assemblies meeting UL 2237 standard:
“These devices are intended for use only with the Listee’s same line of products that are
covered under this category....”
SHOCK HAZARD: Risk of electrical shock. Do not disconnect
or connect power cables under load.
ATTENTION: ArmorConnect cables are not intended to be connected or disconnected
under load. This may result physical injury or equipment damage as a result of high
make and break currents and potential fault currents.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
53
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
See publication 280PWR-SG001 for ordering details. The following shows
example configurations for power, control, and communication media.
Figure 29 - Cable System Overview
➊ CAT5e Bulkhead Connector and Receptacle – Example Cat.No. 1585A-DD4JD
➋ CAT5e Patchcord, IP67, M12 D-Code, Male Straight, Male Right Angle – Example Cat.No.
1585D-M4TBDE-*
➌ CAT5e, Patch Cable, IP20, RJ45 Male to RJ45 Male – Example Cat.No. 1585J-M4TB-*
➍ Three-Phase Power Receptacles Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads – Example
Cat. No. 280-M35F-M1
➎Three-Phase Power Trunk- Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end –
Example Cat. No. 280-PWR35A-M*
➏Three-Phase Drop Cable- Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end –
Example Cat. No. 280-PWR22A-M* (16AWG) or Cat. No. 280-PWR24A-M* (14AWG)
➐Three-Phase Power Tee connects to a single M35 drop line to trunk connectors –
Cat. No. 280-T35 or Tee connects to a M22 drop – Cat. No. 280-RT35
➑ Control Power Receptacles - Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads –
Cat. No. 888N-D65AF1-*
➒ Control Power Media Patchcords – Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on
each end – Example Cat. No. 889N-F65GFNM-*
➓ Control Power Tees - The E-stop In Tee (Cat. No. 898N-653ST-NKF) is used to connect to the
Bulletin 800F On-Machine™ Stop station using a control power media patchcord. The E-stop Out
tee (Cat. No. 898N-653ES-NKF) is used with cordset or patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart
Distributed Motor Controller.
Reducer connects from M35 male connector to M22 female connector – Cat. No. 280-RA35
54
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
ArmorConnect Connections
Chapter 2
Control Power Overview Using 6/5 Pin Control
Figure 30 - ArmorConnect Receptacles
10 A Short Circuit Protection Rating
Control Power Receptacle
25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating
Control Power Receptacle
Three-Phase Power Receptacle
Three-Phase Power Receptacle
Factory-installed ArmorConnect gland plate connections
Figure 31 - ArmorConnect Connections
Table 5 - ArmorConnect Gland Plate Conductor Color Code
Terminal Designations
Description
Color Code
A1 (+)
Control Power Input
Blue
A2 (–)
Control Power Common
Black
A3 (+)
Unswitched Control Power
Red
PE
Ground
Green/Yellow
1/L1
Line Power – Phase A
Black
2/L2
Line Power – Phase B
White
3/L3
Line Power – Phase C
Red
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
55
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Figure 32 - On-Machine Stop Stations
Table 1 Product Selection
Enclosure Type
Plastic
Metal
Quick Connect
Knockout Type
Operator
Mini Receptacle
Metric
Twist to Release
Illumination
Voltage
24V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
Figure 33 - Stop Circuit for EtherNet/IP Version
56
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Contact
Configuration
1 N.C./1 N.O.
Cat. No.
800F-1YMQ4
800F-1MYMQ4
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
Control Power using 4-Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter
As an alternative to the unique 6/5 pin control cable the auxiliary power cabling
can be used. Auxiliary Power is based on a 4–pin connector system and is used to
provide 24V DC power to I/O modules and other devices separately from
network power. Running separate power to these devices is typically used for I/O
devices with output connections to prevent power supply interruption due to
switching of outputs.
Figure 34 - Control Power Overview using 4-Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter
➒ Bulkhead pass-thru connectors are passive male to female 4-pin mini connectors within a
threaded metal housing that is used for Auxiliary Power - Cat. No. 889A-CXN4-M4
➓Auxiliary power trunk cables are four-pin mini-style patchcords. - Cat. No. 889N-F4HKNM-*
(Straight Female to Straight Male)
ArmorStart auxiliary adapter power tees allow connecting devices to the power trunk line using
an associated power drop cordset - Cat. No. 898N-543ES-NKF
12 Auxiliary power drop cable - Cat. No. 889D-R4HJDM-* (18AWG wire Right Female to
Straight Male)
13 Control Power Media Patchcords - Example Cat. No. 889N-F65GFNM-*
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
57
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Figure 35 - Interconnect Diagram
ArmorConnect Cable Ratings
The ArmorConnect power media cables are rated per UL Type TC 600V 90°C
Dry 75°C Wet, Exposed Run (ER) or MTW 600V 90°C or STOOW 105°C
600V - Canadian Standards Association (CSA) STOOW 600V FT2. For
additional information regarding ArmorConnect power media see publication
280PWR-SG001.
Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect
Three-Phase Power Media
When using ArmorConnect three-phase power media, fuses or circuit breakers
can be used for the motor branch circuit protective device, for the group motor
installations.
58
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Chapter 2
For 32 A rated ArmorConnect cable for trunk and taps:
Circuit Breaker: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480V AC maximum when protected by a
Bulletin 140U-H or Bulletin 140G-H circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V,
100 A and a maximum interrupting of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes Short
Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). Examples include 140G-H6F3-D10 or 140UH6C3-D10.
Fusing: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000
RMS symmetrical amperes (SCCR) at 600V AC maximum when protected by
CC, J, and T class fuses.
For 10 A and 15 A rated ArmorConnect cable taps:
Circuit Breaker: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480Y/277V AC maximum when protected
by Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-C30 circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V, 30 A,
having an interrupting rating not more than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
WARNING: The total circuit impedance including each cable assembly's own
impedance, must be low enough to ensure any short-circuit or ground fault current that
can flow through any assembly, is large enough to operate the magnetic trip of the Cat.
No. 140U-D63-C* circuit breaker. See your local electrical code for acceptable practices
for this evaluation.
Fusing: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000
RMS symmetrical amperes (SCCR) at 600V AC maximum when protected by
CC, J, and T class fuses, rated 40 A non-time delay or 20 A time delay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
59
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Ethernet and I/O Connections
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller uses a sealed D-coded M12 (micro) style
ethernet connector.
Figure 36 - EtherNet/IP Connector
M12 Female Ethernet Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - (White/Orange) TxData+
Pin 2 - (White/Green) RecV Data+
Pin 3 - (Orange) TxDataPin 4 - (Green) RecV Data-
Figure 37 - I/O Receptacle Input Pinout (M12)
Pin 1 - +24V (A3 pwr)
Pin 2 - Input 1
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Input 2
Pin 5 - NC (no connection)
Figure 38 - I/O Receptacle Output Pinout (M12)
Pin 1 - NC (no connection)
Pin 2 - NC (no connection)
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Output +24V DC (A1 pwr)
Pin 5 - NC (no connection)
60
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Power Connections
Chapter 2
Figure 39 - External Connections for Motor Connector – Bulletin 284E - 5 Hp and
Bulletin 280E, 281E - 3 Hp or less (M22) at 480V AC
Pin 1 - T1 (black)
Pin 2 - T2 (white)
Pin 3 - T3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)
Figure 40 - External Connections for Motor Connector – Bulletin 280E, 281E - 10 Hp (M35)
at 480V AC
Pin 1 - T1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - T3 (red)
Pin 4 - T2 (white)
Figure 41 - External Connections for Brake Contactor Connector (M25)
Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - L2 (white)
Figure 42 - External Connections for Dynamic Brake Connection (M22)
Pin 1 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 2 - BR+ (black)
Pin 3 - BR– (white)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
61
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Figure 43 - Incoming Control Power (M22) – 24V DC Only
Pin 1 - +24V DC unswitched (A3/red)
Pin 2 - Common (A2/black)
Pin 3 - PE (green)
Pin 4 - Not used (blank)
Pin 5 - +24V DC switched (A1/blue)
Pin 6 - Not used (white)
Figure 44 - Incoming Three-Phase Power for 10 A Short Circuit Protection (M22)
Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - L2 (white)
Pin 3 - L3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)
Figure 45 - Incoming Three-Phase Power for 25 A Short Circuit Protection (M35)
Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - L3 (red)
Pin 4 - L2 (white)
62
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Optional Locking Clip
Chapter 2
The clam shell design clips over the ArmorStart motor connector and motor
cable to limit customer access from disconnecting the motor cable on the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. The locking clip is an optional device
that can be used, if desired. A locking clip is not available for the M25 Source
Brake connection.
Figure 46 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Installation of Locking Clip
Figure 47 - Bulletin 284E Installation of Locking Clip
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
63
Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance
Maintenance
The ArmorStart controller does not require much regular maintenance. There
are a few checks that are needed to verify continued proper operation. When
using ArmorConnect media or conductors, verify that the connections remain
tight where exposed to shock and vibration. Check that the heatsink allows good
air flow. Bulletin 284 includes an internal circulating fan to support heat
conduction in high ambient applications. This fan operates when control power
is applied and cannot be controlled by any other means. Monitor the fan speed to
receive early warning of fan failure. If the fan rpm falls below 1740, a Hardware
Fault F14 is generated. Also in parameter 61, Last Pr Fault indicates a FAN RPM
fault has occurred.
IMPORTANT
64
The FAN RPM fault can be reset with firmware 66.022 or later. The fault reset
function is modified to allow normal operation for 24 hours before the fault
reoccurs. The replacement fan is PN 284-FAN. Refer to Hardware Fault Fan RPM Warning on page 235 for information regarding the monitoring of the
Fan RPM
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and
Device Level Ring Technology
Terminology
See the table for the meaning of common terms.
This Term
Means
Consumer
A destination device in the CIP networking model. See CIP.
CSMA/CD
Carrier sense multiple access/collision detection is the access method used in
Ethernet. When a device wants to gain access to the network, it checks to see if
the network is quiet (senses the carrier). If it is not, it waits a random amount of
time before retrying. If the network is quiet and two devices access the line at
exactly the same time, their signals collide. When the collision is detected, they
both back off and each waits a random amount of time before retrying.
Determinism
The ability to predict when information will be delivered. Important in timecritical applications.
DHCP
The dynamic host configuration protocol is an Internet protocol, similar to BootP,
for automating the configuration of computers that use TCP/IP. DHCP can be
used to automatically assign IP addresses, to deliver IP stack configuration
parameters, such as the subnet mask and default router, and to provide other
configuration information, such as the addresses for printer, time, and news
servers.
DNS
The domain name system is a hierarchical, distributed method of organizing the
name space of the Internet. The DNS administratively groups hosts into a
hierarchy of authority that allows addressing and other information to be
widely distributed and maintained. A significant advantage to the DNS is that
using it eliminates dependence on a centrally maintained file that maps host
names to addresses.
Ethernet
A physical layer standard using carrier sense multiple access with collision
detection (CSMA/CD) methods.
EtherNet/IP
Ethernet industrial protocol applies a common industrial protocol (CIP) over
Ethernet by encapsulating messages in TCP/UDP/IP.
Ethernet network
A local area network that is designed for the high-speed exchange of
information between computers and related devices.
Explicit messaging
Non-time critical messaging that is used for device configuration and data
collection, such as downloading programs or peer-to-peer messaging between
two PLC units.
Full duplex
A mode of communication that allows a device to send and receive information
simultaneously, effectively doubling the bandwidth.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
65
Chapter 3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
This Term
Means
Fully qualified
domain name
A fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is a domain name that includes all higher
level domains relevant to the entity named. If you think of the DNS as a treestructure with each node having its own label, a fully qualified domain name for
a specific node would be its label followed by the labels of all other nodes
between it and the root of the tree. For example, for a host, a FQDN would
include the string that identifies the particular host, plus all domains of which
the host is a part, up to and including the top-level domain (the root domain is
always null). For example, PARIS.NISC.SRI.COM is a fully qualified domain name
for the host at 192.33.33.109.
Gateway
A module or set of modules that allows communications between nodes on
dissimilar networks.
Hardware address
Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address (sometimes called a MAC
address) that is 48 bits. The address appears as six digits separated by colons
(such as, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx). Each digit has a value between 0 and 255 (0x00 to
0xFF). This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed. The
hardware address is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP
utility.
Host name
The host name is the unique name for a computer within its domain. It's always
the first element of a full name, and, with its domain and top-level domain
suffix, creates the unique name of that computer on the Internet. For example,
let's say a trading website is www.trading.com. The host name is www, which is
not unique on the web, but is unique within the trading domain.
The host name can also see the fully qualified domain name (FQDN), or in this
example, www.trading.com. Both naming methods seem to be used
interchangeably in various documents. For the purposes of this document, the
host name sees the FQDN, or as in this example, www.trading.com.
66
Hub
A central connecting device that joins devices together in a star configuration.
Hubs are generally not suitable for use in I/O control systems, since they are
time-critical applications that cannot tolerate lost packets.
Implicit messaging
Real-time messaging of I/O data.
IP
Internet protocol that provides the routing mechanism for messages. All
messages contain not only the address of the destination station, but the
address of a destination network, that allows messages to be sent to multiple
networks within an organization or around the world.
IP address
A 32-bit identification number for each node on an Internet Protocol network.
These addresses are represented as four sets of 8-bit numbers (numbers from 0
to 255), with decimals between them. Each node on the network must have a
unique IP address.
Latency
The time between initiating a request for data and the beginning of the actual
data transfer.
Multicast
In the CIP producer/consumer model, one producer multicasts (broadcasts) the
data once to all consumers.
Producer
The source of information in the CIP networking model. See CIP.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Introduction to EtherNet/IP
Chapter 3
This Term
Means
Subnet mask
An extension of the IP address that allows a site to use a single net ID for
multiple networks.
Switch
A network device that cross connects devices or network segments. A switch
provides each sender/receiver the full network bandwidth (2x in full duplex
mode), reduces collisions, and increases determinism.
TCP
The transport control protocol is a more reliable but slower transport protocol
than UDP. It is used for explicit (not time critical) messaging in EtherNet/IP.
Automation architectures must provide users with three primary services:
• Control services involve the exchange of time-critical data between
controlling devices and I/O devices.
• Networks must provide users configuration capabilities to set up and
maintain their automation systems.
• Automation architecture must allow for collection of data.
EtherNet/IP, provides installation flexibility and leverages commercially available
industrial infrastructure products. It is also compatible with other
communication standards, such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Simple
Networks Management Protocol (SNMP), and Dynamic Host Configuration
(DHCP).
EtherNet/IP is a CIP adaptation of TCP/IP that fully uses the IEEE standard.
The relationship between the TCP/IP and CIP to form EtherNet/IP is shown in
the ISO/OSI 7-layer model is shown in Figure 49. The OSI model is an ISO
standard for network communications that define all functions from a physical
layer to the protocol.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
67
Chapter 3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
This diagram shows how Rockwell Automation EtherNet/IP communication
modules fit into a control system.
Figure 48 - EtherNet/IP Communication Modules in a Control System
Distributed I/O
1769-L23Ex
1768-L4x
1768-ENBT
1756-EN2T
1756 I/O Modules
1769-L3xE
1794-AENT
1794 I/O Modules
1734-AENT
1734 I/O Modules
PowerFlex
Drive
Workstation
1783-ETAP
Workstation
ArmorStart
Ethernet/IP
1783-ETAP
1783-ETAP
PanelView Terminal
Device Level Ring
Device-level Ring Topology
1756-EN2TR
1756 I/O Modules
68
1734-AENTR
1734 I/O Modules
1738-AENTR
1738 I/O Modules
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Chapter 3
Figure 49 - OSI Model for ISO Standard for Network Communications
This approach provides real time technology into the Ethernet domain. With the
network extensions of CIP Safety, CIP Sync, and CIP Motion, CIP networks
allow for safety communication, time synchronization, and simple to high
performance motion all over the same EtherNet/IP network.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
69
Chapter 3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Linear Network Introduction
A linear network is a collection of devices that are daisy-chained together.
Figure 50 - Linear Network Collection of Devices
In this topology a communication issue in the media or device prevents nodes
downstream from communicating.
Figure 51 - Communication Issue in the Media or Device Line
The EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology allows this topology to be
implemented at the device level. No additional switches are required.
These are the primary advantages of a linear network:
• The network simplifies installation and reduces wiring and installation
costs.
• The network requires no special software configuration.
• Embedded switch products offer improved CIP Sync application
performance on linear networks.
The primary disadvantage of a linear network is that any break of the cable
disconnects all devices downstream from the break from the rest of the network.
70
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
IMPORTANT
Chapter 3
Products with EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to
a linear or DLR network in a single subnet.
You cannot use these ports as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two
different subnets.
Device Level Ring
Introduction
A Device Level Ring (DLR) protocol defines a set of behaviors, see Figure 52. A
ring supervisor keeps packets of information from circulating infinitely around
the ring by blocking one of the ports. A beacon frame constantly is detected on
both ring supervisor ports. If a beacon frame is not detected the supervisor
detects the physical layer issue and reconfigures the network to a linear topology
without the loss of any node communication or data. Once repaired the ring
supervisor reconfigures back to ring mode.
Figure 52 - DLR Protocol
.
As shown in Figure 53, when a physical layer failure is detected the adjacent
nodes to the fault generate a link status message that the ring supervisor
acknowledges. The ring supervisor unblocks the port to allow communication.
The neighboring nodes to the fault identify the fault and reconfigure themselves
to support a linear topology. Now, both the ring supervisor and nodes are
configured to support a linear topology.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
71
Chapter 3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Figure 53 - Physical Layer Failure is Detected
When the physical layer fault is corrected the supervisor will “hear” the beacon
frame again on both ports. Once this is detected the ring supervisor re-establishes
and configures the ring topology. All neighboring nodes detect this and
reconfigure themselves back to ring. A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant
network that is intended for the interconnection of automation devices.
At least one ring supervisor must be configured before a ring is formed.
IMPORTANT
Any nodes that do not support DLR should not be directly connected to the ring.
The node should be connected to the ring through a switch that supports DLR.
The advantages of the DLR network include:
• Simple installation
• Resilience to a single point of failure on the network
• Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network
The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort that is
required to set up and use the network as compared to a linear or star network.
IMPORTANT
Products with EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to
a linear or DLR network in a single subnet.
You cannot use these ports as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two
different subnets.
IMPORTANT
72
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP cannot be configured as a ring supervisor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Number of Nodes on a
DLR Network
Chapter 3
Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a
single DLR or linear network. If your application requires more than 50 nodes, it
is recommended that the DLR networks are segmented.
With smaller networks:
• There is better management of traffic on the network.
• The networks are easier to maintain.
• There is a lower likelihood of multiple faults.
Additionally, on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes, network recovery
times from faults are higher. For DLR networks with 50 or less nodes, ring
recovery time can be as low as 3 ms. If more than 50 nodes are required without
segmentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor. A detail review is
recommended to ensure bandwidth and response time are within application
requirements.
Ethernet Switches
Ethernet managed switches are key components that provide determinism and
the required throughput to achieve automation needs. Switches are able to
manage network traffic that reduces unnecessary delays or band width needs. A
properly designed EtherNet/IP infrastructure that implement segregation via
managed switch technology achieves a more reliable and secure network.
Ethernet Media
Today, unshield twisted pair (UTP) wiring is the standard in most applications
and allows for greatest flexibility and ease of installation and maintenance.
Category 5e (e-enhanced) cable is specifically designed to meet today’s
automation needs.
Standard RJ-45 connectors are not designed for industrial environments. For
outside the panel, IP67 connectors are required for EtherNet/IP.
Figure 54 - Network Media - Ethernet M12 D-Code Media
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
73
Chapter 3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
EtherNet/IP General
Wiring Guideline
Ethernet is found in automation equipment, panels, and components. There are a
few guidelines, that if followed, will reduce the number of issues an EtherNet/IP
application may experience.
• Many EtherNet/IP applications share the same space with power
conductors. If the Ethernet media must cross power conductors, do so at
right angles. This reduces the coupling effect and reduce the potential for
communication noise.
• Where possible, route the Ethernet/IP media five feet or more from high
voltage sources (for example, lights, ballasts, motors, …) or sources of radio
frequency, such as variable frequency drives.
• Ensure that the application or equipment follows industry acceptable
grounding practices.
• Maintain media lengths between nodes to less than 100 m (328 ft). In
today’s environment, it may be challenging to maintain these guidelines,
however these reduce potential application issues.
Requested Packet Interval
The Requested Packet Interval (RPI) is the update rate that is specified for a
particular piece of data on the network. This value specifies how often to produce
the data for that device. For example, if you specify an RPI of 50 ms, it means that
every 50 ms the device should send data to the controller or the controller should
send data to the device.
Only data-producing modules require an RPI. For example, a local EtherNet/IP
communication module requires no RPI because it produces no data for the
system. Instead it functions only as a bridge.
To set an RPI, follow these steps.
1. Verify the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP module AOP is installed, started, and
connected to the controller.
2. In the Controller Organizer tree, right-click the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP
module and choose Properties.
74
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Chapter 3
The Module Properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. From the Requested Packet Interval (RPI) menu, enter the rate at which
you want data to be updated over a connection.
Only set the RPI to the rate the application requires.
IMPORTANT
The RPI determines the number of packets per second that the module produces on a
connection. Each module can produce only a limited number of packets per second.
Exceeding this limit prevents the module from opening more connections.
5. Click OK.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
75
Chapter 3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Notes:
76
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
4
Product Commissioning
The IP address identifies each node on the IP network (or system of connected
networks). Each TCP/IP node on a network must have a unique IP address.
IP Address
The IP address is 32 bits long and has a net ID part and Host ID part. Networks
are classified A, B, C, (or other). The class of the network determines how an IP
address is formatted.
Figure 55 - IP Address on the IP Network
78
Class A
0
0
Class B
0
10
Class C
0
110
31
Host ID
Net ID
15 16
31
Host ID
Net ID
23 24
31
Net ID
Host ID
You can distinguish the class of the IP address from the first integer in its
dotted-decimal IP address as follows:
Range of first integer
Class
Range of first integer
Class
0…127
A
192…223
C
128…191
B
224…255
other
There are reserved values that you cannot use as the first octet in the address.
These numbers are examples of values you cannot use:
• 001.xxx.xxx.xxx
• 127.xxx.xxx.xxx
• 223 to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
The specific reserved values that cannot be used vary according to the conditions
of each application. The previous values are only examples of reserved values.
Each node on the same physical network must have an IP address of the same
class and must have the same net ID. Each node on the same network must have a
different Host ID thus giving it a unique IP address.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
77
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
Gateway Address
A gateway connects individual physical networks into a system of networks.
When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network, a gateway
transfers the data between the two networks. This field is set to 0.0.0.0 by default.
Subnet Mask
Subnet addressing is an extension of the IP address scheme that allows a site to use
a single network ID for multiple physical networks. Routing outside of the site
continues by dividing the IP address into a net ID and a host ID via the class.
Inside a site, the subnet mask is used to redivide the IP address into a custom
network ID portion and host ID portion. This field is set to 0.0.0.0 by default.
If you change the subnet mask of an already-configured module, you must cycle
power to the module for the change to take effect.
Configuring EtherNet/
IP Address
Before using the ArmorStart, you may need to configure an IP address, subnet
mask, and optional Gateway address. The rotary network address switches found
on the I/O section of the ArmorStart are set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the
factory default. The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the
switches are set to a valid IP address between 1…254. When switches are set to a
valid number the IP address will be 192.168.1._ _ _ [switch setting].
The IP address can also be set using DHCP.
• If DHCP is preferred, use Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP utility,
version 2.3 or later, that ships with RSLogix 5000 or RSLinx software.
• Or use a third party DHCP server.
This document assumes that the user has set the IP address to 192.168.1.1. The
user can change this IP address to any address either statically or dynamically.
ATTENTION: To avoid unintended operation, the adapter must be assigned a
fixed IP address. If a DHCP server is used, it must be configured to assign a fixed
IP address for your adapter.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or
loss of process control.
78
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Commissioning
Chapter 4
Manually Configure the Network Address Switches
Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches. Set the network address by
adjusting the three switches on the front of the I/O module.
Figure 56 - Switches on the I/O Module
Writable surface for IP address
Protective IP67 Caps
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
79
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
Figure 57 - Network Address Example
X10
X100
This example shows the
IP address set to 163
for IP Address 192.168.1.163
2
8
6
X1
0
0
4
0
2
8
6
4
2
8
6
4
Valid IP address switch settings range from 001 to 254. When the switches are set
to a valid number, the adapter’s IP address will be 192.168.1.xxx (where xxx
represents the number set on the switches; see Figure 57). The adapter’s subnet
mask is 255.255.255.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0. A power cycle is
required for any new IP address to take effect.
Note: The upper three octets are fixed. DHCP or the embedded webserver must
be used to configure the IP address to a value other than 192.168.1.xxx.
If the switches are set to an invalid number (such as 000 or a value greater than
254), the adapter will check to see if DHCP is enabled. If DHCP is enabled, the
adapter requests an address from a DHCP server. If DHCP is not enabled, the
adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters)
stored in non-volatile memory.
IMPORTANT
See Figure 58. The ArmorStart is shipped with the control module rotary switches
set to a value of 99. DO NOT modify this setting. If these are changed and the
unit stops responding, the switches will need to be manually set to node address
63 and power cycled.
Figure 58 - Rotary Switch on Control Module
Factory Setting 99
DO NOT CHANGE!
80
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Commissioning
Use the Rockwell Automation
BootP/DHCP Utility
Chapter 4
The Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP utility is a stand alone program that
incorporates the functionality of standard BootP/DHCP software with a userfriendly graphical interface. It is located in the Utils directory on the
RSLogix 5000 installation CD. The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP adapter must have
DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility.
IMPORTANT
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP does not support BootP.
To configure your adapter using the BootP/DHCP utility, perform the following
steps:
1. Run the BootP/DHCP software.
In the BootP/DHCP Request History panel the hardware addresses of the
devices issuing BootP/DHCP requests are shown.
Figure 59 - BootP/DHCP Request History Panel
2. Double-click the hardware address of the device that you want to
configure.
The New Entry dialog with the device’s Ethernet Address (MAC) is
shown.
Figure 60 - New Entry Dialog Box
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
81
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
3. Enter the IP Address that you want to assign to the device, and click OK.
The device is added to the Relation List, displaying the Ethernet Address
(MAC) and corresponding IP Address, Hostname, and Description (if
applicable).
Figure 61 - Relation List
When the address displays in the IP Address column in the Request
History section, it signifies that the IP address assignment has been made.
4. To assign this configuration to the device, highlight the device in the
Relation List panel, and click the Disable BOOTP/DHCP button.
When power is cycled to the device, it uses the configuration you assigned
and does not issue a DHCP request.
5. To enable DHCP for a device with DHCP disabled, highlight the device
in the Relation List, and click the Enable DHCP button.
You must have an entry for the device in the Relation List panel to
re-enable DHCP.
Figure 62 - Enable DHCP Button
82
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Commissioning
Chapter 4
Save the Relation List
You can save the Relation List to use later. To save the Relation List perform the
following steps:
1. Select Save As... from the File menu.
Figure 63 - Save the Relation List
The Save As Dialog is shown.
Figure 64 - Save As Dialog Box
2. Select the folder that you want to Save in.
3. Enter a File name for the Relation List (for example, Control System
Configuration), and click Save.
You can leave the Save as type at the default setting: Bootp
You can then open the file containing the Relation List at a later session.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
83
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
DHCP IP Support
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns
IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP/IP network.
When DHCP is enabled (factory default Enabled), the unit will request its
network configuration from a DHCP/BOOTP server. Any configuration
received from a DHCP server is stored in non-volatile memory.
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP remembers the last successful address if DHCP is
enabled. The unit tries to obtain the same IP address from the DHCP server. If
the server is not present (e.g., server fails to power up), the unit will use the IP
address it previously received from the server. The DHCP timeout = 30 s.
Be cautious about using DHCP software to configure your adapter. A DHCP
server typically assigns a finite lease time to the offered IP address. When 50% of
the leased time has expired, the ArmorStart Ethernet adapter attempts to renew
its IP address with the DHCP server. The possibility exists that the adapter will
be assigned a different IP address, that would cause the adapter to cease
communicating with the controller.
84
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Commissioning
Using the Rockwell
Automation Embedded
Web Server
Chapter 4
Internal Web Server
ArmorStart Ethernet/IP internal web server allows you to view information and
configure the ArmorStart via a web browser. The embedded web server is used to
access configuration and status data. Security in the form of an administrative
password can be set. The default Login is Administrator. There is no password
set by default.
IMPORTANT
The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel.
If the login and password are lost you will need to reset the device to the factory
defaults, that results in losing its configuration.
To access the internal web browser, open your computers internet browser and
enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart (for example, 192.168.1.1).
Note: 192.168.1.1 is NOT the factory default IP address as DHCP is enabled by
default.
Figure 65 - Internal Web Browser
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
85
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
From here you are able to view parameter settings, device status, and diagnostics
from multiple tab views.
Figure 66 - Multiple Tab Views
86
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Commissioning
Chapter 4
Network Configuration
To access the network configuration, log in to the Administrative Setting. The
factory default login is Administrator. The factory default password is not used.
The user should change the password to ensure unauthorized personnel do not
access and modify the device configuration.
Figure 67 - Network Configurations
From this screen you can change the Ethernet Configuration. For example, in the
above image the default IP address was changed from 192.168.1.1 to
10.10.10.101. To access the webpage after a power cycle, the new address must be
used.
It is also important to leave the Ethernet link configuration P1/P2 set to auto
negotiate to minimize network issues. But if this is not acceptable you must verify
that all devices on the network are set to the same setting or network issues may
result.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
87
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
Parameter Configuration
ArmorStart Ethernet/IP embedded web server provides the user the ability to
view and modify the device configuration without having to access
RSLogix 5000. To view the device configuration from the web server, select the
Parameters folder. For the parameter configuration, the user logs in through the
Administrative Settings, or when prompted.
Figure 68 - Starter Setup
In the figure above the Starter Setup parameters are viewed. The user can view
all parameters from this screen. To modify a parameter, the user clicks the “Edit”
button.
Figure 69 - Enter Network Password
The user is prompted to enter the default user name (Administrator). There is no
password set by default. The user is expected to change the user name (login) and
password to avoid unauthorized access to the device configuration.
88
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Commissioning
Chapter 4
Figure 70 - Overload Class Settings
The above screen shows an example of changing the Overload Class setting to 15.
Once all changes are made select Apply.
E-mail Notification Configuration
ArmorStart Ethernet/IP internal web server supports the e-mailing of warning
and trip messages via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). The configuration
parameters for the SMTP Server’s IP address, user login, and port number are
configurable through the Administrative Settings page of the internal web server.
The user configures the device name, device description, and device trip type.
Figure 71 - E-mail Notification Configuration
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
89
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
E-mail triggers when a:
•
•
•
•
Trip occurs
Trip is cleared
Warning occurs
Warning is cleared
Note: “Cleared Event” e-mails are only sent when all events have been cleared and
if a trip event e-mail has previously been sent. For example, if the device is
configured to send e-mails when a phase loss trip and an overload trip is detected,
no e-mail is sent when both the overload and the phase loss is cleared.
The following is an example trip e-mail:
Subject:
ArmorStart 281E, 0.5…2.5 A, 24V DC has detected a trip.
Body:
Trip Type:
Overload
Trip Info:
Load has drawn excessive current that is based on the trip
class selected.
Device Name:
ArmorStart 281E, 0.5…2.5 A, 24V DC
(From Identity Object)
Device Description: Lift conveyor On-Machine motor starter
(From E-mail Config web page)
Device Connections
90
Device Location:
Customer Plant
(From E-mail Config web page)
Contact Info:
Joe Schmo
(From E-mail Config web page)
[email protected]
The device supports both scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 &
UCMM) CIP connections. A maximum of two Class 1 CIP connections (one
exclusive owner and one listen only) are supported, one per PLC. Six Class 3 CIP
connections are supported.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Commissioning
Ownership
Chapter 4
In a Studio 5000® system, modules multicast data. Therefore, multiple modules
can receive the same data simultaneously from a single module. When choosing a
communication format, decide whether to establish an owner-controller or
listen-only relationship with the module.
Table 6 - Communication Relationship
Ownership Type
Description
Owner controller
The controller that creates the primary configuration and communication connection to a module. The owner controller writes
configuration data and can establish a connection to the module.
Listen-only connection
An I/O connection where another controller owns/provides the configuration data for the I/O module. A controller using a listen-only
connection monitors only the module. It does not write configuration data and can only maintain a connection to the I/O module when the
owner controller is actively controlling the I/O module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
91
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
Ethernet Statistics Web Page
The Ethernet Statistics web page of a scanner provides a summary of the status of
communication activity on the Ethernet network.
The most commonly monitored fields are circled in the graphic and described in
the table that follows.
This table describes the field that is most commonly used on the Ethernet
Statistics web page.
Table 7 - Ethernet Statistics Web Page
Field
Specifies
Ethernet Port 1 (These definitions apply to the same fields in the Ethernet Port 2 section.)
Interface State
Whether the port is turned off or on. Active or inactive indicates whether there is a cable that is connected.
Link Status
Whether the port is blocked for DLR protocol frames.
Speed
Whether the Ethernet port is operating at 10 or 100 MBps.
Duplex
Whether the Ethernet port is operating at half duplex or full duplex.
Autonegotiate Status
Whether the port speed and Duplex mode were determined via autonegotiation or whether they were manually configured.
Media Counters Port 1
Alignment Errors
A frame containing bits that do not total an integral multiple of eight.
FCS Errors
A frame containing eight bits, at least one of which has been corrupted.
Single Collisions
The number of outgoing packets that encountered only one collision during transmission.
92
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Product Commissioning
Field
Chapter 4
Specifies
Multiple Collisions
The number of outgoing packets that encountered 2...15 collisions during transmission.
SQE Test Errors
A test to detect the collision-present circuit between a transceiver and a network interface card (NIC).
IMPORTANT: Because most NICs now have an integrated transceiver, the SQE test is unnecessary. Ignore this media counter.
Deferred Transmissions
The number of outgoing packets whose transmission is deferred because the network is busy when the first attempt is made to send them.
Late Collisions
The number of times two devices transmit data simultaneously.
Excessive Collisions
The number of frames that experience 16 consecutive collisions.
MAC Transmit Errors
Frames for which transmission fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.
Carrier Sense Errors
Times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.
Frame Too Long
The number of incoming packets that exceed the maximum Ethernet packet size.
MAC Receive Errors
Frames for which reception on the Ethernet interface failed due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.
Connection Manager Cmd
Object Info Web Page
The Connection Manager Cmd Object Info web page of a scanner provides a
summary of connection request activity on the Ethernet network.
The most commonly used field on this page is Connections Closed due to a
Timeout. This field shows the number of CIP connection timeouts that have
occurred on the module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
93
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
Ring Statistics Web Page
IMPORTANT
The Ring Statistics web page, and the descriptions in this section, only apply to
modules you can use in a Device-level Ring (DLR) network:
• 1756-EN2TR communication module
• 1756-EN3TR communication module
The Ring Statistics web page of a scanner provides a summary of the module’s
operating state in a DLR application.
The most commonly monitored fields are circled in the graphic and described in
the table that follows.
This table describes the field that is most commonly used on the Ring Statistics
web page.
Table 8 - Ring Statistics Web Page
Field
Specifies
Ring Supervisor
Ring Supervisor Mode
Whether a module is configured to function as supervisor node or a ring node.
Ring Supervisor Status
Whether a module that is configured to function as a supervisor node is functioning as the active ring supervisor or a
backup supervisor node.
Ring Fault Location
Last Active Node on Port 1
The IP or MAC ID address of the last active node between port 1 on the module and the faulted part of the network.
Last Active Node on Port 2
The IP or MAC ID address of the last active node between port 2 on the module and the faulted part of the network.
Active Ring Supervisor
Address
The IP or MAC ID address of the active ring supervisor.
Precedence
The precedence value of the module. If the active supervisor node’s operation is interrupted the backup supervisor with
the next highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor node.
94
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000
Software
Setup
This section shows you how to add an ArmorStart AOP to RSLogix™ 5000
software. It is assumed that you have downloaded and installed the AOP so that
the RSLogix 5000 software can fully support the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP. The
AOP can be downloaded from: http://support.rockwellautomation.com/
controlflash/LogixProfiler.asp.
1. Open RSLogix 5000 software by double-clicking the icon on your
desktop.
2. Select File > New, to create a new project.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
95
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
3. Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type
pull-down menu. (For this example, a Cat. No. 1769-L35E and software
version 19 is used.) Click OK.
4. To add a new module to the tree, right-click
Ethernet and select New
Module. This allows you to add a new ArmorStart selection to the Logix
Project.
96
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
5. Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK.
6. The AOP is shown below. Enter a Name for this ArmorStart selection and
an Ethernet address. For this example, the Private Network setting is used.
This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the
ArmorStart selection. Click OK.
Note: See Configuring EtherNet/IP Address in Chapter 4 to set an IP
address on the device.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
97
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Connect and Configure
ArmorStart with Add-OnProfile (AOP)
This section shows the AOP tabs and how they can be used to connect, obtain
status, and configure the ArmorStart selection. Before the walkthrough is started,
the RSLogix 5000 software should be open and an AOP displayed as shown
below.
The screenshot above displays that the AOP has seven tabs that can be used to
configure and/or monitor your ArmorStart selection. The following lists the tabs
and whether they are editable or not, with the controller when OFFLINE,
ONLINE, or both:
• General – OFFLINE
• Connection – OFFLINE
• Module Info – ONLINE
• Parameters – OFFLINE/ONLINE
Internet Protocol – ONLINE
• Port Configuration – ONLINE
• Network – ONLINE
The last five tabs in the list do not display information until the ONLINE
connection has been established with the ArmorStart device. The General,
Connection, and Parameters tabs are discussed first, because they are used to
define OFFLINE settings so that connection with the ArmorStart device can be
established.
98
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Offline Connection
Chapter 5
General Tab
Click the General tab to display the following:
This tab allows you to name your module, which should be descriptive and
representative of the module. The IP Address of the module must also be input so
that communication can be established. The IP Address should be the one
defined using the BootP/DHCP Server, the Rotary Network Address Switches
or the ArmorStart internal web server.
For most cases, the Host Name and Module Definition section of this tab do not
require any adjustment. Changes to either of these should only be made if you are
familiar with the functionality of each of these sections.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
99
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Connection Tab
Click the Connection tab to display the following:
The Request Packet Interval (RPI) indicates the maximum frequency at which
data is received. It is possible that data could come more quickly than the time
interval assigned in the RPI. In most cases, the default 20 ms should be the
optimal setting. If you check the Inhibit Module option, connection to controller
tags will be broken. The Major Fault on Controller if Connection Fails While in
Run Mode option should be checked to ensure that the controller processes the
connection fault with the ArmorStart. The Use Unicast Connection over
EtherNet/IP is checked to use the Unicast mode instead of the EtherNet/IP
mode. This appears only for modules using RSLogix 5000 software version 18 or
later that supports Unicast.
100
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Parameters Tab
Click the Parameters tab to display the following:
The parameters are divided into groups that are based on the type of ArmorStart
device. By clicking in the Group pull-down menu, you can choose which
parameter group is displayed. When the Parameters tab is selected, the tab
defaults to the Drive Setup (Bulletin 284E) or Starter Setup (Bulletin 280E)
groups depending on the ArmorStart selection. These Setup groups are the
minimum required parameters to get the ArmorStart device running.
After this parameter group has been set, the next time that the Parameters tab is
opened, all parameters are shown and the tab is no longer default to the setup
groups.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
101
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Online Connection
Now that the offline connection settings have been set, connect to the
ArmorStart device to review the last five AOP tabs.
Note: If you are using a Cat. No. 1756-ENBT Ethernet module to communicate with
the PLC, verify that you have updated the module’s firmware to Revision 6.001 or
later. The latest firmware can be found at http://support.rockwellautomation.com/
controlflash/.
1. If a controller path is not set in the field that is shown below, you must first
set a path before going online with the controller. Click the
button shown below.
2. Expand and browse the AB_ETHIP-1, Ethernet driver.
3. Select the Controller path. Then click Go Online.
102
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
RSwho
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
4. The following appears and for this example, click Download to connect to
the controller.
5. If a download confirmation dialog box appears, click Download again.
6. Click Yes to bring the controller back to Remote Run.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
103
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
7. The controller should now be online. If at any point you go offline and a
path is selected, you can also go online by clicking the Offline drop down
in the upper left corner of the screen. Click Go Online to connect to the
ArmorStart device, as shown below.
Note: If a yellow triangle appears next to the ArmorStart Icon in the
Controller Organizer Tree as shown below, it means that the connection is
faulted. The problem must be fixed before you can connect to the
ArmorStart device. The next steps assume that the connection was
successful.
104
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Parameters Tab
Return to the Parameters tab again once the AOP is opened by selecting the
ArmorStart in the project tree. Notice that when clicking in the Parameters tab,
an ArmorStart Correlation pop-up window is displayed, as shown below.
This indicates that the AOP is comparing the parameter data entered offline vs.
the parameter data that is stored in the ArmorStart device. If any discrepancies are
found between the parameters in the AOP and the parameters in the ArmorStart
device, a window will pop-up, as shown below, asking you to decide which
parameters you want to keep.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
105
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
If you want to keep the parameters in the AOP, select Download. If you want to
keep the parameters in the ArmorStart device, select Upload. Otherwise, select
Cancel. Clicking Cancel locks the user out of viewing the values. If you are
connected to a new ArmorStart device and you just created the ArmorStart
object and have not made any changes in the parameters, the ArmorStart
correlation should not find any discrepancy.
Note: If you make any changes to the parameters offline, they will not be
downloaded to the ArmorStart device when the connection is made (going
Online). For the Offline changes to take effect you must go to the Parameters tab.
Once you click the Parameters tab, ArmorStart correlation takes place and then
the changes can be downloaded to the ArmorStart device.
Module Info Tab
Click the Module Info tab to display the following:
This tab displays general identification information, as well as status information
about the ArmorStart device. It is important to note that the information that is
displayed in this tab is not constantly updated. After you click the Module Info
tab, the AOP queries the ArmorStart device once for the information displayed
in this tab and does not query the ArmorStart for the values again. If after the
initial query the status of the ArmorStart device changes, for example a fault
occurs, the change in the status will not be automatically updated. The Refresh
button must be pressed to request the AOP for another ArmorStart query.
Note: A connection status (offline, online, downloading, or uploading) is
provided at the bottom left of the tab window. The connection status appears in
all tabs.
106
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Internet Protocol Tab
Click the Internet Protocol tab to display the following:
If the IP address was set up using the Rotary Network Address Switches, default
settings for the IP would already be established and you will not be able to make
any changes in this tab. In most cases, you would not need to make any changes in
this tab and it only displays the current IP Settings Configuration.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
107
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Port Configuration Tab
Click the Port Configuration tab to display the following:
This tab is used to enable or disable a physical port in the module. The ports are
normally in Auto Negotiate mode, which in general, is the recommended setting.
Otherwise, you have to physically set the Speed or Duplex selection in this tab. It
is important to note that although there are two physical ports, they act as one.
Therefore, when you press either of the Port Diagnostic buttons, information
coming from both of the physical ports is displayed.
108
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Network Tab
Click this tab to display the following:
This tab displays information about the network configuration, such as the type
of topology (linear or device level ring).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
109
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Auto-Generated Tags
After you install and configure the AOP, the controller tags are generated. The
tags names are descriptive and automatically generated. This greatly simplifies
programming. The figure below shows an example of the auto-generated tags for
an ArmorStart selection.
The following tables provide more clarification regarding the Produce and
Consume assemblies and how they correlate with the auto-generated names.
Using an AOP the data in the Consumed and Produced Assemblies are
automatically created as descriptive tag names. To drive this point home we've
highlighted a few of the commands to demonstrate the AOP tag alignment to the
Consumed and Produced Assemblies in the following tables.
110
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Table 9 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 284E
Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
Out B
Out A
—
JogReverse
JogForward
ResetFault
RunReverse
RunForward
1
DriveInput4
DriveInput3
DriveInput2
DriveInput1
DecelCtrl_1
DecelCtrl_0
AccelCtrl_1
AccelCtrl_0
2
FreqCommand (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
3
FreqCommand (High) (xxx.x Hz)
4
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt00DeviceIn
5
Pt15DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt9DeviceIn
Pt8DeviceIn
Table 10 - Bulletin 284E Consume Assembly Command Tags
Controller Output/ Command Tags
Controller Name
Name
Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO
RunForward
AS_DEMO:O.RunForward
AS_DEMO
RunReverse
AS_DEMO:O.RunReverse
AS_DEMO
ResetFault
AS_DEMO:O.ResetFault
AS_DEMO
JogForward
AS_DEMO:O.JogForward
AS_DEMO
JogReverse
AS_DEMO:O.JogReverse
AS_DEMO
OutA
AS_DEMO:O.OutA
AS_DEMO
OutB
AS_DEMO:O.OutB
AS_DEMO
AccelCtrl_0
AS_DEMO:O.AccelCtrl_0
AS_DEMO
AccelCtrl_1
AS_DEMO:O.AccelCtrl_1
AS_DEMO
DecelCtrl_0
AS_DEMO:O.DecelCtrl_0
AS_DEMO
DecelCtrl_1
AS_DEMO:O.DecelCtrl_1
AS_DEMO
DriveInput1
AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput1
AS_DEMO
DriveInput2
AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput2
AS_DEMO
DriveInput3
AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput3
AS_DEMO
DriveInput4
AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput4
AS_DEMO
FreqCommand
AS_DEMO:O.FreqCommand
AS_DEMO
Pt00DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt00DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt01DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt01DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt02DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt02DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt03DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt03DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt04DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt04DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt05DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt05DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt06DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt06DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt07DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt07DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt08DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt08DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt09DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt09DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt10DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt10DeviceIn
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
111
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Controller Output/ Command Tags
Controller Name
Name
Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO
Pt11DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt11DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt12DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt12DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt13DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt13DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
Pt14DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt14DeviceIn
Table 11 - Default Produce Assembly for Bulletin 284E
Produce Assembly - Instance 151 “Drive Status” - Bulletin284E Starters
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
0
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
1
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
2
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
3
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
4
AtReference
Network
ReferenceStatus
NetControlStatus
Ready
RunningReverse
RunningForward
WarningPresent
TripPresent
5
Output
ContactorStatus
Brake
ContactorStatus
DisconnectClosed
Hand
In3
In2
In1
In0
6
OutputFrequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
7
OutputFrequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
8
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt00DeviceOut
9
LogicEnable
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
P10DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
10
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)" - Int00DeviceOut
11
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)" - Int00DeviceOut
12
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)" - Int01DeviceOut
13
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)" - Int01DeviceOut
14
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)" - Int02DeviceOut
15
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)" - Int02DeviceOut
16
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)" - Int03DeviceOut
17
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)" - Int03DeviceOut
➊ Identifies if a Communication Fault exists. If a communication loss is present the PLC writes four bytes of 1's to this tag. The user
should monitor this tag to ensure the data is valid.
IMPORTANT
112
The user PLC control program should monitor the I.Fault tag to ensure the data is
accurate. When a communications fault occurs, the data in the consume and produce
tags may not accurately reflect the status.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Table 12 - Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly Status Tags
Controller Input/ Status Tags
Controller Name
Name
Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO
Fault
AS_DEMO:I.Fault
AS_DEMO
TripPresent
AS_DEMO:I.TripPresent
AS_DEMO
WarningPresent
AS_DEMO:I.WarningPresent
AS_DEMO
RunningForward
AS_DEMO:I.RunningForward
AS_DEMO
RunningReverse
AS_DEMO:I.RunningReverse
AS_DEMO
Ready
AS_DEMO:I.Ready
AS_DEMO
NetworkControlStatus
AS_DEMO:I.NetworkControlStatus
AS_DEMO
NetworkReferenceStatus
AS_DEMO:I.NetworkReferenceStatus
AS_DEMO
AtReference
AS_DEMO:I.AtReference
AS_DEMO
In0
AS_DEMO:I.In0
AS_DEMO
In1
AS_DEMO:I.In1
AS_DEMO
In2
AS_DEMO:I.In2
AS_DEMO
In3
AS_DEMO:I.In3
AS_DEMO
Hand
AS_DEMO:I.Hand
AS_DEMO
DisconnectClosed
AS_DEMO:I.DisconnectClosed
AS_DEMO
BrakeContactorStatus
AS_DEMO:I.BrakeContactorStatus
AS_DEMO
OutputContactorStatus
AS_DEMO:I.OutputContactorStatus
AS_DEMO
OutputFrequency
AS_DEMO:I.OutputFrequency
AS_DEMO
Pt00DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt00DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt02DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt02DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt03DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt03DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt04DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt04DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt05DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt05DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt06DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt06DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt07DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt07DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt08DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt08DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt09DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt09DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt10DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt10DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt11DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt11DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt12DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt12DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt13DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt13DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Pt14DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt14DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
LogicEnabled
AS_DEMO:I.LogicEnabled
AS_DEMO
Int00DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Int00DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Int01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Int01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Int02DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Int02DeviceOut
AS_DEMO
Int03DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Int03DeviceOut
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
113
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Table 13 - Bulletin 284E Consume Assembly/Command Tag Explanation
114
Controller Output/ Command Tags
Tag Description/Use
RunForward
Command VFD forward
RunReverse
Command VFD reverse
ResetFault
Fault reset
JogForward
Command Jog forward per internal frequency
JogReverse
Command Jog reverse per internal frequency
OutA
Output A
OutB
Output B
AccelCtrl_0
VFD acceleration ramp 1
AccelCtrl_1
VFD acceleration ramp 2
DecelCtrl_0
VFD deceleration ramp 1
DecelCtrl_1
VFD deceleration ramp 2
DriveInput1
VFD Digit Input 1
DriveInput2
VFD Digit Input 2
DriveInput3
VFD Digit Input 3
DriveInput4
VFD Digit Input 4
FreqCommand
Logix commanded frequency
Pt00DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt01DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt02DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt03DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt04DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt05DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt06DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt07DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt08DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt09DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt10DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt11DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt12DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt13DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt14DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt15DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Table 14 - Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly/Status Tag Explanation
Controller Input/ Status Tags Tag Description/Use
Fault
Communication Fault between PLC and Device (all 1's = Fault, all 0's = Normal)
TripPresent
Fault exists with unit
WarningPresent
Warning of potential fault
RunningForward
Motor commanded to run forward
RunningReverse
Motor commanded to run reverse
Ready
Control Power and 3-phase present
NetworkControlStatus
Start and Stop command comes from network (PLC or Connected Explicit Messaging)
NetworkReferenceStatus
Speed reference comes from the network (not DeviceLogix)
AtReference
At commanded speed reference
In0
Input 0
In1
Input 1
In2
Input 2
In3
Input 3
Hand
HOA is in Auto mode
DisconnectClosed
Disconnect is closed
BrakeContactorStatus
Source brake contactor status (1=close, 0=open)
OutputContactorStatus
Ouput contactor status (1=close, 0=open)
OutputFrequency
VFD frequency
Pt00DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt01DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt02DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt03DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt04DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt05DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt06DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt07DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt08DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt09DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt10DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt11DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt12DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt13DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt14DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
LogicEnabled
DeviceLogix is enabled
Int00DeviceOut
Data reference by Parameter 13
Int01DeviceOut
Data reference by Parameter 14
Int02DeviceOut
Data reference by Parameter 15
Int03DeviceOut
Data reference by Parameter 16
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
115
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Table 15 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 280E, 281E
Instance 162 Default Consumed DOL and Reversing Starter
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
OutB
OutA
—
—
—
ResetFault
RunReverse
RunForward
1
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt00DeviceIn
2
Pt15DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Table 16 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Controller Output/Command Tags
Controller Name
116
Name
Logix Tag Name
DEMO_REV
RunForward
DEMO_REV:O.RunForward
DEMO_REV
RunReverse
DEMO_REV:O.RunReverse
DEMO_REV
ResetFault
DEMO_REV:O.ResetFault
DEMO_REV
OutA
DEMO_REV:O.OutA
DEMO_REV
OutB
DEMO_REV:O.OutB
DEMO_REV
Pt00DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt00DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt01DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt01DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt02DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt02DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt03DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt03DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt04DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt04DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt05DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt05DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt06DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt06DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt07DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt07DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt08DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt08DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt09DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt09DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt10DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt10DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt11DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt11DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt12DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt12DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt13DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt13DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt14DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt14DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
Pt15DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt15DeviceIn
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Table 17 Instance 150 "Starter Stat" - Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E, 281E Starters
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
0
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
1
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
2
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
3
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
4
—
—
—
Ready
RunningReverse
RunningForward
WarningPresent
TripPresent
5
—
—
DisconnectClosed
Hand
In3
In2
In1
In0
6
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt00DeviceOut
7
LogicEnable
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
8
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)" - ProducedWord0Param
9
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)" - ProducedWord0Param
10
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)" - ProducedWord1Param
11
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)" - ProducedWord1Param
12
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)" - ProducedWord2Param
13
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)" - ProducedWord2Param
14
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)" - ProducedWord3Param
15
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)" - ProducedWord3Param
➊ Identifies if a Communication Fault exists. If a communication loss is present the PLC writes four bytes of 1's to this tag. The user
should monitor this tag to ensure the data is valid.
IMPORTANT
The user PLC control program should monitor the I.Fault tag to ensure the data is
accurate. When a communications fault occurs, the data in the consume and produce
tags may not accurately reflect the status.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
117
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Table 18 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Controller Input/ Status Tags
118
Controller Name
Name
Logix Tag Name
DEMO_REV
Fault
DEMO_REV:I.Fault
DEMO_REV
TripPresent
DEMO_REV:I.TripPresent
DEMO_REV
WarningPresent
DEMO_REV:I.WarningPresent
DEMO_REV
RunningForward
DEMO_REV:I.RunningForward
DEMO_REV
RunningReverse
DEMO_REV:I.RunningReverse
DEMO_REV
Ready
DEMO_REV:I.Ready
DEMO_REV
In0
DEMO_REV:I.In0
DEMO_REV
In1
DEMO_REV:I.In1
DEMO_REV
In2
DEMO_REV:I.In2
DEMO_REV
In3
DEMO_REV:I.In3
DEMO_REV
Hand
DEMO_REV:I.Hand
DEMO_REV
DisconnectClosed
DEMO_REV:I.DisconnectClosed
DEMO_REV
Pt00DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt00DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt01DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt01DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt02DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt02DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt03DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt03DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt04DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt04DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt05DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt05DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt06DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt06DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt07DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt07DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt08DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt08DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt09DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt09DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt10DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt10DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt11DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt11DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt12DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt12DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt13DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt13DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
Pt14DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt14DeviceOut
DEMO_REV
LogicEnabled
DEMO_REV:I.LogicEnabled
DEMO_REV
ProducedWord0Param
DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord0Param
DEMO_REV
ProducedWord1Param
DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord1Param
DEMO_REV
ProducedWord2Param
DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord2Param
DEMO_REV
ProducedWord3Param
DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord3Param
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Chapter 5
Table 19 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Consume Assembly Command Tag Explanation
Controller Output/ Command Tags
Tag Description/Use
RunForward
Command VFD forward
RunReverse
Command VFD reverse
ResetFault
Fault reset
OutA
OutputA
OutB
OutputB
Pt00DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt01DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt02DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt03DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt04DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt05DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt06DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt07DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt08DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt09DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt10DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt11DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt12DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt13DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt14DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt15DeviceIn
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
119
Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software
Table 20 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Produced Assembly Status Tag Explanation
Controller Input/Status Tags
Fault
TripPresent
Communication Fault between PLC and Device
(all 1's = Fault, all 0's = Normal)
Fault exists with unit
WarningPresent
Warning of potential fault
RunningForward
Motor commanded to run forward
RunningReverse
Motor commanded to run reverse
Ready
Control Power and 3-phase present
In0
Input 0
In1
Input 1
In2
Input 2
In3
Input 3
Hand
DisconnectClosed
120
Tag Description/Use
HOA is in Auto mode
Disconnect is closed
Pt00DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt01DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt02DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt03DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt04DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt05DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt06DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt07DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt08DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt09DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt10DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt11DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt12DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt13DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
Pt14DeviceOut
DeviceLogix network output status
LogicEnabled
DeviceLogix is enabled
ProducedWord0Param
Data reference by Parameter 13
ProducedWord1Param
Data reference by Parameter 14
ProducedWord2Param
Data reference by Parameter 15
ProducedWord3Param
Data reference by Parameter 16
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
6
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Introduction
This chapter provides a basic understanding of the programming of the factoryinstalled optional built-in Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad. The HOA keypad
can be programmed for maintained or momentary operation.
Figure 72 - Optional HOA Keypads
Available on Bulletin 280E
Keypad Description
Available on Bulletin 281E
Available on Bulletin 284E
The keys that are found on the optional HOA keypads are described below:
Table 21 - HOA Keypad – Key Description
HAND
The Hand key initiates starter operation
AUTO
The Auto key allows for Start/Stop control via the communications
network
OFF
If the starter is running, pressing the OFF key causes the starter to stop.
REV
The REV key selects reverse direction of the motor
FWD
The FWD key selects forward direction of the motor
DIR Arrow
The Dir arrow selects the direction of the motor, either forward or reverse.
JOG
When pressed, JOG will be initiated if no other control devices are sending
a stop command. Releasing the key causes the drive to stop, using selected
stop mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
121
Chapter 6
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Figure 73 - Bulletin 280E/281E Hand -Off-Auto Selector Keypad
The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1=momentary.
.
HAND STOP
HAND FWD
AUTO
Command motor OFF and
transition to “AUTO”
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor ON and
transition to “HAND FWD”
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and
transition to “HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and
transition to “HAND STOP”
The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0=maintained.
.
NO KEY PRESSED
122
HAND STOP
HAND FWD
AUTO
Ignore
Command motor OFF and
transition to “HAND STOP”
Ignore
Command motor OFF and
transition to “AUTO”
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor ON and
transition to “HAND FWD”
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and
transition to “HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and
transition to “HAND STOP”
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Chapter 6
Figure 74 - Bulletin 281E Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad with
Forward/Reverse Function
The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1=momentary.
HAND STOP
HAND FWD
HAND REV
AUTO
Set FWD LED
Ignore
Ignore
Set FWD LED
Set REV LED
Ignore
Ignore
Set REV LED
Command motor OFF and transition to
“AUTO”
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
If (FWD LED) transition to
“HAND FWD”
If (REV LED)
transition to “HAND REV”
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0=maintained.
NO KEY
PRESSED
HAND STOP
HAND FWD
HAND REV
AUTO
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Ignore
Set FWD LED
Ignore
Ignore
Set FWD LED
Set REV LED
Ignore
Ignore
Set REV LED
Command motor OFF and transition to
“AUTO”
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
If (FWD LED) transition to
“HAND FWD”
If (REV LED)
transition to “HAND REV”
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
123
Chapter 6
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Figure 75 - Bulletin 284E Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad with JOG and
Direction Arrow Functions
The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog/HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1 = momentary.
No Key Pressed
124
HAND STOP
HAND FWD
HAND REV
JOG FWD
JOG REV
AUTO
If (FWD LED) Set REV LED
Else If (REV LED) Set FWD LED
If (FWD LED)
Set REV LED
Else If (REV LED)
Set FWD LED
If (FWD LED)
Set REV LED
Else If (REV LED)
Set FWD LED
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
If (FWD LED) transition to JOG FWD
If (REV LED) transition to JOG REV
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to AUTO
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
If (FWD LED) transition to
HAND FWD
Else If (REV LED) transition to
HAND REV
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Chapter 6
The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog/HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0 = maintained.
No Key Pressed
HAND STOP
HAND FWD
HAND REV
JOG FWD
JOG REV
AUTO
Ignore
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Ignore
If (FWD LED) Set REV LED
Else If (REV LED) Set FWD LED
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
If (FWD LED) transition to JOG FWD
If (REV LED) Transition to JOG REV
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and Transition to AUTO
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
If (FWD LED) transition to HAND FWD
If (REV LED) transition to HAND REV
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition
to HAND STOP
Note: In nearly all instances, if the processor detects multiple buttons are pressed
simultaneously, the software interprets this as a “no button pressed” condition.
The only exception to this rule is if multiple buttons are pressed and one of them
is the “OFF” button. If the “OFF” button is pressed in combination with any
combination of other buttons, the processor will interpret this the same as if the
“OFF” button were pressed by itself.
Keypad and HOA Disable
Parameter 46 “Keypad Disable”, disables the “HAND”, “FWD”, “REV” and “Jog”
buttons on the HOA keypad. The “OFF” and “AUTO” buttons are always
enabled, even if Parameter 46 is set to “1=Disable”. In addition for Bulletin 284
the user can disable the HAND-Reverse and Jog-Reverse operation by setting
parameter 195, Reverse Disable.
See Chapter C for an example how to dynamically disable the keypad.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
125
Chapter 6
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Notes:
126
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E
Programmable Parameters
Basic Setup Parameters
To configure the basic ArmorStart functionality see Table 22 below. These are the
minimum setup configurations that are required for Bulletin 280E, 281E, or
Bulletin 284E. There are additional capabilities and motor protection that are
not enabled or left at their default values.
Table 22 - Quick Parameter Setup
Bulletin 280E, 281E
106 FLA Setting
107 Overload Class
108 OL Reset Level
Bulletin 284E
131 Motor NP Volts
132 Motor NP Hertz
133 Motor OL Current
134 Minimum Freq
135 Maximum Freq
137 Stop Mode
138 Speed Reference
139 Accel Time 1
140 Decel Time 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
127
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Parameter Groups
Bulletin 284E
Units Only
Common to Bulletin 280E, 281E, and Bulletin 284E Units
Basic Status
1 Hdw Inputs
2 DeviceIn Data
3 DeviceOut Data
4 Trip Status
5 Starter Status
6 InternalLinkStat
7 Starter Command
22 Breaker Type
56 Base Enclosure
57 Base Options
58 Wiring Options
59 Starter Enclosure
60 Starter Options
61 Last Pr Fault
62 Warning Status
63 Base Trip
Produced Assembly
Config Group
13 Int00DeviceOut Cfg
14 Int01DeviceOut Cfg
15 Int02DeviceOut Cfg
16 Int03DeviceOut Cfg
Starter Protection
23 Pr FltResetMode
24 Pr Fault Enable
25 Pr Fault Reset
26 Str Net FltState
27 Str Net FltValue
28 Str Net IdlState
29 Str Net IdlValue
Bulletin280E, 281E
Units Only
Starter Display
101 Phase A Current
102 Phase B Current
103 Phase C Current
104 Average Current
105 Therm Utilized
Starter Setup
106 FLA Setting
107 Overload Class
108 OL Reset Level
128
User I/O Config
30 Anti-bounce On Delay
31 Anti-bounce OFF Delay
32 In Sink/Source
33 OutA Pr FltState
34 OutA Pr FltValue
35 OutA Net FltState
36 OutA Net FltValue
37 OutA Net IdlState
38 OutA Net IdlValue
39 OutB Pr FltState
40 OutB Pr FltValue
41 OutB Net FltState
42 OutB Net FltValue
43 OutB Net IdlState
44 OutB Net IdlValue
Miscellaneous Config
8 Network Override
9 Comm Override
45 Keypad Mode
46 Keypad Disable
47 Set To Defaults
Drive I/O Config
48 Drive Control
49 DrvIn Pr FltState
50 DrvIn Pr FltValue
51 DrvIn Net FltState
52 DrvIn Net FltValue
53 DrvIn Net IdlState
54 DrvIn Net IdlValue
Bulletin 284E Units Only
Drive Display
101 Output Freq
102 Commanded Freq
103 Output Current
104 Output Voltage
105 DC Bus Voltage
106 Drive Status
107 Fault 1 Code
108 Fault 2 Code
109 Fault 3 Code
110 Process Display
112 Control Source
113 Contrl In Status
114 Dig In Status
115 Comm Status
116 Control SW Ver
117 Drive Type
118 Elapsed Run Time
122 Output Power
123 Output Power Fctr
124 Drive Temp
125 Counter Status
126 Timer Status
129 Torque Current
Drive Setup
131 Motor NP Volts
132 Motor NP Hertz
133 Motor OL Current
134 Minimum Freq
135 Maximum Freq
136 Start Source
137 Stop Mode
138 Speed Reference
139 Accel Time 1
140 Decel Time 1
141 Reset To Defaults
143 Motor OL Ret
Drive Advanced Setup
151 Digital In 1 Sel
152 Digital In 2 Sel
153 Digital In 3 Sel
154 Digital In 4 Sel
155 Relay Out Sel
156 Relay Out Level
167 Accel Time 2
168 Decel Time 2
169 Internal Freq
170 Preset Freq 0
171 Preset Freq 1
172 Preset Freq 2
173 Preset Freq 3
174 Preset Freq 4
175 Preset Freq 5
176 Preset Freq 6
177 Preset Freq 7
178 Jog Frequency
179 Jog Accel/Decel
180 DC Brake Time
181 DC Brake Level
182 DB Resistor Sel
183 S Curve %
184 Boost Select
185 Start Boost
186 Brake Voltage
187 Brake Frequency
188 Maximum Voltage
189 Current Limit 1
190 Motor OL Select
191 PWM Frequency
192 Auto Rstrt Tries
193 Auto Rstrt Delay
194 Start At PowerUp
195 Reverse Disable
196 Flying Start En
197 Compensation
198 SW Current Trip
199 Process Factor
200 Fault Clear
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
201 Program Lock
205 Comm Loss Action
206 Comm Loss Time
214 Slip Hertz @ FLA
217 Bus Reg Mode
218 Current Limit 2
219 Skip Frequency
220 Skip Freq Band
221 Stall Fault Time
224 Var PWM Disable
225 Torque Perf Mode
226 Motor NP FLA
227 Autotune
228 IR Voltage Drop
229 Flux Current Ref
260 EM Brk OFF Delay
261 EM Brk On Delay
262 MOP Reset Sel
263 DB Threshold
264 Comm Write Mode
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP
Parameters
Chapter 7
Introduction
This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function.
Parameter Programming
Each Distributed Motor Controller type has a common set of parameters
followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type.
Parameters 1…100 are common to all ArmorStart devices.
IMPORTANT
Bulletin 280E/281E
Parameter setting changes take effect immediately unless otherwise noted in the
parameter listing. These changes maybe immediate even during the "running" status.
Basic Status Group
Hdw Inputs
This parameter provides status of
hardware inputs.
Parameter Number
1
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
15
Default Value
0
Bit
Function
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
X
In0
—
—
X
—
In1
—
X
—
—
In2
X
—
—
—
In3
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
129
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DeviceIn Data
Parameter Number
2
This parameter provides status of network
device inputs.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
0
Bit
15
130
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
3
2
Function
1
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Pt00DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Pt01DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Pt02DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Pt03DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
Pt04DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
Pt05DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
Pt06DeviceIn
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
Pt07DeviceIn
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
Pt08DeviceIn
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
Pt09DeviceIn
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
Pt10DeviceIn
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
Pt11DeviceIn
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt12DeviceIn
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt13DeviceIn
—
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt14DeviceIn
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt15DeviceIn
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
4
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DeviceOut Data
Parameter Number
3
This parameter provides status of network
device outputs.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
32767
Default Value
0
Bit
15
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Pt00DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Pt01DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Pt02DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Pt03DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
Pt04DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
Pt05DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
Pt06DeviceOut
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
Pt07DeviceOut
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
Pt08DeviceOut
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
Pt09DeviceOut
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
Pt10DeviceOut
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
Pt11DeviceOut
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt12DeviceOut
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt13DeviceOut
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt14DeviceOut
X
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Function
1
X
14
Chapter 7
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Reserved
131
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Trip Status
Parameter Number
4
This parameter provides trip identification.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
16383
Default Value
0
Bit
15
132
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Short Circuit
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Overload
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Phase Loss
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
Over Temperature
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
Phase Imbalance
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
EEprom
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
HW Fault
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
X
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Control Power
I/O Fault
A3 Power Loss
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Starter Status
Parameter Number
5
This parameter provides the status of the
starter.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
16383
Default Value
0
Bit
15
14
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
4
3
2
Function
1
X
13
Chapter 7
Ready
Net Ctl Status
Reserved
At Reference
Keypad Hand Mode
HOA Status
DisconnectClosed
Reserved
133
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
InternalLinkStat
Parameter Number
6
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
31
Default Value
0
Status of the internal network
connections.
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
Function:
7
6
5
4
2
1
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Explicit Connection
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
I/O Connection
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
I/O Idle
X
— — — — —
Reserved
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Starter Command
The parameter provides the status of the
starter command.
X
X
Explicit Fault
Parameter Number
7
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
255
Default Value
0
Bit
134
3
Function:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
Run Fwd
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
Run Rev
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
Fault Reset
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
Reserved
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
Reserved
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
Reserved
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
OutA
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
OutB
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Breaker Type
This parameter identifies the Bulletin
140M used in this product.
0 = 140M-D8N-C10
1 = 140M-D8N-C25
Base Enclosure
Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit
enclosure rating.
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2…15 = Reserved
Base Options
Indicates the options for the ArmorStart
Base unit.
Bit 0 = Output Fuse
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
Wiring Options
Bit 0 = Conduit
Bit 1 = Round Media
Bit 2 = 28xG Gland
Bits 3…15 = Reserved
Parameter Number
22
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
56
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
1
Parameter Number
57
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
517
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
58
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
4
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
135
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Starter Enclosure
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Sil3/Cat4
Bit 3…15 = Reserved
Starter Options
Bit 0 = Full Keypad
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Source Brake
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = Reserved
Bit 5 = Reserved
Bit 6 = Reserved
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = Reserved
Bit 9…15 = Reserved
Parameter Number
59
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
4
Default Value
1
Parameter Number
60
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
66535
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
61
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
100
Default Value
0
Last PR Fault
0 = None
1 = Hardware Short Circuit
2 = Software Short Circuit
3 = Motor Overload
4 = Reserved
5 = Phase Loss
6…12 = Reserved
13 = Control Power Loss
14 = Control Power Fuse
15 = I/O Short
16 = Output Fuse
17 = Overtemp
18 = Reserved
19 = Phase Imbalance
20 = Reserved
21 = A3 Power Loss
22 = Internal Comm
23…26 = Reserved
27 = MCB EEPROM
28 = Base EEPROM
29 = Reserved
30 = Wrong Base
31 = Wrong CTs
32…100 = Reserved
136
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Warning Status
Parameter Number
62
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
0
This parameter warns the user of a
condition, without faulting.
Chapter 7
Warnings are always enabled. The warning conditions are reported even if the
corresponding fault conditions are disabled.
Warning bits in the Warning Status parameter are cleared automatically when the
warning condition is no longer present.
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Warning
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Phase Loss
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
Control Power
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
I/O Warning
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
Hardware
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
X
Base Trip
The parameter determines the status of
the Base Module Trip Status.
Reserved
Phase Imbalance
A3 Power Loss
Parameter Number
63
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
137
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Warning
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
EEPROM Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Internal Comm
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Hardware Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Control Module
X
— — — —
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Reserved
Produced Assembly Config Group
138
Int00DeviceOut Cfg
Parameter Number
13
This parameter is used to specify
Int00DeviceOut of produced assembly 150
or 151.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Produced Assembly Config
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
108
Default Value
1
Int01DeviceOut Cfg
Parameter Number
14
This parameter is used to specify
Int01DeviceOut of produced assembly 150
or 151.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Produced Assembly Config
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
108
Default Value
4
Int02DeviceOut Cfg
Parameter Number
15
This parameter is used to specify
Int02DeviceOut of produced assembly 150
or 151.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Produced Assembly Config
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
108
Default Value
5
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Int03DeviceOut Cfg
Parameter Number
16
This parameter is used to specify
Int03DeviceOut of produced assembly 150
or 151.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Produced Assembly Config
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
108
Default Value
6
Pr FltReset Mode
Parameter Number
23
This parameter configures the Protection
Fault reset mode.
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic (Faults are cleared
automatically when the fault condition is
corrected)
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
24
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
12419
Maximum Value
13287
Default Value
12419
Starter Protection Group
Pr Fault Enable
This parameter enables the Protection
Fault by setting the bit to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
139
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Bit
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Function
1
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Short Circuit ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — —
—
Overload ➊
— —
Phase Loss
— — —
Reserved
— — — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — —
— — — —
— — —
—
X
— — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — —
Control Power
I/O Fault
Over Temperature ➊
Phase Imbalance
A3 Power Loss
— — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — —
EEprom ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
HW Fault ➊
— —
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
➊ Cannot be disabled
140
Pr Fault Reset
Parameter Number
25
This parameter resets the Protection Fault
on a transition of 0 > 1.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Str Net FltState
Parameter Number
26
This parameter along with Parameter 27
(Str Net FltValue), defines how the starter
responds when a fault occurs as
determined by Parameter 27. Allows
Starter to hold last state or go to FltValue
on NetFaults.
0 = Goto Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Str Net FltValue
Parameter Number
27
This parameter determines how the starter
is commanded in the event of a fault. State
the Starter goes to on a Net Flt if
Parameter 26 (Str Net FltState) = 0 (Goto
Fault Value).
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Str Net IdlState
Parameter Number
28
This parameter along with Parameter 29
(Str Net IdlValue), defines how the starter
will respond when a network is idle as
determined by Parameter 29.
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Str Net IdlValue
Parameter Number
29
This parameter determines the state that
starter assumes when the network is idle
and Parameter 28 (Str Net IdlState) is set
to “0”.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Anti-bounce On Delay
Parameter Number
30
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration before an input is
reported “ON” (Anti-bounce).
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
ms
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65
Default Value
0
User I/O Configuration Group
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
141
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Anti-bounce OFF Delay
Parameter Number
31
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration before an input is
reported “OFF” (Anti-bounce).
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
ms
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
32
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Pr FltState
Parameter Number
33
This parameter along with Parameter 34
(OutA Pr FltValue), defines how Output A
will respond when a protection trip occurs.
0 = Goto Pr FltValue
1 = Ignore Pr Flt
When set to “1”, Output A continues to
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output A opens or closes
as determined by setting in Parameter 34.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Pr FltValue
Parameter Number
34
This parameter determines the state the
Output A assumes when a trip occurs and
Parameter 33 (OutA Pr FltState) is set to
“0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
In Sink/Source
This parameter allows the installer to
program the inputs to be sink or source.
0 = Sink
1 = Source
142
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutA Net FltState
Parameter Number
35
This parameter along with Parameter 36
(OutA Net FltValue), defines how Output A
will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Net FltValue
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output A will hold state
before trip occurrence. When set to “0”,
Output A opens or closes as determined by
setting in Parameter 36.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Net FltValue
Parameter Number
36
This parameter determines the state that
Output A assumes when a network fault
occurs and Parameter 35 (OutA Net
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Net IdlState
Parameter Number
37
This parameter along with Parameter 38
(OutA Net IdlValue), defines how Output A
will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto Net IdlValue
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “0”, Output A opens or closes
as determined by the setting in Parameter
38.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Net IdlValue
Parameter Number
38
This parameter determines the state that
Output A assumes when the network is
idle and Parameter 37 (OutA Net IdlState)
is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
143
Chapter 7
144
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutB Pr FltState
Parameter Number
39
This parameter along with Parameter 40
(OutB Pr FltValue), defines how Output B
will respond when a protection trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output B continues to
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output B opens or closes
as determined by setting in Parameter 40.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Pr FltValue
Parameter Number
40
This parameter determines the state the
Out B assumes when a protection trip
occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB Pr FltState)
is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Net FltState
Parameter Number
41
This parameter along with Parameter 42
(OutB Net FltValue), defines how Output B
will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output B will hold state
before trip occurrence. When set to “0”,
Output B opens or closes as determined by
setting in Parameter 42.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Net FltValue
Parameter Number
42
This parameter determines the state that
Output B assumes when a network fault
occurs and Parameter 41 (OutB Net
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutB Net IdlState
Parameter Number
43
This parameter along with Parameter 44
(OutB Net IdlValue), defines how Output B
will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “0”, Output B opens or closes
as determined by the setting in Parameter
44.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Net IdlValue
Parameter Number
44
This parameter determines the state that
Output B assumes when the network is
idle and Parameter 43 (OutB Net IdlState)
is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Chapter 7
Miscellaneous Configuration Group
Network Override
Parameter Number
8
This parameter allows for the local logic to
override a Network fault.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Comm Override
Parameter Number
9
This parameter allows for local logic to
override the absence of an I/O connection.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
145
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Keypad Mode
Parameter Number
45
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Keypad Disable
Parameter Number
46
This parameter disables all keypad
function except for the “OFF” and “RESET”
buttons.
0 = Not Disabled
1 = Disabled
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Set to Defaults
Parameter Number
47
This parameter if set to “1” will set the
device to the factory defaults (but will not
cause the ArmorStart to reboot).
0 = No Operation
1 = Set to Defaults
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
This parameter selects if the keypad
operation is maintained or momentary.
0 = Maintained
1 = Momentary
Starter Display Group (Bulletin 280E/281E only)
Phase A Current
This parameter provides the current of
Phase A measured n increments of
1/10th of an ampere.
146
Parameter Number
101
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
INT
Group
Starter Display
Units
xx.x Amps
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
32767
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Parameter Number
102
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
INT
Group
Starter Display
Units
xx.x Amps
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
32767
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
103
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
INT
Group
Starter Display
Units
xx.x Amps
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
32767
Default Value
0
Average Current
Parameter Number
104
This parameter provides the average
current that is measured in increments of
1/10th of an ampere.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
INT
Group
Starter Display
Units
xx.x Amps
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
32767
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
105
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Starter Display
Units
% FLA
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
100
Default Value
0
Phase B Current
This parameter provides the current of
Phase B measured in increments of
1/10th of an ampere.
Phase C Current
This parameter provides the current of
Phase C measured in increments of
1/10th of an ampere.
Therm Utilized
This parameter displays the
% Thermal Capacity used.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
147
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Starter Setup Group (Bulletin 280E, 281E only)
FLA Setting
Parameter Number
106
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
INT
Group
Starter Setup
Units
xx.x Amps
Minimum Value
See Table 23.
Maximum Value
See Table 23.
Default Value
See Table 23.
The motor’s full load current rating is
programmed in this parameter.
Table 23 - FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values (with indicated setting precision)
FLA Current Range (A)
Maximum Value
0.24
1.2
0.24
0.5
2.5
0.5
1.1
5.5
1.1
3.2
16.0
3.2
Parameter Number
107
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Starter Setup
Units
xx.x Amps
Minimum Value
1
Maximum Value
3
Default Value
1
OL Reset Level
Parameter Number
108
This parameter allows the installer select
the % Thermal Capacity that an overload
can be cleared.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Starter Setup
Units
% FLA
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
100
Default Value
75
Overload Class
This parameter allows the installer to
select the overload class.
1 = Overload Class 10
2 = Overload Class 15
3 = Overload Class 20
148
Default Value
Minimum Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Bulletin 284E
Chapter 7
Basic Status Group
Hdw Inputs
This parameter provides status of
hardware inputs.
Parameter Number
1
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
15
Default Value
0
Bit
Function
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
X
In0
—
—
X
—
In1
—
X
—
—
In2
X
—
—
—
In3
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
149
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DeviceIn Data
Parameter Number
2
This parameter provides status of network
device inputs.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
0
Bit
15
150
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
3
2
Function
1
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Pt00DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Pt01DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Pt02DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Pt03DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
Pt04DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
Pt05DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
Pt06DeviceIn
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
Pt07DeviceIn
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
Pt08DeviceIn
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
Pt09DeviceIn
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
Pt10DeviceIn
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
Pt11DeviceIn
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt12DeviceIn
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt13DeviceIn
—
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt14DeviceIn
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt15DeviceIn
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
4
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DeviceOut Data
Parameter Number
3
This parameter provides status of network
device outputs.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
32767
Default Value
0
Bit
15
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Pt00DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Pt01DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Pt02DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Pt03DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
Pt04DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
Pt05DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
Pt06DeviceOut
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
Pt07DeviceOut
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
Pt08DeviceOut
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
Pt09DeviceOut
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
Pt10DeviceOut
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
Pt11DeviceOut
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt12DeviceOut
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt13DeviceOut
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Pt14DeviceOut
X
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Function
1
X
14
Chapter 7
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Reserved
151
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Trip Status
Parameter Number
4
This parameter provides trip identification.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
0
Bit
15 14 13
12
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Short Circuit
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
—
Overload
X
X
— —
Phase Short
— — —
Ground Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
— — — — — — — — — —
— — — — —
— — — — — — — — —
X
X
— — — — — —
Control Power
I/O Fault
X
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
Over Current
— — — — — —
— — — — — — — — —
A3 Power Loss
X
X
— — — — — — —
Stall
— — — — — — — —
— — — — —
— — — — — — — — — —
— — — —
X
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
— —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
—
X
X
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
Over Temperature
Internal Comm ➊
DC Bus Fault
EEprom
HW Fault ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Restart Retries
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Misc. Fault ➊
➊ See Parameter 61, Last PR Fault, for details.
152
Function
1
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
2
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Starter Status
Parameter Number
5
This parameter provides the status of the
starter.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
0
Bit
15
14 13 12 11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Chapter 7
Function
1
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — —
— — —
RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
X
— — — —
Ready
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
Net Ctl Status
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
Net Ref Status
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
At Reference
— — — — — — —
X
X
— — — — — — — —
DrvOpto1
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
DrvOpto2
— — — — —
— — — — — — — — — —
Keypad Jog
— — — — — — — — — — —
Keypad Hand
— — — —
— — —
X
X
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
— —
X
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Contactor 1 ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Contactor 2 ➋
X
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
HOA Status
Disconnect Closed
➊ Refers to source brake contactor status
➋ Refers to output contactor status
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
153
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
InternalLinkStat
Parameter Number
6
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
31
Default Value
0
This parameter provides status of the
internal network connections.
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
Function:
7
6
5
4
2
1
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Explicit Connection
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
I/O Connection
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
I/O Idle
X
— — — — —
Reserved
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Starter Command
The parameter provides the status of the
starter command.
X
X
Explicit Fault
Parameter Number
7
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
255
Default Value
0
Bit
154
3
Function:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
Run Fwd
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
Run Rev
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
Fault Reset
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
Jog Fwd
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
Jog Rev
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
Reserved
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
OutA
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
OutB
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Breaker Type
This parameter identifies the Bulletin
140M used in this product.
0 = 140M-D8N-C10
1 = 140M-D8N-C25
Base Enclosure
Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit
enclosure rating.
Bit 0 = IP67
Bits 1 …15 = Reserved
Base Options
Indicates the options for the ArmorStart
Base unit.
Bit 0 = Output Fuse
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
Wiring Options
Bit 0 = Conduit
Bit 1 = Round Media
Bits 2 …15 = Reserved
Parameter Number
22
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
—
Parameter Number
56
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
—
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
57
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
—
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
58
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
—
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
155
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Starter Enclosure
Bit 0 = IP67
Bits 1…15 = Reserved
Starter Options
Bit 0 = Full Keypad
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Source Brake
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = Dynamic Brake
Bit 5 = Output Contactor
Bit 6 = EMI Filter
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = Fused DynBrake
Bit 9…15 = Reserved
156
Parameter Number
59
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
—
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
60
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
66535
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Last PR Fault
1 = Hdw Short Ckt
2 = Reserved
3 = Motor Overload (PF Fault Code 7)
4 = Drive Overload (PF Fault Code 64)
5 = Phase U to Gnd (PF Fault Code 38)
6 = Phase V to Gnd (PF Fault Code 39)
7 = Phase W to Gnd (PF Fault Code 40)
8 = Phase UV Short (PF4 Fault Code 41)
9 = Phase UW Short (PF Fault Code 42)
10 = Phase VW Short (PF Fault Code 43)
11 = Ground Fault (PF Fault Code 13)
12 = Stall (PF Fault Code 6)
13 = Control Pwr Loss
14 = Control Pwr Fuse
15 = Input Short
16 = Output Fuse
17 = Over Temp
18 = Heatsink OvrTmp (PF Fault Code 8)
19 = HW OverCurrent (PF Fault Code 12)
20 = SW OverCurrent (PF Fault Code 63)
21 = A3 Power Loss
22 = Internal Comm
23 = Drive Comm Loss (PF Fault Code 81)
24 = Power Loss (PF Fault Code 3)
25 = Under Voltage (PF Fault Code 4)
26 = Over Voltage (PF Fault Code 5)
27 = MCB EEPROM
28 = Base EEPROM
29 = Drive EEPROM (PF Fault Code 100)
30 = Wrong Base
31 = Fan RPM
32 = Power Unit (PF Fault Code 70)
33 = Drive I/O Brd (PF Fault Code 122)
34 = Restart Retries (PF Fault Code 33)
35 = Drive Aux In Flt (PF Fault Code 2)
36 = Analog Input (PF Fault Code 29)
37 = Drv Param Reset (PF Fault Code 48)
38 = SCV Autotune (PF Fault Code 80)
39 = Source Brake
40 = Reserved
41 = DB1 Comm
42 = DB1 Fault
43 = DB Switch Short
45 = Incompatible Drive Firmware
Warning Status
This parameter warns the user of a
condition, without faulting.
Parameter Number
61
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
43
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
62
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
157
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Warning ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Phase Loss
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
Control Power
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
I/O Warning
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
Hardware
—
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
Phase Imbalance
A3 Power Loss
Miscellaneous ➋
➊ The warning is triggered simultaneously, the fault is generated. If the fault is disabled a warning will still occur.
➋ Includes DB1 Thermal Warning
158
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Base Trip
Parameter Number
63
The parameter provides the Base Module
Trip Status.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Basic Status
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Chapter 7
Warning
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
EEPROM Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Internal Comm
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Hardware Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
Control Module
X
— — — —
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Reserved
Produced Assembly Config Group
Int00DeviceOut Cfg
Parameter Number
13
This parameter is used to specify
Int00DeviceOut of produced assembly 150
or 151.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Produced Assembly Config
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
263
Default Value
1
Int01DeviceOut Cfg
Parameter Number
14
This parameter is used to specify
Int01DeviceOut of produced assembly 150
or 151.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Produced Assembly Config
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
263
Default Value
4
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
159
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Int02DeviceOut Cfg
Parameter Number
15
This parameter is used to specify
Int02DeviceOut of produced assembly 150
or 151.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Produced Assembly Config
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
263
Default Value
5
Int03DeviceOut Cfg
Parameter Number
16
This parameter is used to specify
Int03DeviceOut of produced assembly 150
or 151.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
USINT
Group
Produced Assembly Config
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
263
Default Value
6
Pr FltResetMode ➊
Parameter Number
23
This parameter is the Protection Fault reset
mode.
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic (Faults are cleared
automatically when the fault condition is
corrected.)
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Starter Protection Group
➊ When “Pr FltReset Mode” is set to 0=manual mode, and Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is set to allow the drive faults to autoreset, the “Pr FltReset Mode” takes precedence. In this case, the ArmorStart will remain faulted until the fault is manually cleared.
160
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Pr Fault Enable
Parameter Number
24
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
64927
Maximum Value
65535
Default Value
64927
This parameter enables the Protection
Fault by setting the bit to 1.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Chapter 7
6
5
4
3
2
Function
1
0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
Short Circuit ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
—
Overload ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— —
Phase Loss ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — —
— — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — —
— — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — —
— — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — —
Over Current ➊
— — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — —
A3 Power Loss
— — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — —
— — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — —
— — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — —
EEprom ➊
— —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
HW Fault ➊
—
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Ground Fault ➊
Stall ➊
Control Power
I/O Fault
Over Temperature ➊
Internal Comm ➊
DC Bus Fault ➊
Restart Retries ➊
Misc. Fault ➊
➊ Cannot be disabled
Pr Fault Reset
Parameter Number
25
This parameter resets the Protection Fault
on a transition of 0 > 1.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
161
Chapter 7
162
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Str Net FltState
Parameter Number
26
This parameter along with Parameter 27
(Str Net FltValue), defines how the starter
will respond when a fault occurs as
determined by Parameter 27.
0 = Goto Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State
Allows Starter to hold last state or go to
FltValue on NetFaults.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Str Net FltValue
Parameter Number
27
This parameter determines how the starter
will be commanded in the event of a fault.
State the Starter
will go to on a Net Flt if Parameter
26 (Str Net FltState) = 0 (Goto Fault
Value).
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Str Net IdlState
Parameter Number
28
This parameter along with Parameter 29
(Str Net IdlValue), defines how the starter
will respond when a network is idle as
determined by Parameter 29.
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Str Net IdlValue
Parameter Number
29
This parameter determines the state that
starter assumes when the network is idle
and Parameter 28 (Str Net IdlState) is set
to “0”.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Starter Protection
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
User I/O Configuration Group
Anti-bounce On Delay
Parameter Number
30
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
ms
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
31
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
ms
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
65
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
32
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Pr FltState
Parameter Number
33
This parameter along with Parameter 34
(OutA Pr FltValue), defines how Output A
will respond when a trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output A continues to
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output A opens or closes
as determined by the setting in Parameter
34.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration before being
reported “ON” (Anti-bouce).
Anti-bounce OFF Delay
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration before being
reported “OFF” (Anti-bouce).
In Sink/Source
This parameter allows the installer to
program the inputs to be sink or source.
0 = Sink
1 = Source
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
163
Chapter 7
164
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutA Pr FltValue
Parameter Number
34
This parameter determines the state the
Output A assumes when a trip occurs and
Parameter 33 (OutA Pr FltState) is set to
“0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Net FltState
Parameter Number
35
This parameter along with Parameter 36
(OutA Net FltValue), defines how Output A
will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Net FltValue
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output A will hold state
before trip occurrence. When set to “0”,
Output A opens or closes as determined by
the setting in Parameter 36.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Net FltValue
Parameter Number
36
This parameter determines the state that
Output A assumes when a network fault
occurs and Parameter 35 (OutA Net
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutA Net IdlState
Parameter Number
37
This parameter along with Parameter 38
(OutA Net IdlValue), defines how Output A
will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto Net IdlValue
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “0”, Output A opens or closes
as determined by the setting in Parameter
38.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutA Net IdlValue
Parameter Number
38
This parameter determines the state that
Output A assumes when the network is
idle and Parameter 37 (OutA Net IdlState)
is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Pr FltState
Parameter Number
39
This parameter along with Parameter 40
(OutB Pr FltValue), defines how Output B
will respond when a protection trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output B continues to
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output B opens or closes
as determined by setting in Parameter 40.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Pr FltValue
Parameter Number
40
This parameter determines the state the
Out B assumes when a protection trip
occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB Pr FltState)
is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Net FltState
Parameter Number
41
This parameter along with Parameter 42
(OutB Net FltValue), defines how Output B
will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output B will hold state
before trip occurrence. When set to “0”,
Output B opens or closes as determined by
setting in Parameter 42.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
165
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutB Net FltValue
Parameter Number
42
This parameter determines the state that
Output B assumes when a network fault
occurs and Parameter 41 (OutB Net
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Net IdlState
Parameter Number
43
This parameter along with Parameter 44
(OutB Net IdlValue), defines how Output B
will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “0”, Output B opens or closes
as determined by the setting in Parameter
44.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
OutB Net IdlValue
Parameter Number
44
This parameter determines the state that
Output B assumes when the network is
idle and Parameter 43 (OutB Net IdlState)
is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
User I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Miscellaneous Configuration Group
166
Network Override
Parameter Number
8
This parameter allows for the local logic to
override a Network fault.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Comm Override
Parameter Number
9
This parameter allows for local logic to
override the absence of an I/O connection.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
45
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Keypad Disable
Parameter Number
46
This parameter disables all keypad
function except for the “OFF” and “RESET”
buttons.
0 = Not Disabled
1 = Disabled
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Set to Defaults
Parameter Number
47
This parameter if set to “1” will set the
device to the factory defaults (but will not
cause the ArmorStart to reboot).
0 = No Operation
1 = Set to Defaults
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Misc. Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Keypad Mode
This parameter selects if the keypad
operation is maintained or momentary.
0 = Maintained
1 = Momentary
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
167
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Drive I/O Configuration Group (Bulletin 284E only)
Drive Control
Parameter Number
48
This parameter provides the status of drive
parameters.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
WORD
Group
Drive I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
4095
Default Value
0
Bit
168
Function
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
Accel 1 En
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
Accel 2 En
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
Decel 1 En
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
Decel 2 En
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
Freq Sel 0
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
Freq Sel 1
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
Freq Sel 2
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Reserved
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Drv In 1
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Drv In 2
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Drv In 3
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Drv In 4
DrvIn Pr FltState
Parameter Number
49
This parameter, along with Parameter 50
(DrvIn Pr FltValue),, defines how the Drive
Digital Inputs 1…4 will respond when a
protection trip occurs. When set to “1”,
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 continue to
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Drive Digital Inputs 1…4
will open or close as determined by setting
in Parameter 50.
0 = Go to PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DrvIn Pr FltValue
Parameter Number
50
This parameter determines the state of
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4, assumes when
a trip occurs and Parameter 49 (DrvIn Pr
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
DrvIn Net FltState
Parameter Number
51
This parameter, along with Parameter 52
(DrvIn Net FItValue),, defines how the
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will respond
when a network fault occurs. When set to
“1”, Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 hold to last
state occurs. When set to “0”, will go to
DrvIn Net FltValue as determined by
Parameter 52.
0 = Go to Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
DrvIn Net FItValue
Parameter Number
52
This parameter determines the state of
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 when a network
fault occurs and Parameter 51 (DrvIn Net
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
DrvIn Net IdlState
Parameter Number
53
This parameter, along with Parameter 54
(DrvIn Net IdlValue),, defines how the
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will respond
when a network is idle. When set to “1”,
hold to last state occurs. When set to “0”,
will go to DrvIn Net IdlState as determined
by Parameter 54.
0 = Go to Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
169
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DrvIn Net IdlValue
Parameter Number
54
This parameter determines the state that
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 assume when
the network is idle and Parameter 53
(DrvIn Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive I/O Config.
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Drive Display Group (Bulletin 284E only)
Output Freq
Parameter Number
101
Related Parameters
102, 110, 134, 135, 138
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
400.0 Hz
Default Value
Read Only
Commanded Freq
Parameter Number
102
Value of the active frequency command.
Displays the commanded frequency even
if the drive is not running.
Related Parameters
101, 113, 134, 135, 138
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
400.0 Hz
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
103
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
0.01
Minimum Value
0.00
Maximum Value
Drive rated amps x 2
Default Value
Read Only
Output frequency present at T1, T2, T3.
Output Current
Output Current present at T1, T2, T3.
170
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Output Voltage
Output Voltage present at T1, T2, T3.
DC Bus Voltage
Present DC Bus voltage level
Parameter Number
104
Related Parameters
131, 184, 188
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1V AC
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
480V
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
105
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1V DC
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Based on Drive Rating
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
106
Related Parameter
195
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
Byte
Group
Drive Display
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
Read Only
Fault 1 Code
Parameter Number
107
A code that represents the drive fault. The
code appears in this parameter as the
most recent fault that has occurred. (See
Internal Drive Faults in Chapter 10 for
more information).
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
—
Minimum Value
F2
Maximum Value
F122
Default Value
Read Only
Drive Status
Present operating condition of the drive
Bit 0 = Running
Bit 1 = Forward
Bit 2 = Accelerating
Bit 3 = Decelerating
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
171
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Fault 2 Code
Parameter Number
108
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
—
Minimum Value
F2
Maximum Value
F122
Default Value
Read Only
Fault 3 Code
Parameter Number
109
A code that represents a drive fault. The
code appears in this parameter as the third
most recent fault that has occurred.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
—
Minimum Value
F2
Maximum Value
F122
Default Value
Read Only
Process Display
Parameter Number
110
The output frequency that is scaled by the
process factor (Parameter 199).
Related Parameter
101. 199
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
—
Minimum Value
0.00
Maximum Value
9999
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
112
Related Parameters
136, 138, 151…154 (Digital In x
Sel) must be set to Option 4, 169,
170…177 (Preset Freq x),
240…247 (StpLogic x)
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
9
Default Value
Read Only
A code that represents a drive fault. The
code appears in this parameter as the
second most recent fault that has
occurred.
Control Source
Displays the source of the Start Command
and Speed Reference.
1 = Internal Frequency
4 = Preset Freq x
5 = Network Control
9 = Jog Freq
172
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Contrl In Status
Parameter Number
113
Status of control inputs. These can be used
in DeviceLogix.
Bit 0 = Start/Run FWD Input
Bit 1 = Direction/Run REV Input
Bit 2 = Stop Input
Bit 3 = Dynamic Brake Transistor On
Related Parameter
102, 134, 135
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
Read Only
Dig In Status
Parameter Number
114
Status of the control terminal block digital
inputs:
Bit 0 = Digital In 1 Sel
Bit 1 = Digital In 2 Sel
Bit 2 = Digital In 3 Sel
Bit 3 = Digital In 4 Sel
Related Parameter
151…154
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
115
Related Parameter
205, 206
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
118
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1 = 10 hrs
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
9999
Default Value
Read Only
Comm Status
Status of communications ports:
Bit 0 = Receiving Data
Bit 1 = Transmitting Data
Bit 2 = Internal Communications
Bit 3 = Communication Error
Elapsed Run Time
Accumulated time drive is outputting
power. Time is displayed in 10 hour
increments.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter 7
173
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Output Power
The output power present at T1, T2, and
T3.
Parameter Number
122
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Units
Output Power Fctr
The angle in electrical degrees between
motor voltage and current.
Drive Temp
Present operating temperature of the
drive power section.
Counter Status
The current value of the counter when
counter is enabled.
174
Drive Display
Minimum Value
0.00
Maximum Value
Drive rated power X 2
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
123
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
0.1°
Minimum Value
0.0°
Maximum Value
180.0°
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
124
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1 °C
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
120
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
125
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
1
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
9999
Default Value
Read Only
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Timer Status
Parameter Number
126
The current value of the timer when timer
is enabled.
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
9999
Default Value
Read Only
Parameter Number
129
Access Rule
GET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
0.01
Minimum Value
0.00
Maximum Value
Drive Rated Amps x 2
Default Value
Read Only
Torque Current
The current value of the motor torque
current.
Drive Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only)
Motor NP Volts
O
Stop drive before changing this
parameter.
Set to the motor nameplate rated volts.
Motor NP Hertz
O
Stop drive before changing this
parameter.
Set to the motor nameplate rated
frequency.
Parameter Number
131
Related Parameters
104, 184, 185…187
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
1V AC
Minimum Value
20
Maximum Value
480V
Default Value
Based on Drive Rating
Parameter Number
132
Related Parameters
184, 185…187, and 190
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
1 Hz
Minimum Value
15
Maximum Value
400
Default Value
60 Hz
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
175
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Motor OL Current
Set to the maximum allowable current.
The drive fault on an F7
Motor Over load if the value of this
parameter is exceeded by 150%
for 60 s.
Minimum Freq
Sets the lowest frequency that the drive
will output continuously.
Maximum Freq
O
Stop drive before changing this
parameter.
Sets the highest frequency that the drive
will output continuously.
176
Parameter Number
133
Related Parameter
155, 189, 190, 198, 214, 218,
260…261
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
0.1 A
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
Drive rated amps x 2
Default Value
Based on Drive Rating
Parameter Number
134
Related Parameter
101, 102, 113, 135, 185…187,
260, 261
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
400
Default Value
0.0
Parameter Number
135
Related Parameter
101, 102, 113, 134, 135, 178,
185…187
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
400
Default Value
60.0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Stop Mode
Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart are the following:
0 = Ramp, CF Ramp to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
1 = Coast, CF Coast to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
2 = DC Brake,CF DC Injection Braking Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
3 = DCBrkAuto, CF DC injection Braking with Auto Shutoff.
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 (DC Brake Time) or
Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped. Stop command clears
active fault.
4 = Ramp, Ramp to Stop
5 = Coast, Coast to Stop
6 = DC Brake, DC Injection Braking Stop
7 = DC BrakeAuto, DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 (DC Brake Time)
or
Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded.
8 = Ramp + EM B, CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. Stop command clears
active fault. ➊
9 = Ramp + EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. ➊
Chapter 7
Parameter Number
137
Related Parameters
136, 180…182, 205, 260, 261 ➊
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
9
Default Value
9
Parameter Number
138
Related Parameters
101, 102, 112, 139, 140,
151…154, 169, 170…177, 232,
240…247, and 250…257
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
7
Default Value
5
Parameter Number
139
Related Parameters
138, 140, 151…154, 167,
170…177, and 240…247
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0.0 sec
Maximum Value
600.0 sec
Default Value
10.0 sec
➊ See Parameter 155 to set the EM brake actuation condition.
Speed Reference
Valid Speed References for the Bulletin
284E ArmorStart are the following:
1 = Internal Freq
4 = Preset Freq
5 = Comm Port
9 = Jog Freq
Accel Time 1
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed
increases.
Maximum
Freq- = Accel Rate
------------------------------------Accel Time
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
177
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Decel Time 1
Parameter Number
140
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed
decreases.
Maximum
Freq- = Decel Rate
------------------------------------Decel Time
Related Parameters
138, 139, 151…154, 168,
170…177, and 240…247
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Setup
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0.1 sec
Maximum Value
600.0 sec
Default Value
10.0 sec
Parameter Number
141
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
143
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Reset To Defaults
O
Stop drive before changing this
parameter.
Resets all parameter values to factory
defaults.
0 = Ready/Idle (Default)
1 = Factory Rset
Motor OL Ret
Enables/disables the Motor overload
Retention function. When Enabled, the
value that is held in the motor overload
counter is saved at power-down and
restored at power-up. A change to this
parameter setting resets the counter.
0 = Disabled (Default)
1 = Enabled
178
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Drive Advanced Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only)
Digital In 1 SEL (151)
Digital In 2 SEL (152)
Digital In 3 SEL (153)
Digital In 4 SEL (154)
O
Parameter Number
151…154
Related Parameters
112, 114, 138…140, 167, 168,
170…179, 240…247
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Stop drive before changing this
parameter.
Selects the function for the digital inputs.
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
See Table 24 for details.
Default Value
Table 24 - Digital Input Options
Option
Name
1
Acc2 & Dec2
Description
• When active, Parameter 167 (Accel Time 2) and Parameter 168 (Decel Time 2) are used for all ramp rates except Jog.
• Can only be tied to one input.
• When input is present, drive accelerates according to the value set in Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to the value set in
Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency).
• When the input is removed, drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel).
• A valid Start command will override this input.
2
Jog
4
Preset Freq
(Parameters 151 and
152 Default)
6
Comm Port
This option is the default setting.
7
Clear Fault
When active, clears active fault.
8
RampStop,CF
Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
9
CoastStop,CF
Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
10
DCInjStop,CF
Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
11
Jog Forward
(Parameter 154
Default)
Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency) according to Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to stop when input becomes
inactive. A valid start will override this command.
12
Jog Reverse
Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency) according to Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to stop when input becomes
inactive. A valid start will override this command.
16
MOP Up
Increases the value of Parameter 169 (Internal Freq) at a rate 2 Hz per second. Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz.
17
MOP Down
Decreases the value of Parameter 169 (Internal Freq) at a rate 2 Hz per second. Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz.
27 ➊
Em Brk Rls
If EM Brake function enabled, this input releases the brake. See parameter 155 and set to EM Brk Cntrol (22).
See Parameters 170…173 and 174…177.
➊ Provides programmable control of Em Brk via digital input (1...4)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
179
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Relay Out Sel
Parameter Number
155
Sets the condition that changes the state
of the output relay contacts.
Related Parameters
133, 156, 192, 240…247,
250…257, 260, 261
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
22
Default Value
22
Table 25 - Options for the Output Relay Contacts
Options
Name
Description
0
Ready/Fault (Default)
1
At Frequency
6
Above Freq
Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
7
Above Cur
Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
20
ParamControl
Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) (0 = OFF, 1 = ON).
22
EM Brk Cntrl
EM Brake is energized. Program Parameter 260 (EM Brk OFF Delay) and Parameter 261 (EM Brk On Delay) for desired action. ➊
Relay changes state when power is applied. This indicates that the drive is ready for operation. Relay returns drive to shelf state when
power is removed or a fault occurs.
Drive reached commanded frequency.
➊ The customer is responsible to make sure the brake release function operates properly and safely.
Relay Out Level
Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 155
(Relay Out Sel) is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18, or 20.
180
Parameters 155 Setting
Parameter 156 Min./Max.
6
0/400 Hz
7
0/180%
8
0/815V
10
0/100%
16
0.1/9999 sec
17
1/9999 counts
18
1/180°
20
0/1
Parameter Number
156
Related Parameters
155
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
9999
Default Value
0.0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Accel Time 2
Parameter Number
167
Related Parameters
139, 151…154, 170…177,
240…247
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
600.0
Default Value
20.0
Parameter Number
168
Related Parameters
140, 151…154, 170…177,
240…247
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
600.0
Default Value
20.0
Internal Freq
Parameter Number
169
Provide the frequency command to drive
when Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) is
set to “1” (Internal Freq). When enabled,
this parameter will change the frequency
command in real time.
Related Parameters
138
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
400.0
Default Value
60.0
When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog.
Maximum
Freq- = Accel Rate
------------------------------------Accel Time
Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq)
0
Acc
eler
atio
n
n
atio
eler
Dec
Speed
Param.
0 139 or
167
(Accel
Time x)
Time
Param.
140 or
168
(Decel
Time x)
Decel Time 2
When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog.
Maximum
Freq- = Decel Rate
------------------------------------Decel Time
Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq)
0
Acc
eler
atio
n
n
atio
eler
Dec
Speed
Param.
0 139 or
167
(Accel
Time x)
Time
Chapter 7
Param.
140 or
168
(Decel
Time x)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
181
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
170 (Preset Freq 0)
171 (Preset Freq 1)
172 (Preset Freq 2)
173 (Preset Freq 3)
174 (Preset Freq 4)
175 (Preset Freq 5)
176 (Preset Freq 6)
177 (Preset Freq 7)
Provides a fixed frequency command value
when Parameters 151...154 (Digital In x
Sel) is set to Option 4 (Preset Frequencies).
Parameter Number
170…173, 174…177
Related Parameters
138…140, 151…154, 167, 168,
240…247, 250…257
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
400.0
Default Value
See Table 26
.
Table 26 - Parameters 170…177 Preset Freq Options
170 Default
0.0 Hz
171 Default
5.0 Hz
172 Default
10.0 Hz
173 Default
20.0 Hz
174 Default
30.0 Hz
175 Default
40.0 Hz
176 Default
50.0 Hz
177 Default
60.0 Hz
Min./Max.
0.0/400.0 Hz
Display
0.1 Hz
Input State of Digital In 1 (I/
O Terminal 05 when
Parameter 151 = 4)
Input State of Digital In 2 (I/
O Terminal 06 when
Parameter 152 = 4)
Input State of Digital In 3 (I/
O Terminal 07 when
Parameter 153 = 4)
Frequency
Source
Accel/Decel
Parameter
Used ➊
0
0
0
170 (Preset Freq 0)
(Accel Time 1)/(Decel Time 1)
1
0
0
171 (Preset Freq 1)
(Accel Time 1)/(Decel Time 1)
0
1
0
172 (Preset Freq 2)
(Accel Time 2)/(Decel Time 2)
1
1
0
173 (Preset Freq 3)
(Accel Time 2)/(Decel Time 2)
0
0
1
174 (Preset Freq 4)
(Accel Time 3)/(Decel Time 3)
Input State of Digital In 1 (I/
O Terminal 05 when
Parameter 151 = 4)
Input State of Digital In 2 (I/
O Terminal 06 when
Parameter 152 = 4)
Input State of Digital In 3 (I/
O Terminal 07 when
Parameter 153 = 4)
Frequency
Source
Accel/Decel
Parameter
Used ➋
1
0
1
175 (Preset Freq 5)
(Accel Time 3)/(Decel Time 3)
0
1
1
176 (Preset Freq 6)
(Accel Time 4)/(Decel Time 4)
1
1
1
177 (Preset Freq 7)
(Accel Time 4)/(Decel Time 4)
➊ When a Digital Input is set to "Accel 2 & Decel 2", and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this table.
182
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Jog Frequency
Chapter 7
Parameter Number
178
Related Parameters
135, 151…154, 179
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
400.0
Default Value
10.0
Parameter Number
179
Related Parameters
151…154, 178
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0.1
Maximum Value
600.0
Default Value
10.0
Parameter Number
180
Related Parameters
137, 181
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
99.9
(Setting of 99.9 = Continuous)
Default Value
0.0
DC Brake Level
Parameter Number
181
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in
amps, applied to the motor when
Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to either
"Ramp" or "DC Brake".
Related Parameters
137, 180
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 A
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
Drive rated amps X 1.8
Default Value
Drive rated amps X 0.05
Sets the output frequency when the jog
command is issued.
Jog Accel/Decel
Sets the acceleration and deceleration
time when a jog command is issued.
DC Brake Time
Sets the length of time that DC brake
current is injected into the motor. See
Parameter 181 (DC Brake Level).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
183
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
ATTENTION:
DC Injection Braking Mode
Ramp-to-Stop Mode
ge
[DC Brake Time]
ed
}
[DC Brake Time]
Speed
}
ta
Volts Speed
Vo
l
Spe
}
Volts Speed
Voltage
[DC Brake Level]
}
[DC Brake Level]
Time
Time
Stop Command
Stop Command
• If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary
mechanical braking device must be used.
• This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors.
Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
DB Resistor Sel
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables external dynamic braking.
Setting
182
Related Parameters
137
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
0
Disabled
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
1
Normal RA Res (5% Duty Cycle)
Units
1
2
No Protection (100% Duty Cycle)
Minimum Value
0
x% Duty Cycle Limited (3…99% of Duty Cycle)
Maximum Value
99
Default Value
0
S Curve %
Parameter Number
183
Sets the percentage of acceleration or
deceleration time that is applied to ramp
as S Curve. Time is added, half at the
beginning and half at the end of the ramp.
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
1%
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
100
Default Value
0% disabled
3…99
184
Min./Max.
Parameter Number
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Figure 76 - S Curve
Example:
Accel Time = 10 Seconds
S Curve Setting = 50%
S Curve Time = 10 x 0.5 = 5 Seconds
Total Time = 10 + 5 = 15 Seconds
50% S Curve
Target
Target 2
1/2 S Curve Time
2.5 Seconds
Accel Time
10 Seconds
1/2 S Curve Time
2.5 Seconds
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S Curve Time
Boost Select
Parameter Number
184
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter
131 (Motor NP Volts)) and redefines the
Volts per Hz curve. Active when Parameter
225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz). Drive
may add additional voltage unless Option
5 is selected.
Related Parameters
104, 131, 132, 185…187, 225
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
14
Default Value
8
See Table 27 for details.
Table 27 - Boost Select Options
Options
Description
0
Custom V/Hz
1
30.0, VT
2
35.0, VT
3
40.0, VT
4
45.0, VT
5
0.0 no IR
6
0.0
7
2.5, CT (default for 5 Hp/4.0 kW Drive)
8
5.0, CT (default)
9
7.5, CT
10
10.0, CT
11
12.5, CT
12
15.0, CT
13
17.5, CT
14
20.0, CT
Variable Torque
(Typical fan/pump curves)
Constant Torque
➊To activate 170 (Preset Freq 0) set 138 (Speed Reference) to "4" (Preset Freq).
➋When a Digital Input is set to "Accel 2 & Decel 2", and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this table.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
185
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Figure 77 - Boost Select
1/2 [Motor NP Volts]
50
1/2
[Motor NP Hertz]
% P131 [Motor NP Volts]
100
Settings
5-14
0
186
4
3
2
1
50
% P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
100
Start Boost
Parameter Number
185
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter
131 (Motor NP Volts)) and redefines the
Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184
(Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and
Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/
Hz)
Related Parameters
131, 132, 134, 135, 184,
186…188, 225
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
1.1%
Minimum Value
0.0%
Maximum Value
25.0%
Default Value
2.5%
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Figure 78 - Start Boost
Parameter 188 (Maximum Voltage)
Parameter 186
(Start Boost)
Parameter 186 (Break Voltage)
Voltage
Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts)
Parameter 187 (Break Frequency)
Parameter 134 (Minimum Freq)
Parameter 132 (Motor NP Hertz)
Frequency
Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq)
Brake Voltage
Parameter Number
186
Sets the frequency where brake voltage is
applied when Parameter 184 (Boost
Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter
225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Related Parameters
131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 185, 187,
188, 225
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
1.1%
Minimum Value
0.0%
Maximum Value
100.0%
Default Value
25.0%
Brake Frequency
Parameter Number
187
Sets the frequency where brake frequency
is applied when Parameter 184 (Boost
Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter
225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Related Parameters
131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 185, 186,
188, 225
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0 Hz
Maximum Value
400.0 Hz
Default Value
15.0 Hz
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
187
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Maximum Voltage
Parameter Number
188
Sets the highest voltage that the drive will
output.
Related Parameters
104, 185, 186, 187
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
1V AC
Minimum Value
20V AC
Maximum Value
Drive Rated Volts
Default Value
Drive Rated Volts
Current Limit 1
Parameter Number
189
Maximum output current that is allowed
before current limiting occurs
Related Parameters
133, 218
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 A
Minimum Value
0.1 A
Maximum Value
Drive rated amps X 1.8
Default Value
Drive rated amps X 1.5
Parameter Number
190
Related Parameters
132, 133
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
1
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
2
Default Value
0
Motor OL Select
Drive provides Class 10 motor overload
protection. Settings 0…2, select the
derating factor for I2t overload function.
0 = No Derate
1 = Min. Derate
2 = Max. Derate
Figure 79 - Overload Trip Curves
188
Min Derate
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
100
80
60
40
20
0
Max Derate
% of P133 Motor OL Current
% of P133 Motor OL Current
% of P133 Motor OL Current
No Derate
100
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
PWM Frequency
Parameter Number
191
Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM
output waveform. The Figure 80 provides
derating guidelines that are based on the
PWM frequency setting.
Related Parameters
224
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.l Hz
Minimum Value
2.0 Hz
Maximum Value
16.0 Hz
Default Value
4.0 Hz
% Output Current (A)
Figure 80 - Derating Guidelines that are Based on the PWM Frequency Setting
100
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
52
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
Auto Rstrt Tries
Parameter Number
192
Set the maximum number of times the
drive attempts to reset a fault and restart.
Related Parameter
155, 193
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
1
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
9
Default Value
0
Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive
1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to a value other than 0.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
189
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault
without Restarting the Drive
1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to 0.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is
used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering
applicable local, national, and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry
guidelines.
Auto Rstrt Delay
Parameter Number
193
Sets time between restart attempts when
Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is set to a
value other than zero.
Related Parameters
192
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
300.0 sec
Default Value
1.0 sec
Parameter Number
194
Related Parameters
192
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Start at PowerUp
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to
resume running at command speed after the drive input is restored. Requires a digital input
configured Run or Start and a valid start contact.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result
if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use
this function without considering applicable local, national, and
international codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.
190
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Reverse Disable
Chapter 7
Parameter Number
195
Related Parameters
106
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Flying Start En
Parameter Number
196
Sets the condition that allows the drive to
reconnect to a spinning motor at actual
RPM.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
197
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
3
Default Value
1
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables the function that allows
the direction of the motor rotation to be
changed. The reverse command may come
from a digital command or serial
command. All reverse inputs including
two-wire Run Reverse will be ignored with
reverse disabled.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Compensation
Enables/disables correction options that
may improve problems with motor
instability,
0 = Disabled
1 = Electrical (Default)
Some drive/motor combinations have
inherent instabilities that are exhibited as
non-sinusoidal motor currents. This
setting attempts to correct this condition
2 = Mechanical
Some motor/load combinations have
mechanical resonances that can be excited
by the drive current regulator. This setting
slows down the current regulator response
and attempts to correct this condition.
3 = Both
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
191
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
SW Current Trip
Parameter Number
198
Enables/disables a software instantaneous
(within 100 ms) current trip.
Related Parameters
133
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 A
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
Drive rated amps x 2
Default Value
0.0 (Disabled)
Process Factor
Parameter Number
199
Scales the output frequency value that is
displayed by Parameter 110 (Process
Display).
Output Freq x Process Factor = Process
Display
Related Parameters
110
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1
Minimum Value
0.1
Maximum Value
999.9
Default Value
30.0
Parameter Number
200
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
2
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
201
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Fault Clear
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Resets a fault and clears the fault queue.
Used primarily to clear a fault over
network communications.
0 = Ready/Idle (Default)
1 = Reset Fault
2 = Clear Buffer (Parameters 107…109
(Fault x Code))
Program Lock
Protects parameters against change by
unauthorized personnel.
0 = Unlocked
1 = Locked
192
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Comm Loss Action
Parameter Number
205
Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the
communication connection or excessive
communication errors.
0 = Fault (Default)
Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and
coast to stop
1 = Coast Stop
Stops drive via coast to stop
2 = Stop
Stops via Parameter 137 (Stop Mode)
setting
3 = Continue Last
Drive continues operating at
communication commanded speed that is
saved in RAM.
Related Parameters
115, 137, 206
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Advanced Program Group
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
3
Default Value
0
Comm Loss Time
Parameter Number
206
Sets the time that the drive remains in
communication loss before implanting the
option selected in Parameter 205 (Comm
Loss Action).
Related Parameters
115, 205
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Advanced Program Group
Units
0.1 sec
Minimum Value
0.1 sec
Maximum Value
60.0 sec
Default Value
15.0 sec
Slip Hertz @ FLA
Parameter Number
214
Compensates for the inherent slip in an
induction motor. This frequency is added
to the commanded output frequency
based on motor current.
Related Parameters
133
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0 Hz
Maximum Value
10.0 Hz
Default Value
2.0 Hz
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
193
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Process Time Lo
Parameter Number
215
Scales the time value when the drive is
running at Parameter 134 (Minimum
Freq). When set to a value other than zero,
Parameter 110 (Process Display) indicates
the duration of the process.
Related Parameters
110, 134
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
Hz
Minimum Value
0.00
Maximum Value
99.99
Default Value
0.00
Process Time Hi
Parameter Number
216
Scales the time value when the drive is
running at Parameter 135 (Maximum
Freq). When set to a value other than zero,
Parameter 110 (Process Display) indicates
the duration of the process.
Related Parameters
110, 135
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
99.99
Default Value
0.00
Parameter Number
217
Related Parameters
—
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
1
Current Limit 2
Parameter Number
218
Maximum output current that is allowed
before current limiting occurs. This
parameter is only active if Parameters
151…154 (Digital In x Sel) is set to Option
25 (Current Lmt2) and is active.
Related Parameters
133, 151…154, 189
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 A
Minimum Value
0.0 A
Maximum Value
Drive rated amps x 1.8
Default Value
Drive rated amps x 1.5
Bus Reg Mode
Enables the bus regulator.
0 = Disable
1 = Enabled
194
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Skip Frequency
Parameter Number
219
Sets the frequency at which the drive will
not operate.
Related Parameters
220
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
400.0 Hz
Default Value
0.0 Hz
Parameter Number
220
Related Parameters
219
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 Hz
Minimum Value
0.0 Hz
Maximum Value
30.0 Hz
Default Value
0.0 Hz
Skip Freq Band
Determines the band width around
Parameter 219 (Skip Frequency).
Parameter 220 (Skip Freq Band) is split
applying 1/2 above and 1/2 below the
actual skip frequency. A setting of 0.0
disables this parameter.
Figure 81 - Skip Frequency Band
Frequency
Command
Frequency
Drive Output
Frequency
2x Skip
Frequency Band
Skip Frequency
Time
Stall Fault Time
Sets for the fault time that the drive will
remain in stall mode before a fault is
issued.
0 = 60 sec (Default)
1 = 120 sec
2 = 240 sec
3 = 360 sec
4 = 480 sec
5 = Flt Disabled
Parameter Number
221
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
5
Default Value
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
195
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Var PWM Disable
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables a feature that varies the
carrier frequency for the PWM output
waveform that is defined by Parameter
191 (PWM Frequency).
0 = Enabled
1 = Disabled
Disabling this feature when low frequency
condition exists may result in IGBT stress
and nuisance tripping.
Torque Perf Mode
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables sensorless vector control
operation.
0 = V/Hz
1 = Sensrls Vect
196
Parameter Number
224
Related Parameters
191
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
Parameter Number
225
Related Parameters
184…187, 227
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Motor NP FLA
Set to the motor nameplate full load
amps.
Autotune
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228 (IR Voltage Drop) and Parameter 229 (Flux
Current Ref), that affect sensorless vector performance. Parameter 226 (Motor NP FLA) must be set to
the motor nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure.
0 = Ready/Idle (Default)
1 = Static Tune
2 = Rotate Tune
Ready (0) – Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune.
Static Tune (1) – A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test
for the best possible automatic setting of Parameter 228 (IR Voltage Drop). A start command is
required within 30 seconds of setting this parameter following initiation of this setting. The
parameter returns to Ready (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required to
operate the drive in normal mode. Used when motor cannot be uncoupled from the load.
Rotate Tune (2) – A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for
the best possible automatic setting of Parameter 229 (Flux Current Ref). A start command is required
following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to Ready (0) following the test, at which
time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode.
IMPORTANT
Parameter Number
Chapter 7
226
Related Parameters
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1 A
Minimum Value
0.1
Maximum Value
Drive rated amps x 2
Default Value
Drive rated amps
Parameter Number
227
Related Parameters
225, 226, 228, 229
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
3
Default Value
0
Used when motor is uncoupled from the load. Results may not be valid if a load is
coupled to the motor during this procedure. Applies to rotate tune only.
ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this
procedure. To guard against possible injury and/or equipment damage, it is
recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding.
If the Autotune routine fails, an F80 SVC Autotune fault is displayed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
197
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
IR Voltage Drop
Parameter Number
228
Related Parameters
227
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.1V AC
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
230
Default Value
Based on Drive Rating
Parameter Number
229
Related Parameter
227
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.01 A
Minimum Value
0.00
Maximum Value
Motor NP Volts
Default Value
Based on Drive Rating
EM Brk OFF Delay
Parameter Number
260
Sets the time that the drive will remain at
minimum frequency before ramping to
the commanded frequency and energizing
the brake coil relay when Parameter 137
(Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
Related Parameters
134, 137
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UNIT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.01 sec
Minimum Value
0.01 sec
Maximum Value
10 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
Value of volts dropped across the
resistance of the motor stator.
Flux Current Ref
Value of amps for full motor flux.
198
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Figure 82 - EM Brk OFF Delay
Frequency
261 [EM Brk On Delay]
Ram
Ram
pA
cce
l
260 [EM Brk Off Delay]
pD
ece
l
Minimum Freq
Start
Commanded
EM Brk
Energized (Off)
Time
Stop
Commanded
EM Brk
De-Energized (On)
Drive Stops
EM Brk On Delay
Parameter Number
261
Sets the time that the drive will remain at
minimum frequency before stopping and
de-energizing the brake coil relay when
Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to
Option 8 or 9.
Related Parameters
134, 137
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UNIT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.01 sec
Minimum Value
0.01 sec
Maximum Value
10.00 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
MOP Reset Sel
Parameter Number
262
Sets the drive to save the current MOP
Reference command.
0 = Zero MOP Ref
This option clamps Parameter 169
(Internal Freq) at 0.0 Hz when drive is not
running.
1 = Save MOP Ref (Default)
Reference is saved in Parameter 169
(Internal Freq).
Related Parameters
169
Access Rule
Get/Set
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
1
Parameter Number
263
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UINT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0.0%
Maximum Value
110.0%
Default Value
100%
DB Threshold
Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for
Dynamic Brake operation. If the DC bus
voltage falls below the value set in this
parameter, the Dynamic Brake will not
turn on. Lower values will make the
Dynamic Braking function more
responsive, but may result in nuisance
Dynamic Brake activation.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
199
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if this parameter is set to a value that
causes the dynamic braking resistor to dissipate excessive power. Parameter settings
less than 100% should be carefully evaluated to ensure that the dynamic brake
resistor’s wattage rating is not exceeded. In general, values less than 90% are not
needed. This parameter’s setting is especially important if Parameter 182 (DB Resistor
Sel) is set to “2” (No Protection).
Comm Write Mode
Parameter Number
264
Determines whether parameter changes
made over communication port are saved
and stored in Non-Volatile Storage (NVS)
or RAM only. If they are stored in RAM, the
values will be lost at power-down.
0 = Save (Default)
1 = RAM Only
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
BOOL
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
—
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
1
Default Value
0
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. If a controller is programmed to write
parameter data to Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) frequently, the NVS will quickly exceed its
life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Do not create a program that frequently
uses configurable outputs to write parameter data to NVS unless Parameter 264 (Comm
Write Mode) is set to Option 1.
200
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Linear List of Parameters for
Bulletins 280E, 281E, and
284E
Table 28 - ArmorStart Parameters
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
1
Hdw Inputs
2
Description
Factory Default
Group
Controller
This parameter provides status of hardware inputs.
0
Basic Status
Common
Network Inputs
This parameter provides status of network inputs.
0
Basic Status
Common
3
Network Outputs
This parameter provides status of network outputs.
0
Basic Status
Common
4
Trip Status
This parameter provides trip identification.
0
Basic Status
Common
5
Starter Status
This parameter provides the status of the starter.
0
Basic Status
Common
6
InternalLinkStat
Status of the internal network connections.
0
Basic Status
Common
7
Starter Command
The parameter provides the status of the starter command.
0
Basic Status
Common
8
Network Override
This parameter allows for the local logic to override a
Network fault.
0
Misc. Configuration
Common
9
Comm Override
This parameter allows for local logic to override an absence of
an I/O connection.
0
Misc. Configuration
Common
13
Prod Assy Word 0
This parameter is used to build bytes 0…1 for produced
assembly 150 or 151.
0
Network Configuration
Common
14
Prod Assy Word 1
This parameter is used to build bytes 2…3 for produced
assembly 150 or 151.
0
Network Configuration
Common
15
Prod Assy Word 2
This parameter is used to build bytes 4…5 for produced
assembly 150 or 151.
0
Network Configuration
Common
16
Prod Assy Word 3
This parameter is used to build bytes 6…7 for produced
assembly 150 or 151.
0
Network Configuration
Common
22
Breaker Type
This parameter identifies the Bulletin 140M used in this
product.
0=
140M-D8N-C10
Basic Status
Common
23
Pr FltReset Mode
0 = Manual
Starter Protection
Common
24
Pr Fault Enable
This parameter enables the Protection Fault by setting the bit
to 1.
12419
Starter Protection
Common
25
Pr Fault Reset
This parameter resets the Protection Fault on a transition 0 >
1.
0
Starter Protection
Common
26
Str Net FltState
This parameter along with Parameter 27 (Str Net FltValue),
defines how the starter will respond when a fault occurs as
determined by Parameter 27.
0=
Goto Fault Value
Starter Protection
Common
27
Str Net FltValue
This parameter determines how the starter will be
commanded in the event of a fault.
0 = OFF
Starter Protection
Common
28
Str Net IdlState
This parameter determines response when Idle fault occurs.
0=
Goto Fault Value
Starter Protection
Common
29
Str Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that starter assumes
when the network is idle and Parameter 28 (Str Net IdlState)
is set to “Goto Fault Value”.
0 = OFF
Starter Protection
Common
30
Off-to-On Delay
This parameter allows the installer to program a time
duration before being reported ON.
0
User I/O Configuration
Common
31
On-to-Off Delay
This parameter allows the installer to program a time
duration before being reported OFF.
0
User I/O Configuration
Common
32
In Sink/Source
This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to
be sink or source.
0 = Sink
User I/O Configuration
Common
This parameter configures the Protection Fault reset mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
201
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Table 28 - ArmorStart Parameters
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
Description
Factory Default
Group
Controller
33
OutA Pr FltState
This parameter along with Parameter 34 (OutA Pr FltValue),
defines how Output A will respond when a trip occurs.
0=
Goto PrFlt Value
User I/O Configuration
Common
34
OutA Pr FltValue
This parameter determines the state the Output A.
0 = Open
User I/O Configuration
Common
35
OutA Net FltState
This parameter along with Parameter 36 (OutA Net FltValue),
defines how Output A will respond.
0=
Goto Fault Value
User I/O Configuration
Common
36
OutA Net FltValue
This parameter determines the state that Output.
0 = Open
User I/O Configuration
Common
37
OutA Net IdlState
This parameter along with Parameter 38 (OutA Net IdlValue),
defines how Output A will respond when the network is idle.
0=
Goto Idle Value
User I/O Configuration
Common
38
OutA Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes
when the network is idle and Parameter 37 (OutA Net
IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
User I/O Configuration
Common
39
OutB Pr FltState
This parameter along with Parameter 40 (OutB Pr FltValue),
defines how Output B will respond when a protection trip
occurs.
0=
Goto PrFlt Value
User I/O Configuration
Common
40
OutB Pr FltValue
This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when
a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB Pr FltState) is
set to “0”.
0 = Open
User I/O Configuration
Common
41
OutB Net FltState
This parameter along with Parameter 42 (OutB Net FltValue),
defines how Output B will respond when a network fault
occurs.
0=
Goto Idle Value
User I/O Configuration
Common
42
OutB Net FltValue
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes
when a network fault occurs and Parameter 41 (OutB Net
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
User I/O Configuration
Common
43
OutB Net IdlState
This parameter along with Parameter 44 (OutB Net IdlValue),
defines how Output B will respond when the network is idle.
0=
Goto PrFlt Value
User I/O Configuration
Common
44
OutB Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes
when the network is idle and Parameter 43 (OutB Net
IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
User I/O Configuration
Common
45
Keypad Mode
This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained
or momentary.
0 = Maintained
Misc. Configuration
Common
46
Keypad Disable
This parameter disables all keypad function except for the
OFF and RESET buttons.
0 = Not Disabled
Misc. Configuration
Common
47
Set To Defaults
This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory
defaults.
0 = No Operation
Misc. Configuration
Common
48
Drive Control
This parameter provides the status of drive parameters.
0
Drive I/O Configuration
284E
49
DrvIn Pr FltState
This parameter, along with Parameter 50 (DrvIn Pr FltValue),
defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will respond when
a protection trip occurs.
0=
Go to PrFlt Value
Drive I/O Configuration
284E
50
DrvIn Pr FltValue
This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs
1…4, assumes when a trip occurs.
0 = Open
Drive I/O Configuration
284E
51
DrvIn Net FltState
This parameter, along with Parameter 52 (DrvIn Net
FltValue), defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will
respond when a network fault occurs.
0=
Go to Fault Value
Drive I/O Configuration
284E
52
DrvIn Net FltValue
This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs
1…4 when a network fault occurs and Parameter 51 (DrvIn
Net FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = OFF
Drive I/O Configuration
284E
53
DrvIn Net FItState
This parameter, along with Parameter 54 (DrvIn Net
FItValue), defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will
respond when a DeviceNet™ network is idle.
0=
Go to Fault Value
Drive I/O Configuration
284E
202
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Table 28 - ArmorStart Parameters
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
Description
Factory Default
Group
Controller
54
DrvIn Net FItValue
This parameter determines the state that Drive Digital Inputs
1…4 assume when the network is idle and Parameter 53
(DrvIn Net FItState) is set to “0”.
0 = OFF
Drive I/O Configuration
284E
56
Base Enclosure
Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating.
1
Basic Status
Common
57
Base Options
Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit.
0
Basic Status
Common
58
Wiring Options
This parameter provides the Wiring Options.
0
Basic Status
Common
59
Starter Enclosure
This parameter provides the Starter Enclosure.
1
Basic Status
Common
60
Starter Options
This parameter provides the Starter Options.
0
Basic Status
Common
61
Last PR Fault
0 = None
Basic Status
Common
62
Warning Status
This parameter provides the Warning Status.
0
Basic Status
Common
63
Base Trip
This parameter provides the Base Module Trip Status.
0
Basic Status
Common
101
Phase A Current
This parameter provides the current of Phase A.
0
Starter Display
DOL
102
Phase B Current
This parameter provides the current of Phase B.
0
Starter Display
DOL
103
Phase C Current
This parameter provides the current of Phase C.
0
Starter Display
DOL
104
Average Current
This parameter provides the average current.
0
Starter Display
DOL
105
Therm Utilized
This parameter displays the % Thermal Capacity used.
0
Starter Display
DOL
106
FLA Setting
See Table 23.
Starter Setup
DOL
107
Overload Class
Selects the overload class.
1=
Overload Class 10
Starter Setup
DOL
108
OL Reset Level
Selects the % Thermal Capacity that an overload can be
cleared.
75
Starter Setup
DOL
101
Output Freq
Output frequency present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W)
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
102
Commanded Freq
Value of the active frequency command
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
103
Output Current
Output current present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W)
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
104
Output Voltage
Output voltage present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W)
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
105
DC Bus Voltage
Present DC bus voltage level
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
106
Drive Status
Present operating condition of the drive.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
107…109
Fault x Code
A code that represents a drive fault.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
110
Process Display
The output frequency that is scaled by Parameter 199
(Process Factor).
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
112
Control Source
Displays the source of the Start Command and Speed
Reference.
5=
RS485 (DSI) Port
Drive Display
284E
113
Control In
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
114
Dig In Status
Status of the control terminal block digital inputs.
0
Drive Display
284E
115
Comm Status
Status of the communications ports
0
Drive Display
284E
116
Control SW Ver
Main Control Board software version for AC Drive.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
118
Elapsed Run Time
Accumulated time drive is outputting power.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
122
Output Power
Output power present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
123
Output Power Fctr
The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and
motor current.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
This parameter provides the Last PR Fault.
The motor’s full load current rating
Status of control inputs. These can be used in DeviceLogix
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
203
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Table 28 - ArmorStart Parameters
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
124
Drive Temp
125
Counter Status
126
Timer Status
129
Description
Factory Default
Group
Controller
Present operating temperature of the drive power section.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
The current value of the counter when counter is enabled.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
The current value of the timer when timer is enabled.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
Torque Current
Displays the current value of the motor torque current as
measured by the drive.
Read Only
Drive Display
284E
131
Motor NP Volts
Set to the motor name plate rated volts.
Based on Drive Rating
Drive Setup
284E
132
Motor NP Hertz
Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
60 Hz
Drive Setup
284E
133
Motor OL Current
Set to the maximum allowable current.
Based on Drive Rating
Drive Setup
284E
134
Minimum Freq
Sets the lowest frequency that the drive will output
continuously.
0.0 Hz
Drive Setup
284E
135
Maximum Freq
Sets the highest frequency that the drive will output
continuously.
60 Hz
Drive Setup
284E
136
Start Source
Sets the control scheme that is used to start the Bulletin 284E
ArmorStart.
5 = Comm Port
(RS485 (DSI))
Drive Setup
284E
137
Stop Mode
Sets the Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
9=
Ramp + EM Brk
Drive Setup
284E
138
Speed Reference
Sets the Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 284E
ArmorStart.
5 = Comm Port
Drive Setup
284E
139
Accel Time 1
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases.
10.0 Secs
Drive Setup
284E
140
Decel Time 1
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases.
10.0 Secs
Drive Setup
284E
141
Reset To Defaults
0 = Ready/Idle
Drive Setup
284E
143
Motor OL Ret
0 = Disabled
Drive Setup
284E
Used to reset drive to factory default settings
Enables/Disables the Motor Overload Retention function.
Table 29 - Bulletin 284E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
151…154
Digital In 1 Sel
Digital In 2 Sel
Digital In 3 Sel
Digital In 4 Sel
Selects the function for the digital inputs.
155
Relay Out Sel
156
204
Description
Factory Default
Group
See Table 24.
Drive Advanced Setup
Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts.
0 = Ready/Fault
See Table 25.
Drive Advanced Setup
Relay Out Level
Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter
155 (Relay Out Sel) is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18, or 20.
0.0
Drive Advanced Setup
169
Internal Freq
Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138 (Speed
Reference) is set to “1” (Internal Freq).
60.0 Hz
Drive Advanced Setup
170…177
Preset Freq 0
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Provides a fixed frequency command value when Parameters 151…154
(Digital In x Sel) is set to Option 4 (Preset Frequencies).
See Table 26.
Drive Advanced Setup
178
Jog Frequency
Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued.
10.0 Hz
Drive Advanced Setup
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 7
Table 29 - Bulletin 284E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
179
Jog Accel/Decel
180
Description
Factory Default
Group
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is
issued.
10.0 Secs
Drive Advanced Setup
DC Brake Time
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor.
See Parameter 181 (DC Brake Level).
0.0 Secs
Drive Advanced Setup
181
DC Brake Level
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor
when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to either Ramp or DC Brake.
Drive Rated Amps x
0.05
Drive Advanced Setup
182
DB Resistor Sel
Used to set percent duty cycle for external dynamic braking.
0 = Disabled
Drive Advanced Setup
183
S Curve %
Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to
ramp as S Curve. Time is added, half at the beginning and half at the end
of the ramp.
0% (Disabled)
Drive Advanced Setup
184
Boost Select
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts))
and redefines the Volts per Hz curve. Active when Parameter 225 (Torque
Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz). Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5
is selected.
8 = 5.0 (2.5 for 5 Hp
drives)
Drive Advanced Setup
185
Start Boost
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts))
and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184 (Boost Select)
= 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
2.5%
Drive Advanced Setup
186
Brake Voltage
Sets the frequency where brake voltage is applied when Parameter 184
(Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode)
= 0 (V/Hz).
25.0%
Drive Advanced Setup
187
Brake Frequency
Sets the frequency where brake frequency is applied when Parameter
184 (Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf
Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
15.0 Hz
Drive Advanced Setup
188
Maximum Voltage
Sets the highest voltage that the drive will output.
Drive Rated Volts
Drive Advanced Setup
189
Current Limit 1
Maximum output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs.
Drive Rated Amps x
1.5
Drive Advanced Setup
190
Motor OL Select
Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection. Setting 0…2 select
the derating factor for I2t overload function.
0 = No Derate
Drive Advanced Setup
191
PWM Frequency
Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform.
Figure 80 provides derating guidelines that are based on the PWM
frequency setting.
4.0 Hz
Drive Advanced Setup
192
Auto Rstrt Tries
Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault
and restart.
0
Drive Advanced Setup
193
Auto Rstrt Delay
Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt
Tries) is set to a value other than zero.
1.0 Secs
Drive Advanced Setup
194
Start At PowerUp
Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to
automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed
after the drive input is restored.
0 = Disabled
Drive Advanced Setup
195
Reverse Disable
Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of the motor
rotation to be changed.
0 = Disabled
Drive Advanced Setup
196
Flying Start En
Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor
at actual RPM.
0 = Disabled
Drive Advanced Setup
197
Compensation
Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with
motor instability.
1 = Electrical
Drive Advanced Setup
198
SW Current Trip
Enables/disables a software instantaneous (within 100 ms) current trip.
0.0 (Disabled)
Drive Advanced Setup
199
Process Factor
Scales the output frequency value that is displayed by Parameter 110
(Process Display).
30.0
Drive Advanced Setup
200
Fault Clear
Resets a fault and clears the fault queue.
0 = Ready/Idle
Drive Advanced Setup
201
Program Lock
Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel.
0 = Unlocked
Drive Advanced Setup
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
205
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Table 29 - Bulletin 284E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
Description
Factory Default
Group
205
Comm Loss Action
Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the communication connection or
excessive communication errors.
0 = Fault
Drive Advanced Setup
206
Comm Loss Time
Sets the time that the drive remains in communication loss before
implanting the option selected in Parameter 205 (Comm Loss Action).
15.0 Secs
Drive Advanced Setup
214
Slip Hertz @ FLA
Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor. This frequency
is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current.
2.0 Hz
Drive Advanced Setup
215
Process Time Lo
Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 134
(Minimum Freq). When set to a value other than zero, Parameter 110
(Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.
0.00
Drive Advanced Setup
216
Process Time Hi
Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq). When set to a value other than zero, Parameter 110
(Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.
0.00
Drive Advanced Setup
217
Bus Reg Mode
Enables the bus regulator.
1 = Enabled
Drive Advanced Setup
218
Current Limit 2
Maximum output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs.
Drive Rated
Amps x 1.5
Drive Advanced Setup
219
Skip Frequency
Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate.
0.0 Hz
Drive Advanced Setup
220
Skip Freq Band
Determines the brand width around Parameter 219 (Skip Frequency).
Parameter 220 (Skip Freq Band) is split applying 1/2 above and 1/2
below the actual skip frequency.
0.0 Hz
Drive Advanced Setup
221
Stall Fault Time
Sets for the fault time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a
fault is issued.
0 = 60 Seconds
Drive Advanced Setup
224
Var PWM Disable
Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM
output waveform that is defined by Parameter 191 (PWM Frequency).
0 = Enabled
Drive Advanced Setup
225
Torque Perf Mode
Enables/disables sensorless vector control operation.
1 = Sensrls Vect
Drive Advanced Setup
226
Motor NP FLA
Set to the motor nameplate full load amps.
Drive Rated Amps
Drive Advanced Setup
227
Autotune
Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228 (IR Voltage
Drop) and Parameter 229 (Flux Current Ref), that affect sensorless vector
performance.
0 = Ready/Idle
Drive Advanced Setup
228
IR Voltage Drop
Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator.
Based on Drive
Rating
Drive Advanced Setup
229
Flux Current Ref
Value of amps for full motor flux.
Based on Drive
Rating
Drive Advanced Setup
260
EM Brk OFF Delay
Sets the time that the drive will remain at minimum frequency before
ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil
relay when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
0.0 Secs
Drive Advanced Setup
261
EM Brk On Delay
Sets the time that the drive will remain at minimum frequency before
stopping and de-energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137
(Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
0.0 Secs
Drive Advanced Setup
262
MOP Reset Sel
Sets the drive to save the current MOP Reference command.
1 = Save MOP Ref
Drive Advanced Setup
263
DB Threshold
Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Dynamic Brake operation.
100%
Drive Advanced Setup
264
Comm Write Mode
0 = Save
Drive Advanced Setup
206
Determines whether parameter changes made over the communication
port are saved and stored in Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) or RAM only.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Chapter
8
How to Configure an Explicit Message
Programming ControlLogix
Explicit Message
Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix
In the ControlLogix® platform, explicit messaging can be done easily from within
a logic program. The request and response is configured within the MSG
function. The MSG function can be found in the Input/Output tab of
RSLogix 5000.
Setting Up the MSG Instruction
A tag name must be given to the MSG function before the rest of the information
can be defined. In this example, a tag was created with the name explicit_mess.
After the instruction has been named, click the gray box
to define the rest of
the instruction.
Figure 83 - MSG Function Found in the Input/Output Tab
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
207
Chapter 8
How to Configure an Explicit Message
Formatting an Explicit
Message
ControlLogix scanners and bridges accommodate both downloading Explicit
Message Requests and uploading Explicit Message Responses. The message
format is shown in Figure 84.
Figure 84 - ControlLogix Message Format in RSLogix 5000
Box
208
Description
➊
Message Type
The message type is usually CIP Generic.
➋
Service Type
The service type indicates the service (for example, Get Attribute Single or Set Attribute Single) that you
want to perform.
➌
Service Code
The service code is the code for the requested EtherNet/IP service. This value changes based on the Service
Type that has been selected. In most cases, this is a read-only box.
If you select “Custom” in the Service Type box, then you need to specify a service code in this box (for
example, 4B for a Get Attributes Scattered service or 4C for a Set Attributes Scattered service).
➍
Class
The class is an EtherNet/IP class.
➎
Instance
The instance is an instance (or object) of an EtherNet/IP class.
➏
Attribute
The attribute is a class or instance attribute.
➐
Source Element
This box contains the name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the
module and drive.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
How to Configure an Explicit Message
Box
Chapter 8
Description
➑
Source Length
This box contains the number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message.
➒
Destination
This box contains the name of the tag that receives service response data from the module and drive.
➓
Path
The path is the route that the message follow.s
Note: Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of a module that you previously mapped.
Name
The name for the message.
Performing Explicit
Messages
IMPORTANT
There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process that is defined below. The
details of each step vary depending on the controller. See the documentation for your
controller.
Figure 85 - Explicit Message Process
Box
Description
➊
Format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message Request to the
scanner or bridge module (download).
➋
The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the
EtherNet/IP network.
➌
The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner. The data is stored in the
scanner buffer.
➍
The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner’s buffer (upload).
➎
The Explicit Message is complete.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
209
Chapter 8
How to Configure an Explicit Message
The MSG (message) instruction handles all explicit messaging that is initiated by
a Logix Controller program.
It automatically creates and manages TCP connections and CIP encapsulation
sessions. The user has no direct influence on this process.
Figure 86 - Example — Message Configuration Tab
The Class, Instance, and Attribute define the actual information being requested.
Additional configurations of these parameters can be found in Chapter B.
210
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
9
Diagnostics
Overview
This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur.
Protection Programming
Many of the protective features available with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller can be enabled and adjusted through the programming parameters
provided. For further details on programming, see Chapter 7, Bulletin 280E/
281E/284E Programmable Parameters.
Fault Display
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller comes equipped with a built-in
LED status indication that provides four status LEDs and a Reset button.
Figure 87 - LED Status Indication and Reset
Clear Fault
You may clear a fault using the following methods:
• Remotely via network communications
A remote reset is attempted upon detection of a rising edge (0 to 1
transition) of the “Fault Reset” bit in the various I/O assemblies. A remote
reset is also attempted upon detection of the rising edge of the “Fault
Reset” parameter.
• Locally via the “Reset” button on the LED Status indication keypad.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
211
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
Fault Codes
Table 30 provides a reference of the Fault LED indications for Bulletin 280E,
281E, and Bulletin 284E Distributed Motor Controllers.
Table 30 - Fault Indication
Blink Pattern
Fault Definitions
Fault Types
Bulletin 280E/281E
Bulletin 284E
1
Short Circuit
Short Circuit
2
Overload Trip
Overload Trip
3
Phase Loss
Phase Short
4
Reserved
Ground Fault
5
Reserved
Stall
6
Control Power
Control Power
7
I/O Fault
I/O Fault
8
Over Temperature
Over Temperature
9
Phase Imbalance
Over Current
10
A3 Power Loss
A3 Power Loss
11
Reserved
Internal Communications
12
Reserved
DC Bus Fault
13
EEPROM Fault
EEPROM Fault
14
Hardware Fault
Hardware Fault
15
Reserved
Restart Retries
16
Reserved
Misc. Fault
Short Circuit
Short Circuit indicates that the Bulletin 140M motor protector has tripped, or
that the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current
surge. This fault cannot be disabled.
Overload Trip
The load has drawn excessive current and based on the overload trip class that is
selected, the device has tripped. This fault cannot be disabled.
When using Bulletin 280, 281 with a mechanical motor brake actuator
connected to motor out leads, care must be taken with 1 Hp (0.73 kW) or smaller
loads as the current is elevated in those legs that influence the electronic overload
and may cause nuisance phase imbalance or overload faults. An adjustment to the
full load amps (FLA) setting to offset this additional current may be necessary.
212
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Diagnostics
Chapter 9
Phase Loss
Indicates a missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by
default.
Phase Short
Indicates the drive has detected a phase short. This fault cannot be disabled.
Ground Fault
Indicates the drive has detected a ground fault. This fault cannot be disabled.
Stall
Indicates the drive has detected a stall condition, indicating the motor has not
reached full speed. This fault cannot be disabled.
Control Power
Indicates a loss of control power voltage or a blown control power circuit. This
fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
I/O Fault
This error can indicate a shorted sensor, shorted input device, or input wiring
mistakes. It can also indicate a blown output fuse. This fault can be disabled and is
disabled by default.
Over Temperature
Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded. This fault cannot be
disabled.
Phase Imbalance
Indicates an imbalance supply voltage. This fault can be disabled and is disabled
by default.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
213
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
Over Current
Indicates the drive has detected an over current fault. This fault cannot be
disabled.
A3 Power Loss
Power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold. This fault can be
disabled and is disabled by default.
Internal Communication Fault
Indicates an internal communication fault has been detected. This fault cannot
be disabled.
DC Bus Fault
Indicates the drive has detected a DC Bus Fault. This fault cannot be disabled.
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EEPROM Fault
This is a major fault, that renders the ArmorStart inoperable. This fault cannot be
disabled.
Hardware Fault
This indicates an Internal FAN RPM is low, Internal temperature monitor
failure, Internal Brake fuse opened, or incorrect base or control module. This
fault cannot be disabled.
Restart Retries
This fault is generated when the drive detects that the auto retries count has been
exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.
214
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Diagnostics
Chapter 9
Miscellaneous Faults
For Bulletin 284E units, this fault is actually the logical of several drive faults not
specifically enumerated. This includes DB1 Brake fault, Heatsink Over
Temperature (fault code F8), Params Defaulted fault (fault code F48), and SVC
Autotune fault (fault code F80).
This fault cannot be disabled.
EtherNet/IP LED status and diagnostics consists of four LEDs.
EtherNet/IP LED Status
Indication
• Link Activity/Status LEDS
Figure 88 - EtherNet/IP LED
– Link1 Activity/Status (Port 1) – LED Color: Bicolor (Green/Yellow).
see Table 31
– Link2 Activity/Status (Port 2) – LED Color: Bicolor (Green/Yellow).
see Table 31
• “MOD” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the Ethernet Module
status, see Table 32
• “NET” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the Ethernet Network
status, see Table 34
Table 31 - Link 1 or Link 2 Port Activity/Status
Link 1 or 2 Status LED
Description
Recommended Action
OFF
No link established
Verify network cabling, and correct, as needed.
Green
Link established at 100 Mbps
None
Flashing green
Transmit or receive activity present at 100 Mbps
None
Yellow
Link established at 10 Mbps
None
Flashing yellow
Transmit or receive activity present at 10 Mbps
None
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
215
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
Table 32 - Module Status Indicator
MOD Status LED
Summary
Requirement
Steady OFF
No power
If no power is supplied to the device, the module status indicator shall be steady OFF.
Steady Green
Device operational
If the device is operating correctly and the PLC is in Run mode, the module status
indicator shall be steady green.
Flashing Green
Standby
If the device has not been configured or the PLC is not in Run mode, the module status
indicator shall be flashing green.
Flashing Red
Minor fault
If the device has detected a recoverable minor fault, the module status indicator shall
be flashing red.
Note: An incorrect or inconsistent configuration would be considered a minor fault.
Steady Red
Major fault
If the device has detected a non-recoverable major fault, see Table 33.
Flashing Green/Red
Self-test
While the device is performing its power up testing, the module status indicator shall
be flashing green/red.
See Parameter 63 “Base Trip” for the Base Module Trip Status.
Table 33 - “Steady Red” MOD LED Status (See Table 32.)
Fault Type
Description
0
EEPROM Fault
Non-volatile memory value out of range for a local parameter, or a write failure is detected. This fault is also reflected
by a solid red MOD status LED.
1
Internal Comm2
The Internal communication connection has timed out. This fault is also reflected by a flashing red MOD status LED.
2
Hardware Fault
Internal diagnostics checks failed. This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED.
3
Control Module
An illegal or unsupported Control Module product code or revision has been detected. Also reported if no Control
Module is detected on power up. This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED.
Reserved
Reserved
4…15
Table 34 - Network Status Indicator
Indicator State
216
Summary
Requirement
Steady OFF
Not powered, no IP address
If the device does not have an IP address (or is powered OFF), the network status
indicator shall be steady OFF.
Flashing Green
No connections
If the device has no established connections, but has obtained an IP address, the
network status indicator shall be flashing green.
Steady Green
Connected
If the device has at least one established connection (even to the Message Router),
the network status indicator shall be steady green.
Flashing Red
Connection timeout
If one or more of the connections in which this device is the target has timed out,
the network status indicator shall be flashing red. This shall be left if only all timed
out connections are re-established or if the device is reset.
Steady Red
Duplicate IP
If the device has detected that the IP address is already in use, the network status
indicator shall be steady red.
Flashing Red/Green
Self-test
While the device is performing its power up testing, the network status indicator
shall be flashing green/red.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Diagnostics
Chapter 9
The Control Module LED status and diagnostics consists of four status LEDs
and a Reset button. The following is a brief explanation of the operation of each
LED found on the Control Module.
Control Module LED
Status and Reset
Figure 89 - LED Status
Indication and Reset
Table 35 - Control Module LED Status Indication
LED
Definition
Recommended Action
Power
This LED is illuminated solid green when switched
control power is present and with the proper
polarity.
Verify 24V DC is present on A1 and A2. Check if the
local disconnect is in the OFF position.
Run
This LED is illuminated solid green when a start
command and control power is present.
Verify 24V DC is present on A1 and A3. Check if the
user is properly commanding to RUN via Instance
162 or 166.
Network
This bicolor LED is used to indicate the status of the
internal network connection.
See Table 34, Network Status Indicator table above
for additional information.
Fault
This LED is used to indicate the fault status of the
ArmorStart. When the unit is faulted, the unit
responds with a specific blink pattern to identify
the fault.
See Table 36 and Table 37 below for additional
information.
The “Reset Button” is a local trip reset.
The PrFlt Reset Mode (Parameter 23) determines how a fault is reset. When this
parameter is set to the value 0 = manual mode, a local or remote fault reset is
needed to reset the fault. When this parameter is set to the value 1 = auto reset,
faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition goes away. Referring to
Table 37 for the 284, in addition to the “Pr FltReset Mode” the Auto Rstrt Tries
(Parameter 192) must be set greater than 0.
Control Module Fault
LED Indications
NOTE: The “Pr FltReset Mode” parameter takes precedence. Therefore if P23 is
set to manual, changing P192 to a value greater than 0 has no effect.
Table 36 - Fault LED Indicators for Bulletin 280E/281E
Blink
Pattern
AutoResettable
Bulletin 280E/281E Trip
Status
1
No
Short Circuit
The circuit breaker (140M) has tripped.
Determine cause of trip. Try to reset the circuit breaker
using the disconnect handle. If the conditions continue,
check power wiring or replace based module. This cannot
be disabled.
2
Yes
Overload
The load has drawn excessive current and based on the
trip class that is selected, the device has tripped.
Verify that the load is operating correctly and the
ArmorStart is properly set-up. The fault cannot be
disabled. If there is an EM brake on the motor check if the
brake current is a significant percentage compare to the
FLA. Adjust FLA to compensate for the brake current.
3
Yes
Phase Loss
The ArmorStart has detected a missing phase.
Verify that 3-phase voltage is present at the line side
connections. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by
default.
4
—
Reserved
Not Used
—
5
—
Reserved
Not Used
—
Description
Action
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
217
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
Table 36 - Fault LED Indicators for Bulletin 280E/281E
Blink
Pattern
AutoResettable
Bulletin 280E/281E Trip
Status
Description
Action
6
Yes
Control Pwr Loss (Switched
Power)
The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power
voltage.
Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/A2
terminal). Also, check and replace the control voltage
fuse, if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is
disabled by default.
7
Yes
Input Fault
This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input
device, wiring input mistakes, or a blown output fuse.
Correct, isolate, or remove wiring error before restarting
the system. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by
default.
8
Yes
Over Temperature
This fault is generated when the operating temperature
has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that
ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F). 1.
Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
9
Yes
Phase Imbalance
The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance.
Check the power system and correct if necessary. This
fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
10
Yes
Control Power (24V DC) Lost
(Unswitched Power)
The 24V DC power supply is below tolerance threshold.
Check the state of the network power supply (A3/A1
terminal) and look for media problems. This fault can be
disabled and is disabled by default.
11
—
Reserved
Not Used
—
12
—
Reserved
Not Used
—
13
No
EEprom
This is a major fault, that renders the ArmorStart
inoperable. Possible causes of this fault are transients
that are induced during EEprom storage routines.
If the fault was initiated by a transient, power cycling
should clear the problem, otherwise replacement of the
ArmorStart may be required. This fault cannot be
disabled.
14
No
Hdw Flt
This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem
exists.
Check for a base/starter module mismatch. If no
mismatch exists, refer to parameter 61 for additional
fault detail. The ArmorStart may need to be replaced if
the fault persists.(Hdw Flt is the factory-enabled default
setting.) This fault cannot be disabled.
15
—
Reserved
Not Used
—
16
—
Reserved
Not Used
—
Table 37 - Fault LED Indicators for 284E
Bit/Blink
Pattern
AutoResettable ➊
1
No
218
284E Trip Status
Short Circuit
Description
Action
The circuit breaker (140M) has tripped.
Determine cause of trip. Try to reset the circuit breaker
using the disconnect handle. If the conditions continue,
check power wiring or replace based module. This cannot
be disabled.
2
Drive Controlled Overload
(Drive Codes 7 and 64)
An excessive motor load exists
1. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed
the current set by Parameter 133 (Motor OL Current).
2. Verify Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting.
3. Drive rating of 150% for 1 minute.
4. Reduce load or extend Accel Time two hundred
percent or when 3 seconds has been exceeded.
3
Drive Controlled Phase Short
(Drive Codes 38…43)
1. Phase U, V, or W to Gnd. A phase to ground fault has
been detected between the drive and motor in this
phase.
2. Phase UV, UW, or VW Short. Excessive current has been
detected between these two output terminals.
Check the wiring between the drive and motor. Check
motor for grounded phase. Check the motor and drive
output terminal wiring for a shorted condition. Replace
drive if fault cannot be cleared.
4
Drive Controlled Ground Fault
(Drive Code 13)
A current path to earth ground has been detected at one
or more of the drive output terminals.
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output
terminals for a grounded condition.
5
Drive Controlled Stall
(Drive Code 6)
Drive is unable to accelerate motor.
Increase Parameters 139…167 (Accel Time x) or reduce
load so drive output current does not exceed the current
set by Parameter 189 (Current Limit 1).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Diagnostics
Chapter 9
Table 37 - Fault LED Indicators for 284E
Bit/Blink
Pattern
AutoResettable ➊
6
Parameter 23
(PrFlt Reset
Mode)
7
8
9
284E Trip Status
Description
Action
Control Pwr Loss
(Switched Power)
The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power
voltage.
Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/A2
terminal). Also, check and replace the control voltage
fuse, if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is
disabled by default.
Parameter 23
(PrFlt Reset
Mode)
Input Fault
This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input
device, wiring input mistakes, or a blown output fuse.
If this fault occurs, the offending problem should be
isolated or removed before restarting the system. This
fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Parameter 23
(PrFlt Reset
Mode)
Over Temperature
This fault is generated when the operating temperature
has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that
ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F).
1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
The drive output current has exceeded the hardware
current limit.
Check programming. Check for excess load, improper
Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting. DC brake volts set
too high or other causes of excess current. Parameter 198
(SW Current Trip) has been exceeded, check load
requirements and Parameter 198 setting.
Drive Controlled Over Current
(Drive Codes 12 and 63)
10
Parameter 23
(PrFlt Reset
Mode)
Control Power (24V DC)
Lost (Unswitched Power)
The 24V DC power supply is below tolerance threshold.
Check the state of the network power supply (A3/A1
terminal) and look for media problems. This fault can be
disabled and is disabled by default.
11
No
Internal Comm
(See Parameter 61 for
details on this fault. F81 is
a VFD fault. This could also
happen if control power is
lost.)
Communication with either the control module (VFD) or
Control module has stopped.
See section Fault 11 Detail. If the problem persists
replace the unit.
Drive Controlled DC Bus Fault
(Drive Codes Reference 3,
4 and 5)
Power Loss - DC bus voltage remained below 85% of
nominal. UnderVoltage - DC but voltage fell below the
minimum value. OverVoltage - DC bus voltage exceeded
maximum value.
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line
power interruption. Check the input fuses. Monitor the
AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus
overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration.
Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option.
12
13
No
EEprom
(PF Drive Code Reference
100)
The checksum read from the board does not match the
checksum that is calculated.
Set Parameter 141 (Reset to Defaults) to Option 1 “Reset
Defaults”.
14
No
Hdw Flt (PF Drive Codes
Reference 70 and 122)
Failure has been detected in the drive power section or
drive control and I/O section. See Last Protection Fault
parameter 61 for details.
1. Cycle power.
2. If Fan RPM fault, replace the fan.
3. Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared.
15
Drive Controlled Restart Retries (PF Drive
Code Reference 33)
Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and
resume running for the programmed number of
Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries).
Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.
16
Drive Controlled Misc. Fault (PF Drive Code
Reference 2, 8, 29, 48 and
80)
Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value. The
drive was commanded to write default values to EEprom.
The autotune function was either cancelled by the user or
failed. If DB1 option is installed see P61 for additional
diagnostics.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that
ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F)
and mounted properly.
1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
2. Program the drive parameters as needed. Restart
procedure.
3. Check for DB1 fault and see DB1 diagnostics.
➊ When "Drive Controlled", see Internal Drive Faults see Table 39 for details regarding which drive faults can be auto reset.
Fault 11 Detail
Parameter 61 provides a more granular description of the faults that occur.
• An F11 protection fault indicates that the internal communication has
stopped
• There is a 10 second delay before an F11 Internal Comm. fault is present
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
219
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
• Common causes of an Internal Comm. fault:
– The local ArmorStart Disconnect switch is in the OFF position.
– 3-Phase line power feeding the ArmorStart is not connected or is
turned OFF.
– Switched Control Power is not connected or is turned OFF.
– Poor power quality (Brown Out)
• First things to check:
– Verify that the local disconnect is in the ON position.
– Verify that the unit has 3-Phase Line Voltage present and it is within
specified tolerances.
– Verify that the ArmorStart unit has Control Voltage present and it is
within specified tolerances.
– Attempt to clear the fault by pressing the local reset or sending the
ArmorStart a network reset.
– Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit and try to clear the fault again.
• If an Internal Comm. fault persists, see Parameter 61 – LastPR Fault for
additional details on the last protection fault. See the following table for
troubleshooting information that is based on what Parameter 61 returns.
Also see Parameters 107…109 to get the VFD fault code that can be
referenced below.
Parameter 61 Fault Code
Description
Recommended Action
13 = Control Power Loss
Control power was lost or dipped below the lower
threshold long enough to cause the Internal Comm. fault.
• Check that control power is turned on and within specified tolerances.
• Check the Control Power fuse, replace if necessary.
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset once control power
is restored.
14 = Control Power Fuse
The control power fuse has blown and the control power
circuit no longer is a closed circuit.
• Additional investigation as to why the fuse blew is needed. Take
corrective action accordingly.
• Replace the fuse and reset the ArmorStart either locally or over the
network.
21 = A3 Power Loss
Unswitched (A3/A2) control power was lost or dipped
below the lower threshold long enough to cause the
Internal Comm. fault.
• DeviceNet power loss
• Check that the A3 or DNet power terminal does not have any loose
connections.
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset once the
unswitched control power is restored
22 = Internal Comm
24 = Power Loss (3-Phase)
25 = Under Voltage (3-Phase)
• The ArmorStart's MCB lost communications with the
VFD. This is most likely due to a loss of 3-phase power.
• PF Fault Code 3 or 4
•
•
•
•
23 = Drive Comm Loss (PF Fault Code 81)
The PowerFlex VFD lost communications with the MCB.
This is most likely due to a loss of control power or
network power.
• Check that control power and the network power are both present.
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset.
28 = Base EEPROM
The MCB can't read the base module's EEPROM or isn't
communicating correctly with the base module. In the
EtherNet/IP units, Parameter 63 – Base Trip provides
more detail as to why the base module may not be
communicating properly with the control module
• Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit.
• Verify that the control module is seated correctly in the base module
• Check the connector on the control module for bent or broken pins
41 = DB1 Comm
The MCB has lost communications with the Dynamic
Brake (DB1) board or the EEPROM on the DB1 board may
be corrupt.
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset
• Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit.
220
Check that the local disconnect is in the ON position.
Check for a power quality issue, take appropriate corrective actions.
Check that 3-phase power is present.
Press the local reset or send the unit anetwork reset
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Diagnostics
Resetting Device to
Factory Defaults
Chapter 9
To factory reset the base and control module see parameter 47 “Set to Defaults”.
To reset only the VFD in the control module for Bulletin 284 see Parameter 141
“Reset To Defaults”. Both these resets are limited and do not put the product
completely in the “out of box” configuration. The Type 1 Reset performs a full
product reset to the “out of box” status.
SERVICE CODE 0X05
Class Code 0x0001
INSTANCE 1
Data (USINT) 1
You need to perform a Type 1 Reset if the login and password for the product is
lost and forgotten.
WARNING: A Type 1 Reset causes all parameters and web page login to revert to their
factory defaults. No user date is saved.
WARNING: A Type 1 Reset should only be executed when necessary or when the login
and password must be cleared and set to the factory default setting.
In the following example, Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 PLC
programming software is used to create a Type 1 Reset. Other tools can be used,
provided the class, instance, and attribute values can be sent to the product’s
identify object.
1. Within RSLogix 5000, from the File menu, choose New to create a new
project. Make sure that the project is offline.
2. If an Add-On-Profile (AOP) window is open, click Cancel to close it at the
bottom of the AOP screen.
3. Close any internet browser windows, including Internet Explorer, that are
being used to view the ArmorStart web browser.
IMPORTANT
For those using an Internet Browser with multiple tabs open, you need to close the
entire browser window, not just the tab within the ArmorStart browser.
4. Unplug any inputs and outputs that are connected to the ArmorStart unit.
WARNING: A Type 1 Reset cannot be done if there is an I/O device plugged into the
product port. This may cause an unsafe state to occur in the ArmorStart or the
environment around the ArmorStart.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
221
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
5. Create a new Controller Tag of data type DINT and enter a value of 1.
a. Double click Controller Tags in the Controller Organizer.
b. Select Edit Tags at the bottom of the tag list screen.
c. Create another new tag, the example that is used below is named
Data1.
d. To assign Data1 a value of 1, click Monitor Tags tab and enter a 1 in the
Value field.
e. Create a tag for reset input.
1. Double click Program Tags in the Controller Organizer
2. Select Edit Tags at the bottom of the screen and create a tag
named Reset of the type BOOL (Boolean).
6. Create a rung in ladder logic for executing the Type 1 Reset.
a. Add an XIC Input and assign it the BOOL tag Reset.
222
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Diagnostics
Chapter 9
b. Add a Message (MSG) instruction that will be used to execute the reset.
The message instruction can be found in the Input/Output instruction
set tab.
c. The completed rung should look like the one below.
7. Configure the message instruction:
a. Begin by double-clicking the tag name field and entering AS_Reset.
b. Right click AS_Reset and select New “AS_Reset”.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
223
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
c. Check the tag data type and options with the figure below and click
OK.
d. Click the box next to AS_Reset to open Configuration Dialog.
e. From the Message Type pull-down menu, choose CIP Generic.
f. From the Service Type pull-down menu, choose Custom.
224
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Diagnostics
Chapter 9
g. From the Source Element pull-down menu, choose Data1 tag that was
created earlier and press Enter.
h. Type 5 for the Service Code, 1 for the Class, and 1 for the Instance.
Leave the Attribute value at 0. Once you have added these values, the
Service Type should automatically change to Device Reset.
i. Click Communication at the top of the window. Click Browse, select
the ArmorStart that is in your project, and click OK. This selects the
ArmorStart as the device you are going to send the reset message to.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
225
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
j. You do not need to configure anything in Tag. Click Apply and then
OK.
8. Save your project. Download the project to the PLC and go Online.
9. Inhibit the ArmorStart using the AOP:
a. Once online, open the ArmorStart's AOP and click Connection. Select
Inhibit Module from the options.
b. Click Apply. The following screen should pop-up. Click Yes. Click OK
to close out the AOP.
226
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Diagnostics
Chapter 9
c. You should see the yellow inhibit symbol next to the ArmorStart in the
I/O Configuration tree showing that the module is inhibited.
10. Execute the instruction by toggling the Reset input that was created earlier.
a. To energize the bit, left mouse click the input and press CTRL+T. To
de-energize the bit, press CTRL+T again.
b. You should see the status LEDs on the ArmorStart display the Reset
and Power Cycle sequence. You should also see the Done (DN) bit of
the message turn green indicating that the reset was successful.
11. Check if the reset works by bringing the ArmorStart's web browser back up
and checking that the User Name is Administrator and that there is no set
password.
12. Uninhibit the ArmorStart module through the AOP and plug any I/O
connections back into the ArmorStart.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
227
Chapter 9
Diagnostics
Notes:
228
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
10
Troubleshooting
Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to help with troubleshooting the ArmorStart
Distributed Motor Controller by using the LED status display and diagnostic
parameters.
ATTENTION: Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous.
Electrical shock, burns, or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment
may cause death or serious injury. For safety of maintenance personnel and others who
might be exposed to electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities, follow
the local safety related work practices (for example, the NFPA70E, Part II in the United
States). Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and
requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments.
ATTENTION: Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits. The cause of the fault
indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation. Failure to
correct a control system of mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and /
or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation.
ATTENTION: The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to discharge
after removal of mains supply. Before working on the drive, verify the isolation of mains
supply from line inputs (R, S, T, [L1, L2, L3]). Wait three minutes for capacitors to
discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death.
Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe
voltage levels.
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and
associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and
subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: This drive contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) – sensitive parts and
assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or
repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are
not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, see Allen-Bradley
Publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding against Electrostatic Damage, or any other applicable
ESD protection handbook.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
229
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage
or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as undersizing of the
motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result
in malfunction of the system.
Bulletin 280E/281E
Troubleshooting
The following flowchart for Bulletin 280E, 281E units is provided to aid in quick
troubleshooting.
Figure 90 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Control Module LED Status
Yes
Faulted Display
No
Bulletin 284E
Troubleshooting
230
Fault
LED
Network
LED
Motor does
not Start
See
Table 30
See
Table 34
See
Table 40
Fault Definitions
Some of the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller faults are
detected by the internal hardware of the ArmorStart controller, while others are
detected by the internal drive. For internal drive faults, the internal hardware of
the ArmorStart controller simply polls the drive for the existence of faults and
reports the fault state. No fault latching is done by the internal hardware of the
ArmorStart controller for these faults. The PrFlt ResetMode parameter
(Parameter 23) determines the Auto Resettability of only the faults that are
detected on the main control board. The Auto Resettability of the faults that are
detected in the internal drive is controlled by internal drive parameters, see
Table 38. The following flowchart for Bulletin 284E units is provided to aid in
quick troubleshooting.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
Figure 91 - Bulletin 284E Control Module LED Status
Faulted Display
Yes
No
Define Nature of
the Problem
Fault
LED
Network
LED
Motor does
not start
See
Table 37
See
Table 34
See
Table 40
Actions
IP67 Dynamic
Brake Diagnostic (DB1)
The IP67 operation is different from most other DB resistors. The ArmorStart
controller includes specialized function that protects the DB from current faults.
This capability is found on an optional monitoring board that is located in the
control module of the 284 that is included when the DB1 option is selection.
A DB1 fault is not annunciated until the DB switch in the drive is activated and
conducting current.
The following conditions are monitored:
• DB Overcurrent resistor value too small (current is too high)
• DB Undercurrent resistor value is too high (current is too low)
• DB Open drive bus voltage is above DB level, but no resistor current was
measured
The following conditions cause a fault anytime the DB1 active:
• DB Shorted Switch - detected current when Drive bus voltage is below the
DB threshold
• DB Overtemp - DB resistor is too hot
• DB Bus Voltage Link Open - Bus voltage from the drive is not measured
for two seconds. Occurs if the internal connection between the main
control and the DB1 module has an issue
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
231
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
DB1 Faults
Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 - Dynamic Brake
Eight types of DB1 faults are detected and reported in Parameter 61 as either a
“DB1 Flt”, “DB1 Comm Fault” or DB1 Switch Short”. DB1 faults are also
reported in Attribute 158 “DB1 Fault” of the Control Supervisor Object (Class
Code: 29 Hex). See Appendix B for Control Supervisor information.
If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 11x's check parameter 61. If value is 41,
check the following:
• DB1 Comm Fault - Communication loss exists between the Dynamic
Brake board and the main control board.
This is also enunciated in the Trip Status parameter 4 bit 10 called Internal
Comm fault.
If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 16x's check parameter 61. If value is 42 (DB1
Fault), check the following:
• DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault
• DB1 Overcurrent Fault
• DB1 Undercurrent Fault
• DB1 Open Fault
• DB1 VBus Link Fault
This is also enunciated in the Trip Status parameter 4-bit 15 called Miscellaneous
Fault.
If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 16x's check parameter 61. If value is 43,
check the following:
• DB1 Switch Fault
The DB1 option provides the following warning:
• DB1 Thermal Warning - occurs once the resistor reaches 75% of maximum
thermocapacity. Once at 100% a DB1 over temperature occurs resulting in
a DB1 over temperature fault.
DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 0.
The DB1 measures current continuously, and models resistor body temperature
that is based on measured current and resistor model parameters. The DB1 not
only calculates the present resistor body temperature, but also predicts the future
resistor body temperature. The resistor overtemperature level is based on the
predicted future resistor body temperature, not on the present resistor body
temperature. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor Sel) is
“Disabled”.
Troubleshooting – DB1 Resistor body temperature is too hot. Allow the resistor
to cool.
232
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
DB1 Overcurrent Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 1.
The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Max Current Level. If
5 consecutive samples are above the Max Current Level, then a fault is recorded.
This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB1 resistance is lower than
expected. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor Sel) is
“Disabled”.
Troubleshooting – DB1 monitor has measured a DB1 current higher than
expected. Turn off all power to unit. Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to
discharge.
BURN HAZARD: DB1 resistor may still be hot.
Disconnect DB1 resistor from ArmorStart control module. Measure DB1
resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter. See the specification for
minimum DB1 resistor values. If DB1 resistance value is within limits, replace
control module. If not, replace DB1 resistor.
DB1 Undercurrent Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 2.
The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Min Current Level.
The Min Current Level = Min DB1 Voltage Level/Max DB1 Resistance. If 5
consecutive samples are below the Min Current Level and the DB1 is ON, then a
fault is recorded. This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB1 resistance is
higher than expected. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor
Sel) is “Disabled”.
Troubleshooting – DB1 monitor has measured a DB1 current lower than
expected. Turn off all power to unit. Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to
discharge.
BURN HAZARD: DB1 resistor may still be hot.
Disconnect DB1 resistor from ArmorStart control module. Measure DB1
resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter. See the specification for
minimum DB1 resistor values. If DB1 resistance value is within limits, replace
control module. If not, replace DB1 resistor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
233
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
DB1 Switch Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 3.
A DB1 Switch fault is issued when continuous DB1 resistor current is detected
when the Drive Bus Voltage level is less than the DB1 Voltage Level. If 5
consecutive samples of Drive Bus Voltage less than DB1 Level is detected along
with continuous DB1 resistor current flow, then a shorted DB1 IGBT fault
(DB1 Switch) is recorded.
It is the user’s responsibility to provide an input power contactor to each
ArmorStart with a drive. The user must write logic to control (open) the input
contactor to the ArmorStart in the event of a DB1 Switch Fault. The Instruction
Literature provides information on how to connect the input contactor, and how
to implement the logic.
Troubleshooting – Attempt to reset the fault by removing all power to the unit
and restarting. If the fault persists, replace control module.
DB1 Open Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 4.
A DB1 Open fault is issued when Bus Voltage is greater than the DB1 Voltage
Level, and no DB1 resistor current has been detected. If 5 consecutive samples of
Drive Bus Voltage greater than the DB1 Level is detected along with no DB1
resistor current flow, then an open DB1 fault is recorded. This fault is intended to
notify the customer of an open DB1 resistor, or open wire. The fault is disabled
when the DB1 Resistor Sel, Parameter (182) is “Disabled”.
Troubleshooting – DB1 monitor expected to see current flow and measured
none. Likely cause is an open DB1 resistor, loose DB1 resistor connector, or open
wire in DB1 cable. Check DB1 cable connector for tightness. If problem persists,
remove DB1 resistor cable connector from unit and check DB1 resistance. If
DB1 resistor is open, replace DB1 resistor. Otherwise replace control module.
DB1 VBus Link Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 6.
For proper operation, the DB1 monitors parameters from the Drive internally
inside the ArmorStart. If the internal communications to the drive is lost, then
this fault is issued. Since the DB1 can no longer provide resistor protection, the
user must implement logic to open the input contactor.
Troubleshooting – Verify that 3-phase line power and control power is applied
to unit. Attempt to reset fault. If fault persists, replace control module.
234
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
DB1 Comm Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 8.
The communications link is monitored continuously. If the DB1 stops
responding, then the MCB issues this fault. Since the DB1 can no longer provide
resistor protection, the user must implement logic to open the input contactor.
Troubleshooting – Replace control module.
DB1 Thermal Warning
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Status” Attribute Bit 1.
A DB1 Thermal Warning is issued if the predicted future resistor body
temperature is greater than the Max DB1 resistor temperature x DB1 Thermal
Warning Percent.
Troubleshooting – None. DB1 resistor thermal value has exceeded the preset
threshold of 90% of thermal value.
Reading the Control Supervisor Object
If a DB1 fault occurs the Control Supervisor Object provides the detailed
information specific to the fault. Create an Explicit Message Instruction such as
Class = 0029hex, Instance = 0001hex, Attribute = 158. A bit enumerated
WORD of information is returned. See the CIP section for details.
Hardware Fault Fan RPM Warning
FAN Fault Handling with Firmware 66.21 of 284
The Fan Fault handler was modified in firmware 66.21 of the 284.
Operation
If the RPM of the internal fan drops below the minimum threshold a Warning bit
in Stater Status, Parameter 5 will be set and the Warning Status, Parameter 62 Bit
13 hardware warning will be set. A 24 hour count down timer begins. If the
warning flag is set continuously for the 24 hr period and time expires a F14 (LED
Flashes 14 times) Hardware fault occurs. Also Last Pr Fault, Parameter 61 shows
Fan RPM fault. If within the 24 hr period the fan rpm climbs above the minimum
threshold the warning flags will be removed and timer reset and turned off.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
235
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Starter Status, Warning Bit 5:
When set to "1" indicates a Warning if a Fan RPM issue occurs. The warning bit
can also be triggered by other warning type faults that are found in parameter 62.
Warning Status, Parameter 62:
Bit 13 turns to a "1" indicating a Hardware warning. Hardware warning is an OR
of two warnings.
Annunciation using PLC Logic
To determine when only a Fan RPM warning occurs, logic must be written that
triggers a CIP message. The DPI Alarm Object Class Code 0x0098 provides a
structure of data that includes the fault code of Fan RPM (31). Create a program
that monitors the Starter Status Warning bit and Warning Status Hardware bit.
When they are both set to "1" the PLC code should generate a Get Single explicit
message of Class 0x0098, Instance 1, and Attribute 1.
236
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
This message returns a structure of the following data:
— —Alarm Code UINT <----------— —Alarm Source Struct of:
— — — DPI Port Number USINT
— — — Device Object Instance USINT
— —Alarm Time Stamp Struct of:
— — — Timer Value ULINT
— — — Timer Descriptor WORD
When Alarm Code UINT = 31 (decimal) this is a FAN RPM warning. For a full
list of fault code references see parameter 61.
When the fault occurs the following Trip bits are activated:
• Parameter 4, Trip Status, bit 13 turns to a "1" indicating a hardware trip has
occurred
• Parameter 5, Starter Status, bit 0 turns to a "1" indicating a TripPresent
• Parameter 61 displays "Fan RPM" Fault 31 as the last protection fault.
Internal Drive Faults
A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types.
Table 38 - Internal Drive Faults
Type
Name
Description
1
Auto-Reset/Run
When this type of fault occurs, Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) and related
Parameter(s): 155 (Relay Out Sel), 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) are set to a value greater than
0, a user-configurable timer, Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) and related Parameter:
192 (Auto Rstrt Tries), begins. When the timer reaches zero, the drive attempts to
automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present,
the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted
2
Non-Resettable
This type of fault may require drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programing
errors. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.
Automatically Clearing Faults (Option/Step)
Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive:
1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to a value other than 0.
Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without
Restarting the Drive:
1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to 0.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
237
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Auto Restart (Reset/Run)
The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically
perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application
intervention. This allows remote or unattended operation. Only certain faults are
allowed to be reset. Certain faults (Type 2) that indicate possible drive
component malfunction cannot be reset. Caution should be used when enabling
this feature, since the drive will attempt to issue its own start command that is
based on user selected programming.
The following table describes Bulletin 284E Faults as seen in Parameters 107,
108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2, or 3).
Table 39 - Bulletin 284E Faults – Parameters 107, 108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2 or 3)
No.
Fault
Type ➊
F2
Auxiliary Input
1
Auxiliary input interlock is open.
1. Check remote wiring.
2. Check communications.
F3
Power Loss
2
DC bus voltage remained below 85% of
nominal.
1. Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.
2. Check input fuses.
F4
UnderVoltage
1
DC bus voltage fell below the minimum
value.
1. Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.
F5
OverVoltage
1
DC bus voltage exceeded maximum
value.
1. Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage can
also be caused by motor regeneration. Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake
option.
F6
Motor Stalled
1
Drive is unable to accelerate motor.
1. Increase Parameters 139 or 167 (Accel Time x) or reduce load so drive output current
does not exceed the current set by Parameter 189 (Current Limit 1).
F7
Motor Overload
1
Internal electronic overload trip
1. An excessive motor load exists. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the
current set by Parameter 133 (Motor OL Current).
2. Verify Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting
F8
Heatsink OvrTmp
1
Heatsink temperature exceeds a
predefined value.
1. Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not
exceeded 40°C.
2. Replace internal fan.
F12
HW OverCurrent
2
The drive output current has exceeded
the hardware current limit.
1. Check programming. Check for excess load, improper programming of Parameter 184
(Boost Select), DC brake volts set too high, or other causes of excess current.
F13
Ground Fault
2
A current path to earth ground has been
detected at one or more of the drive
output terminals.
1. Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded
condition.
F33
Auto Rstrt Tries
Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a
fault and resume running for the
programmed number of Parameter 192
(Auto Rstrt Tries).
1. Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.
F38
F39
F40
Phase U to Gnd
Phase V to Gnd
Phase W to Gnd
2
A phase to ground fault has been
detected between the drive and motor in
this phase.
1. Check the wiring between the drive and motor.
2. Check motor for grounded phase.
3. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
F41
F42
F43
Phase UV Short
Phase UW Short
Phase VW Short
2
Excessive current has been detected
between these two output terminals.
1. Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition.
2. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
F48
Params Defaulted
2
The drive was commanded to write
default values to EEPROM.
1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
2. Program the drive parameters as needed.
F63
SW OverCurrent
2
Programmed Parameter 198 (SW Current
Trip) has been exceeded.
1. Check load requirements and Parameter 198 (SW Current Trip) setting.
238
Description
Action
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
Table 39 - Bulletin 284E Faults – Parameters 107, 108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2 or 3)
No.
Fault
Type ➊
Description
F64
Drive Overload
2
Drive rating of 150% for 1 min or 200%
for 3 s has been exceeded.
1. Reduce load or extend Accel Time.
F70
Power Unit
2
Failure has been detected in the drive
power section.
1. Cycle power.
2. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
F80
SVC Autotune
The autotune function was either
cancelled by the user or failed.
1. Restart procedure.
F81
Comm Loss
2
RS485 (DSI) port stopped
communicating.
1. Turn off using Parameter 205 (Comm Loss Action).
2. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
F100
Parameter
Checksum
2
The checksum read from the board does
not match the checksum calculated.
1. Set Parameter 141 (Reset To Defaults) to Option 1 (Reset Defaults).
F122
I/O Board Fail
2
Failure has been detected in the drive
control and I/O section.
1. Cycle power.
2. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
Action
➊ See Table 38 for Type description.
Table 40 - Motor Does Not Start
Cause(s)
Indication
Corrective Action
No output voltage to the motor.
None
Check the power circuit.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check all fuses and disconnects
Check the motor.
• Check that the motor is connected properly.
• Check that I/O Terminal 01 is active.
• Check that Parameter 136 (Start Source) matches your configuration.
• Check that Parameter 195 (Reverse Disable) is not prohibiting movement.
• Run Autotune parameter 227
Drive is Faulted
Flashing red status light
Clear fault.
• Press Stop
• Cycle power
• Set Parameter 200 (Fault Clear) to Option 1 (Clear Faults).
• Cycle digital input is Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel) is set to Option 7, (Clear
Faults).
Table 41 - Drive Does Not Respond to Changes in Speed Command
Cause(s)
Indication
Corrective Action
No value is coming form the
source of the command.
The drive Run indicator is lit
and output is 0 Hz.
• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for correct source.
• If the source is an analog input, check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of
signal.
• Check Parameter 102 (Commanded Freq) to verify correct command.
Incorrect reference source is
being selected via remote device
or digital inputs.
None
• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for correct source.
• Check Parameter 114 (Dig In Status) to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source. Verify
settings for Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel).
• Check Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) for the source of the speed reference. Reprogram
as necessary.
Some applications create an
intermittent voltage
regeneration condition and the
bus regulator tries to
compensate.
None
• Disable parameter 217 Bus Regulation. The drive will react faster to changes in speed.
• This could also cause DC bus voltage faults if an external resistor is not attached.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
239
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Table 42 - Motor and/or Drive Does Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed
Cause(s)
Indication
Corrective Action
Acceleration time is excessive.
None
• Reprogram Parameter 139 (Accel Time 1) or Parameter 167 (Accel Time 2).
• Try changing parameter 184 Boost selection to a value of 5 to 14, starting with 5.
Excess load or short acceleration
times force the drive into current
limit, slowing, or stopping
acceleration.
None
• Compare Parameter 103 (Output Current) with Parameter 189 (Current Limit1).
• Remove excess load or reprogram Parameter 139 (Accel Time 1) or Parameter 167 (Accel
Time 2).
• Check for improper setting of Parameter 184 (Boost Select).
Speed command source or value
is not as expected.
None
• Verify Parameter 102 (Commanded Freq).
• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for the proper Speed Command.
Programming is preventing the
drive output from exceeding
limiting values.
None
Check Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) to insure that speed is not limited by programming.
Torque performance does not
match motor characteristics.
None
• Set motor nameplate full load amps in Parameter 226 (Motor NP FLA).
• Use Parameter 227 (Autotune) to perform Static Tune or Rotate Tune procedure.
• Set Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) to Option 0 (V/Hz).
Table 43 - Motor Operation is Unstable
Cause(s)
Motor data was incorrectly
entered.
Indication
None
Corrective Action
1. Correctly enter motor nameplate data into Parameters 131, 132, and 133.
2. Enable Parameter 197 (Compensation).
3. Use Parameter 184 (Boost Select) to reduce boost level.
Table 44 - Drive Does Not Reverse Motor Direction
Cause(s)
Indication
Corrective Action
Digital input is not selected for
reversing control.
None
Check Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel). Choose correct input and program for reversing
mode.
Motor wiring is improperly
phased for reverse.
None
Switch two motor leads.
Reverse is disabled.
None
Check Parameter 195 (Reverse Disable).
Table 45 - Drive Does Not Power Up
Cause(s)
240
Indication
Corrective Action
No input power to drive.
None
Check the power circuit.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check all fuses and disconnects.
Jumper between I/O Terminals P2
and P1 not installed and/or DC
Bus Inductor not connected.
None
Install jumper or connect DC Bus Inductor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
Ethernet Statistics
The EtherNet/IP communication module may experience intermittent network
connectivity due to these conditions:
• Duplex mismatch
• Electrical noise that is induced into a cable or resulting from a Logix/
switch ground potential difference
• Bad hardware, such as a cable or switch part
Troubleshoot and General
Solutions for Linear or DLR
Networks
Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network, it is
recommended to first take the following actions when a fault appears.
• For a DLR network check that:
– At least one node is configured as a supervisor on the network and that
Network Topology = Ring.
– All cables on the network are securely connected to each device.
– All devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly.
– The Network Status field on the active supervisor node’s status page to
determine the fault type.
• For a linear network check that:
– None of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and
that Network Topology = Linear.
If any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor, it may
impact communication to other devices connected to the network.
– All cables on the network are securely connected to each device.
– All devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly.
If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above, use the tables
in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a
linear network.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
241
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Specific Issues on Your DLR or Linear Network
Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on your DLR or
linear network that are not solved by the actions that are described above.
Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network
Issue
Description
A link on the DLR network may be broken:
• Intentionally, for example, because you are adding or deleting nodes but have not made all physical
connections to restore the set up of the network with/without the node.
• Unintentionally, for example, because a cable is broken or a device malfunctions.
When this fault occurs, the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring
Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring Fault.
The screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active
nodes. The faulted node is between nodes 10.88.80.115 and 10.88.80.208. If the IP address of either
node is not available, the software will display the node’s MAC ID.
Figure 92 - Ring Fault Section
Supervisor Reports Once the fault is corrected, the ring is automatically restored, and the Network Status field returns to
a Ring Fault
Normal.
242
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Solution
Determine where the fault condition exists and
correct it.
It may be necessary to click the Refresh
Communication link to update the Ring Fault
information to determine where the fault
condition exists.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network
Issue
Description
Solution
When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs, the following events occur:
• The active supervisor blocks traffic on port 2, resulting in possible network segmentation, that is,
some nodes may become unreachable.
• The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is off.
• As soon as the fault occurs, for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx communication
software, the Status field = Rapid Fault/Restore Cycles.
Multiple possible solutions exist.
• For the disconnections and reconnections
issue, no solution is required.
Clear the fault when you have reconnected the
device to the network permanently.
• For the duplex mismatch issue, reconfigure the
duplex parameters to verify that they match
between the devices.
• For the electromagnetic noise issue, determine
where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a
protective shield in that location.
• For the unstable connections issue, determine
where they exist on the network and correct
them.
• Check the media counters for all devices on the
network. The device with the highest media
counter count is most likely causing the Rapid
Ring Fault.
• Remove devices from the network one by one.
When you see the Rapid Ring Fault disappear
after a device is removed, that device is
causing the fault.
• Finally, your Beacon Interval or Timeout
configuration may not be appropriate for your
network.
However, if you think it is necessary to change
these values, we recommend that you call
Rockwell Automation technical support.
Once the fault is fixed, click Clear Fault.
Figure 93 - Rapid Fault/Restore Cycles Status
Rapid Ring Fault
Partial Fault
Condition
Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Fault:
• Five intentional disconnections/reconnections of a node from the network within 30 s
• A duplex mismatch between two connected devices
• Electromagnetic noise on the network
• Unstable physical connections, such as intermittent connectors
Given the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault, the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a
Rapid Ring Fault condition is present
A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring
member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for some reason, such as because of a component
failure.
The active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port
and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab.
When a partial fault is detected, the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port. At this point, the
ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition. The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the
network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC ID’s for each node
displayed.
When this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault Condition.
Once the fault is corrected, it automatically clears, and the Network Status field returns to Normal.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Determine where the fault condition exists and
correct it.
243
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network
Issue
Description
Solution
The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions. The screen below
indicates where to check for errors that are encountered. Error levels are displayed depending on what
caused the error. For example, an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field.
Some example solutions include:
• Check for a mismatch of speed and/or duplex
between two linked nodes.
• Check that all cables on the network are
securely connected to each device.
• Check for electromagnetic noise on the
network. If you find it, eliminate it or use a
protective shield in that location.
Figure 94 - Media Counter Screen
Media Counter
Errors or Collisions
On a DLR network, it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors. For example, if the
network breaks, a low level of media counter errors appear. With a low level of media counter errors, the
value typically does not continuously increase and often clears.
A high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear. For example,
there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes, a high level of media counter errors appears,
steadily increasing and not clearing.
To access the RSLinx screen above, browse the network, right-click the device, select Module Properties
and click Port Diagnostics.
Table 47 - Media Counter Errors
Media Counter
Definition
Alignment Errors
A frame containing bits that do not total an integral multiple of eight.
Alignment errors often result from:
• Starting or stopping of a module.
• MAC-layer packet formation problems.
• Cabling problems that corrupt or eliminate data.
• Packets passing through more than two cascaded multi-port transceivers.
FCS Errors
A frame containing 8 bits, at least one of which has been corrupted.
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) errors often result from:
• Starting or stopping of a module.
• Cabling problems that corrupt or eliminate data.
Important: Even though the acceptable Ethernet bit-error rate is 1 in 108, the typical rate is 1 in 1012 or better.
Single Collisions
The number of outgoing packets that encountered only one collision during transmission.
Multiple Collisions
The number of outgoing packets that encountered 2...15 collisions during transmission.
SQE Test Errors
A test to detect the collision-present circuit between a transceiver and a network interface card (NIC).
Important: Because most NICs now have an integrated transceiver, the SQE test is unnecessary. Ignore this media counter.
Deferred Transmissions
The number of outgoing packets whose transmission is deferred because the network is busy when the first attempt is made to send them.
Important: The module only defers the first attempt to transmit a packet. After the first attempt, the module transmits the packet without checking.
However, if the network is still busy, a collision will be recorded.
244
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Media Counter
Chapter 10
Definition
Late Collisions
The number of times two devices transmit data simultaneously.
Neither device detects a collision because the time it takes to send the signal from one end of the network to the other exceeds the time that is needed
to put the entire packet on the network. Consequently, neither device senses the other’s transmission until the entire packet is out on the network.
Late collisions often result from these conditions:
• Excessive network segment length
• Repeaters between devices
Important: Large and small packets can be affected by late collisions. However, the transmitter cannot detect late collisions between small packets.
Consequently, a network that experiences measurable late collisions between large packets also loses small packets.
Excessive Collisions
The number of frames that experience 16 consecutive collisions.
MAC Transmit Errors
The number of frames for which transmission via a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub-layer transmission error.
Important: MAC transmit errors are only counted if either late collisions, excessive collisions, or carrier sense errors are not counted.
MAC Receive Errors
The number of frames for which reception via a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub-layer transmission error.
Important: MAC receive errors are only counted if the frame too long count, alignment errors, or FCS errors are not counted.
Carrier Sense Errors
Carrier sense errors fall into these categories:
• No Carrier Sense Present - The number of times the carrier is not present when a transmission starts.
• Carrier Sense Lost - The number of times the carrier is lost during a transmission.
Carrier sense errors usually indicate a problem with a cable on the Ethernet infrastructure.
Frame Too Long
The number of incoming packets that exceed the maximum Ethernet packet size.
Troubleshoot Intermittent
Ethernet Connectivity
To troubleshoot intermittent ethernet connectivity, follow these steps.
1. From the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP and/or the ControlLogix EtherNet/IP
bridge, click Ethernet Statistics.
Figure 95 - Ethernet Statistics
2. Review the values in the Media Counters table.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
245
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
If
Then
Any media counters are greater than zero
You need to investigate further.
These errors are counted:
• Alignment
• FCS
• Carrier Sense
A duplex mismatch exists between your EtherNet/IP communication module and the switch port.
To clear the duplex mismatch:
1. Configure the EtherNet/IP communication module and the corresponding Ethernet switch port for a forced operation, not autonegotiation.
2. Verify that the firmware revision of your Logix controller and switch, or converter are identical.
3. If the revisions are not identical, replace the controller, switch, or converter so that they match.
Single Collisions or Multiple Collisions are
greater than zero
No action is required.
Important: If two stations attempt to transmit data simultaneously, the packets collide with each other. However, collisions are not
errors and do not indicate a network problem. The number of network collisions can vary greatly due to traffic patterns or CPU
utilization. Consequently, there is no set range of acceptable collisions for each outgoing packet. Collisions are a normal aspect of
Ethernet networking.
Late Collisions are greater than zero
1. Check to see if a network segment is too long.
2. Remove repeaters from between devices.
Excessive Collisions are greater than zero
Calculate your network’s typical rate of excessive collisions and decide whether the rate of packet loss will affect your network’s
performance.
Important: Excessive collisions indicate that your network has become congested. For each collision after the sixteenth, your
network drops a packet.
MAC Transit Errors are greater than zero
No action is required.
Frame Too Long is greater than zero
Limit the size of your tags to ≤ 500 bytes.
246
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
Ethernet Statistics
The Ethernet Statistics web page presents the current configuration of an
EtherNet/IP communication module and any errors that have occurred on the
module.
1. Review the values in the Ethernet Port 1 table.
If
Link Status is
Speed is
And you
Active
Do not want to change the status
No action is required
Inactive
Want to establish communication on the network
Reconfigure the module, or port, that is inactive.
100 or 1000 Mbps
Do not want to change your port speed
No action is required.
Important: 100 Mbps is the default port speed.
Want to reduce your port speed to 10 Mbps
You must manually configure your module and reset your module.
Want to increase your port speed to 100 Mbps
Reset your module
Do not want to change your port speed
No action is required.
Full
Are sending large amounts of data
No action is required.
Important: Full Duplex is the default port setting.
Full-duplex ports eliminate collisions because each device has separate
channels for the transmission and receipt of large amounts of data.
Half
Are not sending large amounts of data
No action is required.
Important: Delays due to collisions or switch traffic are usually negligible,
but can become a problem if you need to send much data.
Are sending large amounts of data
Change your module’s Duplex setting to Full.
Are using a fiber converter
Change your module’s Autonegotiate status to None.
Important: Fiber links do not support autonegotiation.
Are not using a fiber converter
No action is required.
Important: Speed and/or Duplex is the default setting.
Autonegotation enables devices to select the best way to communicate
without you having to do any configuring. All devices with an Ethernet
speed rating of 100 Mbps are required to support autonegotiation.
Are not using a fiber converter
Change your module’s Autonegotiate status to Speed and/or Duplex.
10 Mbps
Duplex is
Autonegotiate Status➊
is
Then
Speed and/or
Duplex
None
➊ When you use an EtherNet/IP communication module with multiple ports, make sure that you use the same Autonegotiate Status
configuration for both ports.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
247
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
2. Review the values in the Media Counters Port 1 table.
If
Then
Any media counters are greater than zero
You need to investigate further.
These errors are counted:
• Alignment
• FCS
• Carrier Sense
A duplex mismatch exists between your EtherNet/IP communication module and the switch port.
To clear the duplex mismatch:
1. Configure the EtherNet/IP communication module and the corresponding Ethernet switch port for a forced operation, not
autonegotiation.
2. Verify that the firmware revision of your Logix controller and switch, or converter are identical.
3. If the revisions are not identical, replace the controller, switch, or converter so that they match.
Single Collisions or Multiple Collisions are greater
than zero
No action is required.
Important: If two stations attempt to transmit data simultaneously, the packets collide with each other. However, collisions are
not errors and do not indicate a network problem. The number of network collisions can vary greatly due to traffic patterns or
CPU utilization. Consequently, there is no set range of acceptable collisions for each outgoing packet. Collisions are a normal
aspect of Ethernet networking.
Late Collisions are greater than zero
1. Check to see if a network segment is too long.
2. Remove repeaters from between devices.
Excessive Collisions are greater than zero
Calculate your network’s typical rate of excessive collisions and decide whether the rate of packet loss will affect your network’s
performance.
Important: Excessive collisions indicate that your network has become congested. For each collision after the sixteenth, your
network drops a packet.
MAC Transit Errors are greater than zero
No action is required.
Frame Too Long is greater than zero
Limit the size of your tags to ≤ 500 bytes.
248
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Ethernet Managed Switch
Considerations
Chapter 10
To help troubleshoot the EtherNet/IP network, a managed switch must be used.
These are important features in a managed switch:
• Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) snooping
• Support for Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN)
• Port mirroring
IMPORTANT
Use a switch equipped with wire-speed switching fabric. The switch fabric is a measure
of the maximum traffic that a switch can handle without dropping a packet and
without storing a packet in memory. Wire-speed switching fabric refers to a switch
that can handle the maximum data rate of the network on each of its ports.
Switches are typically rated in Gbps. For a 10-port switch connected to EtherNet/IP
products, the maximum data rate that is needed, is typically 100...200 MB/s. Therefore,
a 10-port-switch rated at least 1 GB/s should be adequate for an EtherNet/IP
application.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol
EtherNet/IP implicit (I/O) messaging mostly uses IP multicasting to distribute
I/O control data, that is consistent with the CIP produced/consumer model.
Most switches retransmit multicast packets and broadcast packets to all ports.
IGMP snooping constrains the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically
configuring switch ports so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports
associated with a particular IP multicast group. This also helps minimize the
CPU utilization rate.
Switches that support IGMP snooping learn which ports have devices that are
part of a particular multicast group and only forward the multicast packets to the
ports that are part of the multicast group.
IMPORTANT
Not all switches support the IGMP snooping querier function, that is, snooping. Those
that do not support IGMP snooping querier require a router. For switches that do
support IGMP snooping, you can configure them to conduct the polling.
IGMP snooping cannot control unicast or broadcast traffic. To learn how to
control unicast or broadcast traffic, see Virtual Local Area Networks on
page 250.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
249
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
This example assumes that the switch does not support IGMP snooping querier
function, so a router is required.
Figure 96 - IGMP Snooping Example
Virtual Local Area Networks
With a managed switch, virtual local area networks (VLAN) can be established
to segregate various kinds of network traffic and also increase security between
the networks. Multiple isolated networks could be created so that the traffic from
one network does not burden the other network.
As with IGMP snooping, VLAN can control multicast traffic. However, unlike
IGMP snooping, VLAN can also control and block this traffic:
• Unicast traffic
• Broadcast traffic
Figure 97 - Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN)
250
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
Port Mirroring
Select a managed switch that supports port mirroring. With port mirroring,
frames being transmitted on one port to another port, can be directed for analysis
by a traffic analyzer. Besides monitoring the ethernet media counters, port
mirroring allows anomalies in traffic flow to be spotted immediately. A traffic
analyzer can monitor the traffic on a given port and troubleshoot a problem.
Without port mirroring, frames on other ports cannot be seen. The effective
support and maintenance of ethernet networks often depends on reliable traffic
analysis.
These are some benefits of port mirroring:
• Monitoring explicit messages between controllers
• Monitoring implicit or I/O traffic
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
251
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Control Module Removal and Removal of Control Module
Installation
ATTENTION: To avoid shock hazard, disconnect main power before working on the
controller, motor, or control devices.
1. Disconnect power by going to the control module and turning OFF the
At-Motor disconnect and performing lockout-tagout per your company
policy.
2. Remove motor cable.
3. Loosen the four mounting screws.
4. Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward.
Installation of Control Module
5. Install control module.
6. Tighten four mounting screws.
7. Install motor cable.
Figure 98 - Control Module Replacement
1
4
Motor Cable
2
3
5
7
3.39 N•m (30 lb•in.)
Note: DeviceNet™ base module is shown.
252
6
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Troubleshooting
Fuse Replacement
Chapter 10
.
ATTENTION: To avoid shock hazard, disconnect main power before working on
the controller, motor, or control devices.
Table 48 - Control Voltage and Output Fuse Replacement
Specification
Output Fuse
Control Power Fuse
Cat. No.
25176-155-03
25172-260-17
Description
Fast-acting, high interrupting capacity tubular
fuse
UL Listed Class CC,CSA HRC-1,Interupting,
Rejection Feature
Current
2.5 A
7A
Interrupting
Capacity
1500 A
200 ka
Voltage Rating
250V
600V (Maximum)
Littlefuse PN 021602.5
Cooper Bussman PN KTK-R-7 or
Littlefuse PN KLKR007.T
20 (0.8) x 5 (0.2)
38.1 (1.5) x 10.2 (0.4)
Manufacturer
Dimension mm
(in.):
Figure 99 - Control Voltage and Output Fuse Replacement
Output Fuse
Cat. No. 25176-155-03
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Control Voltage Fuse
Cat. No. 25172-260-17
253
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Table 49 - Source Brake Fuse Replacement (Bulletin 284E only)
Specification
Source Control Brake Fuse
Cat. No.
W25172-260-12
Description
3.0A UL Listed Class CC,CSA HRC-1, Rejection Feature
Current
3.0A
Interrupting Capacity
200ka
Voltage Rating
600V (Maximum)
Manufacturer
Cooper Bussman PN KTK-R-3 or
Littlefuse PN KLKR003.T
Dimension mm (in.):
38.1 (1.5) x 10.2 (0.4)
Figure 100 - Source Brake Fuse Replacement (Bulletin 284E only)
Source Control Brake Fuses
Cat. No. W25172-260-12
Resetting Source Brake Fuse Faults
Replace the fuse and cycled unswitched power to reset the fault.
254
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
11
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with
EtherNet/IP
Bulletin 280E, 281E
Power Circuit
Electrical Ratings
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Operating Frequency
Utilization Category
Protection Against Shock
UL/NEMA
200…575V
600V
6 kV
2200V AC
50/60 Hz
N/A
N/A
Rated Operating Current Max.
Control Circuit
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Overvoltage Category
Operating Frequency
Gland
Type
Any CR
or DR
Short Circuit
Protection
Short Circuit Protection Device (SCPD)
Performance Type 1
Any RR
SCPD List
IEC
200…575V
600V
6 kV
2500V AC
50/60 Hz
AC-3
IP2X
1.2 A
280E_-____-10A-* ➊
2.5 A
280E_-____-10B-* ➊
➊
5.5 A
280E_-____-10C-*
280E_-____-25D-* ➊
16 A
24V DC (+10%, –15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)
250V
250V
—
4kV
1500V AC
2000V AC
—
III
50/60 Hz
—
Current
Short Circuit
Rating
Protection
480Y/277V
0.24…1.2 A
Sym. Amps rms
65 kA
100 A
0.5…2.5 A
10A, 10B, 10C Max. Circuit Breaker ➎
1.1…5.5 A
Max. Fuse
100 A
Sym. Amps rms
30 kA
100 A
3.2…16 A
25D
Max. Circuit Breaker ➎
Max. Fuse
100 A
0.24…1.2 A
Sym. Amps rms
45 kA
65 kA
0.5…2.5 A
Max. Circuit Breaker ➏
30 A ➌
N/A
10A, 10B, 10C Max. Fuse
40 A
40 A
1.1…5.5 A
- Non-time Delay ➋
- Time Delay ➋
20 A
20 A
Sym. Amps rms
N/A
30 kA
3.2…16 A
25D
Max. Circuit Breaker ➏
N/A
100 A ➍
Max. Fuse ➋
N/A
100 A
Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
480V
65 kA
60 A
60 A
30 kA
60 A
60 A
65 kA
N/A
40 A
20 A
30 kA
60 A ➍
60 A
➊ See Contactor Life Load Curves on page 260
➋ Type J, CC, and T fuses only.
➌ Only when used with Bulletin 140U-H frame.
➍ Only when used with Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-xxx frame or smaller.
➎ Bulletin 140U-H or 140G-H circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V, 100 A and a maximum interrupt of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
➏ When protected by Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-xxx circuit breaker, not rated more than 480/277V, 30 A, having an interrupt rating not less than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
255
Chapter 11
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
UL/NEMA
Environmental
Operating Temperature Range
Storage and Transportation
Temperature Range
Altitude ➊
Humidity
Pollution Degree
Enclosure Ratings
Approximate Shipping Weight
IEC
–20…40 °C (–4…104 °F)
–25….85 °C (–13…185 °F)
2000 m
5…95% (on-condensing)
3
NEMA 4/12
IP67
10.4 kg (23 lbs)
Resistance to Shock
Operational
Non-Operational
Operational
Non-Operational
Wire Size
Mechanical
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
Wire Size
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
Disconnect Lock Out
Contactor Mechanical Life
CatNo 100280/1_-_12*
280/1_-_23*
Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions
Radiated Emissions
Electrostatic Discharge
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Other Rating
Fast Transient
Surge Transient
Overload Current Range
Trip Classes ➋
Trip Rating
Number of poles
15 G
30 G
Resistance to Vibration
1 G, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) Displacement
2.5 G, 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Displacement
Power and Ground Terminals
Primary/Secondary Terminal: #16…#10 AWG Primary/Secondary Terminal: 1.0…4.0 mm2
Primary Terminal: 10.8 lb·in.
Primary Terminal: 1.2 N·m
Secondary Terminal: 4.5 lb·in.
Secondary Terminal: 0.5 N·m
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Control Terminals
#18…#10 AWG
1.0…4.0 mm2
6.2 lb·in.
0.7 N·m
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Recommend 8 mm (5/16 in.) lock shackle or hasp.
The hasp should not exceed 8 mm (5/16 in.) when closed.
Ops
C12 (AC3)
C23 (AC3)
Mil
13
—
Mil
—
13
EMC Emission Levels
10V rms Communications Cables
10V rms (PE)
150 kHz…80 MHz
Class A, Group 1, Equivalent to C2 emissions
EMC Immunity Levels
4 kV contact and 8 kV Air
10V/m, 80 MHz…1 GHz
3V/m, 1.4 GHz…2 GHz
1V/m, 2.0 GHz …2.7 GHz
2 kV (Power)
2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communications and Control)
1 kV (12) L-L, 2 kV (2) L-N (Earth)
280_-____-10A-*
0.24…1.2 A
280_-____-10B-*
0.5…2.5 A
280_-____-10C-*
1.1…5.5 A
280_-____-25D-*
3.2…16 A
10, 15, 20
120% of Full Load current (FLC) Setting
3
➊ Refer to Altitude Derating on page 269 for derating guide
➋ Refer to Motor Overload Trip Curves on page 259
256
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
UL/NEMA
Chapter 11
IEC
UL 508
CSA C22.2, No. 14
EN/IEC 60947-4
EN/IEC 60947-4-1
CE Marked per Low Voltage 2006/95/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
CCC
ODVA for EtherNet/IP
cULus (File No. E3125, Guides NLDX, NLDX7)
Standards Compliance
Certifications
EtherNet/IP Version – Control and I/O Power Requirements
A1/A2 ➊
Units
A3/A2 ➋
A1/A2 ➊
W/O HOA
A3/A2 ➋
A3/A2 ➌
W/ HOA
Control Voltage
Volts
24V DC
Module Inrush ➍
Amps
0.92
0.30
1.09
0.125
0.295
Module Steady
Amps
0.06
0.30
0.23
0.125
0.295
Total Control Power (Pick Up)
Watts
22.08
7.20
26.16
3.00
7.08
Total Control Power (Running)
Watts
1.44
7.20
5.52
3.00
7.08
➊
➋
➌
➍
Add power requirements for outputs (1 A max.) to A1/A2.
Add power requirements for inputs (200 mA max.) to A3/A2.
If A1 power is disconnected.
Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms, which can exceed 20 A. The power supply must be capable of supporting
this amount of instant power demand when multiple units are turned ON simultaneously. If supplies are weaker, it is recommended
to apply unswitched power (A3-A2) first and after a 2…4 second delay, apply switched power.
UL/NEMA
IEC
24V DC
10…26V DC
3.0 mA @ 10V DC
Input On-State Current
7.2 mA @ 24V DC
Input Off-State Voltage Range
0…5V DC
Input Off-State Current
<1.5 mA
200 Hz
Maximum Input Frequency Response
(DeviceLogix response is greater than 200 Hz. Network response depends on
control system network performance.)
Input Filter – Software Selectable
Off to On
Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
On to Off
Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
Input Compatibility
N/A
IEC 1133 Type 1+
Number of Inputs
4
Sensor Source
Voltage Status Only
11…26.4V DC from unswitched power (A3-A2)
Current Available
50 mA max. per input, 200 mA for any single point
Rated Operation Voltage
Input On-State Voltage Range
Input Ratings – Sourced from
Control Circuit
(A3/A2)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
257
Chapter 11
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
UL/NEMA
Output Ratings – Sourced
from Control Circuit (A1/A2)
(Do not use as a power supply
source to other devices)
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Ethernet Port
Web Server
Device Connections
258
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Operating Frequency
Type of Current
Conventional Thermal Current Ith
Peak Output Current
Type of Contacts
Number of Contacts
Load Types
Surge Suppression
Thermo-Protection
Maximum Cycle Rate
Maximum Blocking Voltage
Maximum On-State Voltage @ Maximum Output
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current
IEC
26.4V DC
250V
1500V AC (UL)
2000V AC (IEC)
Solid state sourcing output
24V DC
0.5 A each, 1 A max. combined
Current limited 2-8 amps (5 amps nominal) @ 24V DC
Normally open (N.O.)
2
Resistive or light inductive
Integrated diode, clamps @ 35V DC
Integrated short circuit and over current protection
30 operations/minute capacitive and inductive loads
35V DC
1.5V DC
10 μA
Beacon-based performance including IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock
Fault Recovery
Ring recovery time is less than 3 ms for a 50 node network
Ethernet Receptacles
2 D-coded, 4-pin female M12 connectors
Ports
Embedded switch with 2 ports
IP Address
DHCP enabled by default
DHCP Timeout
30 s
Communication Rate
10/100 Mbs with auto negotiate half duplex and full duplex
• Transported over both TCP and UDP
Data
• Min. of 500 I/O packets/second (pps)
• Supports up to 150 concurrent TCP sockets
Embedded web server
Security
Login and password configurable
E-mail
Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Configuration
Status, diagnostics, and configuration tabs
Supports scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 & UCMM) connections
6 - Class 3 connections are supported simultaneously
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or listen-only]. One connection per PLC.
Listen-only connection requires a data connection to be established.
Class 1 Connection API: 2…3200 ms, Class 3 Connection API: 100…10 000 ms
20 ms Request Packet Interval (RPI) default
3 concurrent Encapsulation sessions
TCP port supports 5 concurrent incoming connections
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Chapter 11
Motor Overload Trip Curves
Motor overload current parameter provides class 10,15, and 20 overload
protection. Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the
overload.
Figure 101 - Bulletin 280E/281E Overload Trip Curves
ClassClass
10 Overload
Curves
10
Class 15
Overload
Class
15 Curves
10000
1000
Cold
100
Hot
10
1
Cold
100
Hot
1
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
0
Multiples
% of Full Load Current
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
of Full Load Current
Multiples%for
Note: For 280 and 281, if an overload fault occurs it may require 60 s or more before a fault
reset is allowed. Refer to Overload Class Parameter 107, Thermo-Utilization parameter
105, and OL Reset Level parameter 108 to adjust the reset time.
Class 20 Overload Curves
Class 20
10000
Approximate Trip Time (sec)
Approximate Trip Time (sec)
Approximate Trip Time (sec)
10000
Note: For 280 and 281, when the mechanical motor brake voltage is applied using power from
the load side of the ArmorStart controller, this current adds to the load and may result in a
phase imbalance or overload if the FLA of the motor and the brake current are similar in
scale.
Cold
100
Hot
1
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
% of
Multiples
of Full Load Current
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
259
Chapter 11
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Contactor Life Load Curves
280/1_-_12* = 100-C12*
280/1_-_23* = 100-C23*
Life Load Curves:
AC-3 Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting
Ue = 230…400…460V
260
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Chapter 11
AC-3 & AC-4 10% AC-4 Mixed operation of squirrel-cage motors
Ue = 400…460V
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
261
Chapter 11
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Maximum Operating Rates:
AC-3 Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting
Ue = 230…460V, Relative operating time 40%, Starting time tA = 0.25 s
AC-4 Inching of squirrel-cage motors
Ue = 230…460V, Starting time tA = 0.25 s
262
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Chapter 11
Bulletin 284E
Power Circuit
Electrical Ratings
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Operating Frequency
Utilization Category
Protection Against Shock
UL/NEMA
380…480V
600V
6 kV
2200V AC
50/60 Hz
N/A
N/A
Rated Max. Output Operating
Current
Control Circuit
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Overvoltage Category
Operating Frequency
Gland
Type
Any CR
or DR
Short Circuit
Protection
Short Circuit Protection Device
(SCPD) Performance Type 1
Any RR
SCPD List
IEC
380…480V
600V
6 kV
2500V AC
50/60 Hz
AC-3
IP2X
SVC - Performance
3-phase Hp Rating
Output Current [A]
284E-FVD1P4Z*
0.5
1.4
284E-FVD2P3Z*
1
2.3
284E-FVD4P0Z*
2
4
284E-FVD6P0Z*
3
6
284E-FVD7P6Z*
5
7.6
24V DC (+10%, –15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)
250V
250V
—
4 kV
1500V AC
2000V AC
—
III
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Short
Current
Circuit
Rating
Protection
480Y/277V
0.24…1.2 A
Sym. Amps rms
65 kA
10A, 10B, Max. Circuit Breaker ➍
100 A
0.5…2.5 A
10C
1.1…5.5 A
Max. Fuse
100 A
Sym. Amps rms
30 kA
100 A
3.2…16 A
25D
Max. Circuit Breaker ➍
Max. Fuse
100 A
0.24…1.2 A
Sym. Amps rms
45 kA
65 kA
➎
➋
30 A
N/A
0.5…2.5 A
10A, 10B, Max. Circuit Breaker
Max. Fuse
10C
40 A
40 A
1.1…5.5 A
- Non-time Delay ➊
- Time Delay ➊
20 A
20 A
Sym. Amps rms
N/A
30 kA
N/A
100 A ➌
3.2…16 A
25D
Max. Circuit Breaker ➎
Max. Fuse ➊
N/A
100 A
Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
480V
65 kA
60 A
60 A
30 kA
60 A
60 A
65 kA
N/A
40 A
20 A
30 kA
60 A ➌
60 A
➊ Type J, CC, and T fuses only.
➋ Only when used with Bulletin 140U-H frame.
➌ Only when used with Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-xxx frame or smaller.
➍ Bulletin 140U-H or 140G-H circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V, 100 A and a maximum interrupt of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
➎ When protected by Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-xxx circuit breaker, not rated more than 480/277V, 30 A, having an interrupt rating not less than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
263
Chapter 11
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
UL/NEMA
Environmental
Operating Temperature Range
Storage and Transportation
Temperature Range
Altitude ➊
Humidity
Pollution Degree
Enclosure Ratings
Approximate Shipping Weight
IEC
–20…40 °C (–4…104 °F)
–25….85 °C (–13…185 °F)
1000 m
5…95% (on-condensing)
3
NEMA 4/12
IP67
13.6 kg (30 lb)
Resistance to Shock
Operational
Non-Operational
Operational
Non-Operational
Wire Size
Mechanical
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
Terminal Wire Size
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
Disconnect Lock Out
15 G
30 G
Resistance to Vibration
1 G, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) Displacement
2.5 G, 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Displacement
Power and Ground Terminals
Primary/Secondary Terminal:
Primary/Secondary Terminal:
#16…#10 AWG
1.0…4.0 mm2
Primary Terminal: 10.8 lb·in.
Primary Terminal: 1.2 N·m
Secondary Terminal: 4.5 lb·in.
Secondary Terminal: 0.5 N·m
9 mm (0.35 in.)
Control
#18…#10 AWG
1.0…4.0 mm2
6.2 lb·in.
0.7 N·m
9 mm (0.35 in.)
Recommend 8 mm (5/16 in.) lock shackle or hasp.
The hasp should not exceed 8 mm (5/16 in.) when closed.
➊ Refer to Altitude Derating on page 269 for derating guide
Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions
Radiated Emissions
Electrostatic Discharge
Other Rating
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Fast Transient
Surge Transient
Internal Fan for 284
264
EMC Emission Levels
10V rms Communications Cables
10V rms (PE)
150 kHz…80 MHz
Class A, Group 1, equivalent to C2 emissions
EMC Immunity Levels
4 kV contact and 8 kV Air
10V/m, 80 KHz…1 GHz
3V/m, 1.4 GHz…2 GHz
1V/m, 2.0 GHz …2.7 GHz
2 kV (Power)
2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communications and Control)
1 kV (12) L-L, 2 kV (2) L-N (Earth)
Fan L10 Operation data: 80K hr at 40 °C (104 °F)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
UL/NEMA
Certifications
Control Voltage
Module Inrush ➍
Module Steady
Total Control Power (Pick Up)
Total Control Power (Running)
Total Control Power (with Dynamic Brake or Output
Contactor option)
Total Control Power (with Dynamic Brake and Output
Contactor option)
EtherNet/IP Version – Control and I/O Power Requirements
A3/A2 ➋
A1/A2 ➊
A1/A2 ➊
Units
W/O HOA
Volts
24V DC
Amps
0.92
0.30
1.09
Amps
0.06
0.30
0.23
Watts
22.08
7.20
26.16
Watts
1.44
7.20
5.52
➊
➋
➌
➍
Frequency
[Hz]
380
50
460
60
IEC
UL 508C
CSA C22.2, No. 14
EN50178
EN61800-3
EN/IEC 60947-4-2
CE Marked per Low Voltage 2006/95/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
ODVA for EtherNet/IP
cULus (File No. E207834,
Guide NMMS, NMMS7)
Standards Compliance
Line Voltage [V]
Chapter 11
A3/A2 ➋
W/ HOA
A3/A2 ➌
0.125
0.125
3.00
3.00
0.295
0.295
7.08
7.08
Watts
12
3
8.4
Watts
15
3
8.4
Add power requirements for outputs (1 A max.) to A1/A2.
Add power requirements for inputs (200 mA max.) to A3/A2.
If A1 power is disconnected.
Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms, which can exceed 20 A. The power supply must be capable of supporting
this amount of instant power demand when multiple units are turned ON simultaneously. If supplies are weaker, it is recommended
to apply unswitched power (A3-A2) first and after a 2…4 second delay, apply switched power.
Drive Ratings – VFD Output Current vs. Input Current
Output Current [A]
Sensorless Vector
3-Phase kW
3-Phase Hp
Rating
Rating
Control
0.4
—
1.4
0.75
—
2.3
1.5
—
4.0
2.2
—
6.0
3.0
—
7.6
—
0.5
1.4
—
1
2.3
—
2
4.0
—
3
6.0
—
5
7.6
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Input Current [A]
Sensorless Vector
Control
2.15
3.80
6.40
9.00
12.40
1.85
3.45
5.57
8.20
12.5
265
Chapter 11
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Drive Characteristics
Output Frequency
Efficiency
0…400 Hz (Programmable)
97.5% (Typical)
Sensorless Vector Control
Maximum (kW) Hp Rating/Input Voltage
Preset Speeds
Skip Frequency
StepLogic® Functionality
Timer/Counter Functions
5 Hp (3.3 kW)/480V AC
8
✓
✓
✓
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC)
Protective Specifications – Sensorless Vector Control
I2t overload protection – 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds (provides Class 10 protection)
200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault
380…460V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)
380…480V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)
100 milliseconds
Motor Overload Protection
Overcurrent
Over Voltage
Under Voltage
Faultless Power Ride Through
Carrier Frequency
Frequency Accuracy – Digital Input
Speed Regulation – Open Loop with Slip Compensation
Stop Modes
Accel/Decel
Electronic Motor Overload Protection
Control Specifications – Sensorless Vector Control
2…16 kHz. Drive rating is based on 4 kHz.
Within ±0.05% of set output frequency.
±1% of base speed across a 60:1 speed range
Multiple programmable stop modes including – Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold and S Curve.
Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time may be programmed from 0…600 s in 0.1 s
increments.
Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response
Minimum DB Resistance
Input Voltage
480V, 50/60 Hz,
Three-Phase
266
Drive Rating
[kW]
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
[Hp]
0.5
1
2
3
5
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Minimum DB Resistance
[Ω]
97
97
97
97
77
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Chapter 11
Motor Overload Trip Curves
Motor OL Current parameter provides Class 10 overload protection. Ambient
insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload.
Figure 102 - 284E Overload Trip Curves
Min Derate
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
100
80
60
40
20
0
Max Derate
% of P133 Motor OL Current
% of P133 Motor OL Current
% of P133 Motor OL Current
No Derate
100
100
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
267
Chapter 11
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
UL/NEMA
Rated Operation Voltage
Input On-State Voltage Range
Input On-State Current
Input Off-State Voltage Range
Input Off-State Current
Input Ratings – Sourced
from Control
Circuit (A3/A2)
Maximum Input Frequency Response
Off to On
On to Off
Input Compatibility
Number of Inputs
Output Ratings – Sourced
from Control Circuit (A1/
A2)
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Ethernet Port
Voltage Status Only
Current Available
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Type of Control Circuit
Type of Current
Conventional Thermal Current Ith
Peak Output Current
Type of Contacts
Number of Contacts
Load Types
Surge Suppression
Thermo-Protection
Maximum Cycle Rate
Maximum Blocking Voltage
Maximum On-State Voltage @
Maximum Output
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current
—
Fault Recovery
—
Ports
IP Address
DHCP Timeout
Communication Rate
Data
Web Server
268
—
Security
E-mail
Configuration
IEC
24V DC
10…26V DC
3.0 mA @ 10V DC
7.2 mA @ 24V DC
0…5V DC
<1.5 mA
200 Hz
(DeviceLogix response is greater than 200 Hz. Network response depends on control system
network performance.)
Input Filter – Software Selectable
Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
N/A
IEC 1+
4
Sensor Source
11…26.4V DC from unswitched power
50 mA max. per input, 200 mA, any single point
26.4V DC
250V
1500V AC (UL)
2000V AC (IEC)
Solid state sourcing output
24V DC
0.5 A each, 1 A max. combined
Current limited 2-8 amps (5 amps nominal) @ 24V DC
Normally open (N.O.)
2
Resistive or light inductive
Integrated diode, clamps @ 35V DC
Integrated short circuit and over current protection
30 operations/minute capacitive and inductive loads
35V DC
1.5V DC
10 μA
Beacon-based performance including IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock
Ring recovery time is less than 3 ms for a 50 node network
2 D-coded, 4-pin female M12 connectors
Embedded switch with 2 ports
DHCP enabled by default
30 s
10/100 Mbs with auto negotiate half duplex and full duplex
•Transported over both TCP and UDP
• Min. of 500 I/O packets/second (pps)
• Supports up to 150 concurrent TCP sockets
Embedded web server
Login and password configurable
Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Status, diagnostics, and configuration tabs
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Device Connections
Altitude Derating
Chapter 11
UL/NEMA
IEC
Supports scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 & UCMM) connections
6 - Class 3 connections are supported simultaneously
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or listen-only]. One connection per PLC.
Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established.
Class 1 Connection API: 2…3200 ms
Class 3 Connection API: 100…10 000 ms
20 ms Request Packet Interval (RPI) default
3 concurrent Encapsulation sessions
TCP port supports 5 concurrent incoming connections
Altitude Rating for Bulletin 280, 281
• No altitude derating up to 2000 m (6562 ft)
Altitude Rating for Bulletin 284
•
•
•
•
•
0.5 Hp: No Derating up to 3000 m (9843 ft)
1 Hp: No Derating up to 3000 m (9843 ft)
2 Hp: Derate 1% per 100 m (328 ft) above 1000 m (3281 ft)
3 Hp: No Derating up to 3000 m (9843 ft)
5 Hp: Derate 1% per 100 m (328 ft) above 1000 m
Example: Application requires 2600 m for a 5Hp ArmorStart
• 2600 m-1000 m= 1600 m
• 1600/100 = 16
• 16 * 1%= 16%. Derate output amps by 16%
• (1-.16)*7.6amp = 6.4amp
It is possible to extend the operational range of the units if the ambient
temperature is lower than 40 °C (104 °F), or if line reactors are used.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
269
Chapter 11
270
Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Chapter
12
Accessories
Industrial Ethernet Media
D Code Connectivity (M12) – 1585D
Patchcords and Cordsets IP67
M12 D Code
Connector Type
Cat. No.
Unshielded
Male Straight
to
Male Straight
1585D-M4TBDM- ➊
Male Straight
to
Male Right Angle
1585D-M4TBDE- ➊
Male Right Angle
to
Male Right Angle
1585D-E4TBDE- ➊
Male Straight
to
Female Straight
1585D-M4TBDF- ➊
➊ Available in 0.3, 0.6, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, and increments of 5 meters up to 75 meters.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
271
Chapter 12
Accessories
Patchcords and Cordsets IP20 to IP67
Front Mount Receptacle
Transition Cable
➊
Connector Type
Cat. No.
Unshielded
Female Front Mount
to
RJ45
1585D-D4TBJM- ➊
Connector Type
Unshielded
Male Straight
to
RJ45
1585D-M4TBJM- ➊
Available in 0.3, 0.6, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, and increments of 5 meters up to 75 meters.
Note: See www.ab.com/networks/media/ethernet to learn more about Industrial
Ethernet Media.
M12 to RJ45 Bulkhead Adapter – 1585A
Description
• Transition from IP20 environment to IP67 environment
• In-cabinet connectivity with RJ45 connector providing On-Machine solution with M12 D Code
connector
• Differential 100 ohm terminators that are used for unused pairs
• Cat 5e
272
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Cat. No.
1585A-DD4JD
Accessories
Chapter 12
Sensor Media
Description
Description
I/O Connection
DC Micro
Patchcord
Pin Count
Input/Output
EtherNet/IP
Communications
Connector
Cat. No.
Straight Female
Straight Male
889D-F4ACDM- ➊
Straight Female
Right Angle Male
889D-F4ACDE- ➊
Straight Female
879D-F4ACDM- ➊
Right Angle Female
879D-R4ACM- ➊
4-Pin
DC Micro VCable
Input
➊ Replace symbol with desired length in meters (for example, Cat. No. 889D-F4ACDM-1 for a 1 m cable). Standard cable lengths: 1
m, 2 m, 5 m, and 10 m.
Sensor Wiring
Pin 1: +24V (A3 or DNET)
Pin 2: Input 0
Pin 3: Common
Pin 4: Input 1
Pin 5: NC (No Connection)
Sensor Wiring
1
2
3
4
Brown
)
White
)
) Black
Blue
)
+
−
Female Input
ArmorStart
Connection
Sensor Male
Connection
Quick-Disconnect
Motor and Brake Cables
Description
Rating
Length m (ft)
Cat. No.
3 (9.8)
280-MTR22-M3
4 (13.1)
280-MTR22-M34
6 (19.6)
280-MTR22-M6
8 (26.2)
280-MTR22-M68
10 (32.8)
280-MTR22-M10
12 (39.4)
280-MTR22-M12
14 (45.9)
280-MTR22-M14
20 (65.6)
280-MTR22-M20
Motor Cable Cordsets
90° M22 Motor Cordset
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
273
Chapter 12
Accessories
Description
90° M35 Motor Cordset
Rating
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Length m (ft)
Cat. No.
3 (9.8)
280-MTR35-M3
6 (19.6)
280-MTR35-M6
10 (32.8)
280-MTR35-M10
14 (45.9)
280-MTR35-M14
20 (65.6)
280-MTR35-M20
3 (9.8)
280-MTRF22-M3
4 (13.1)
280-MTRF22-M4
6 (19.6)
280-MTRF22-M6
8 (26.2)
280-MTRF22-M8
10 (32.8)
280-MTRF22-M10
14 (45.9)
280-MTRF22-M14
20 (65.6)
280-MTRF22-M20
3 (9.8)
284-MTRS22-M3
4 (13.1)
284-MTRS22-M4
6 (19.6)
284-MTRS22-M6
8 (26.2)
284-MTRS22-M8
10 (32.8)
284-MTRS22-M10
12 (39.4)
284-MTRS22-M12
14 (45.9)
284-MTRS22-M14
1 (3.3)
285-BRC25-M1
3 (9.8)
285-BRC25-M3
4 (13.1)
285-BRC25-M4
6 (19.6)
285-BRC25-M6
8 (26.2)
285-BRC25-M8
10 (32.8)
285-BRC25-M10
12 (39.4)
285-BRC25-M12
14 (45.9)
285-BRC25-M14
20 (65.6)
285-BRC25-M120
3 (9.8)
285-BRCF25-M3
6 (19.6)
285-BRCF25-M6
10 (32.8)
285-BRCF25-M10
14 (45.9)
285-BRCF25-M14
20 (65.6)
285-BRCF25-M20
3 (9.8)
285-DBK22-M3
Motor Cable Cordsets, High Flex
90° M22 Motor Cordset
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Motor Cable Cordsets, Shielded VFD Motor Cable Cordsets, Shielded (VFD)
90° M22 Motor Cordset
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Motor Cable Cordsets, Extended Source/Control Brake
90° M25 Source Brake Cable
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Extended Source/Control Brake Cable Cordsets, High Flex
90° M25 Source Brake Cable
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Dynamic Brake Cable
M22 Dynamic Brake Cable
(DB Option)
274
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Accessories
Description
Rating
Chapter 12
Length m (ft)
Cat. No.
1 (3.3)
280-MTR22-M1D
3 (9.8)
280-MTR22-M3D
1 (3.3)
280-MTR35-M1D
3 (9.8)
280-MTR35-M3D
1 (3.3)
284-MTRS22-M1D
3 (9.8)
284-MTRS22-M3D
1 (3.3)
285-BRC25-M1D
3 (9.8)
285-BRC25-M3D
4 (13.1)
285-BRC25-M4D
6 (19.6)
285-BRC25-M6D
8 (26.2)
285-BRC25-M8D
10 (32.8)
285-BRC25-M10D
12 (39.4)
285-BRC25-M12D
14 (45.9)
285-BRC25-M14D
20 (65.6)
285-BRC25-M20D
0.5 (1.6)
285-M25M-M05
Motor Cable Patchcords
90° Male/Straight Female M22
90° Male/Straight Female M35
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Motor Cable Patchcords, Shielded (VFD)
90° Male/Straight Female M22
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Extended Source/Control Brake Cable Patchcords
90° Male/Straight Female M25
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Receptacle
Straight Male with wire
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Three-Phase Power
Field-Installed Receptacles
Pin Count
Assembly Rating
4-Pin
16 AWG, 600V, 10 A
14 AWG, 600V, 15 A
10 AWG, 600V, 25 A ➊
Certifications
Cable Diameter
Female
Cat. No.
Male
Cat. No.
UL Listed UL 2237
(File No. E318496, Guide PVVA)
0.28…0.47 in.
280-FAM22F
280-FAM22M
0.48…0.81 in.
280-FAM35F
280-FAM35M
➊ When used with Cat. No. 280-PWRM24_-M* [E,F,G,or H], use Cat. No. 280-FAM35* and the corresponding mating receptacle 280M35F-M* .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
275
Chapter 12
Accessories
Sealing Caps
EtherNet/IP
Description
Input
Output
1485A-M12
1485A-M12
Motor Connector Aluminum Sealing Cap
(M22) for 10A protection*
—
1485A-C1
Motor Connector Aluminum Sealing Cap
(M35) for 25A protection
—
889A-QMCAP
Dynamic Brake Connector (M22)
—
1485A-C1
Source/Control Brake Cap (M25)
—
280-BRCAP-M25
Plastic Sealing Cap (M12) ➊
➊ To achieve IP67 rating, sealing caps must be installed on all unused I/O connections.
Handle and Cord Accessories
Description
Locking Tag
Padlock attachment to the lockable handles
Up to three padlocks 4…8 mm (5/16 in. diameter) shackle
Cat. No.
140M-C-M3
Cord Grips for use with CR/CRW Gland
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
0.75in. Strain Relief Cord Connector, 0.75in. Lock Nut
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Thomas & Betts
Part No.
2931NM
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
1 in. Strain Relief Cord Connector, 1 in. Lock Nut
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Thomas & Betts
Part No.
2940NM
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
0.5 in. Strain Relief Cord Connector, 0.5 in. Lock Nut
Cable Range: 0.5…0.75 in.
Thomas & Betts
Part No.
2922NM
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
1 in. Strain Relief Cord Connector, 1 in. Lock Nut
Cable Range: 0.70…0.95in.
Thomas & Betts
Part No.
2942NM
Cord Grips for use with DR/DRW Gland
276
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Accessories
Chapter 12
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Minimum Resistance and
Recommended Modules for Option DB
Dynamic Braking Resistors
Table 50 - Dynamic Brake Specification for Option DB (IP20 Resistor)
Drive and
Motor Size kW
[Hp]
Cat. No. ➊
Application Type 1
Resistance
Ohms ±5%
Continuous
Power [kW ]
Max Energy
[kJ ]
Max Braking
Torque % of
Motor
Braking Torque
% of Motor
Application Type 2
Duty Cycle %
Braking Torque
% of Motor
Duty Cycle %
380…480 Volt AC Input Drives
0.37 (0.5)
AK-R2-360P500
360
0.086
17
305%
100%
47%
150%
31%
0.75 (1)
AK-R2-360P500
360
0.086
17
220%
100%
23%
150%
15%
1.5 (2)
AK-R2-360P500
360
0.086
17
110%
100%
12%
110%
11%
2.2 (3)
AK-R2-120P1K2
120
0.26
52
197%
100%
24%
150%
16%
4 (5)
AK-R2-120P1K2
120
0.26
52
124%
100%
13%
124%
10%
➊ The resistors that are listed in this table are rated for 5% duty cycle.
Note 1: Always check resistor ohmic value against minimum resistance for drive
being used.
Note 2: Duty cycle that is listed, is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration.
For constant regen. at full speed, duty cycle capability is half of what is listed.
Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100% braking torque
where possible.
Application Type 2 represents more than 100% braking torque where possible, up
to a maximum of 150%.
Note 3: Dynamic brake modules have an IP20 rating.
ATTENTION: Resistor temperature may exceed 200 °C (392 °F).
ATTENTION: AC drives do not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors,
especially in the case of brake IGBT failure. A risk of fire exists if external braking
resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be protected from over
temperature or the protective circuit shown, or equivalent, must be supplied.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
277
Chapter 12
Accessories
ArmorStart Bulletin 284 Option DB (IP20) Resistor Dimensions
Cat. No.
Weight
[kg (lb)]
AK-R2-091P500, AK-R2-047P500, AK-R2-360P500
1.1 (2.5)
AK-R2-030P1K2, AK-R2-120P1K2
2.7 (6)
Dimensions are in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used
for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 103 - Bulletin 284E Dynamic Brake Module Approximate Dimensions
Frame A
Frame B
30.0
(1.18) 60.0
(2.36)
31.0
(1.22)
59.0
(2.32)
C
US
C
US
17.0
(0.67)
61.0
(2.40)
335.0
(13.19)
386.0
(15.20)
405.0
(15.94)
AUTOMATION
ROCKWELL
316.0
(12.44)
ROCKWELL
AUTOMATION
SURFACES MAY BE
Thermostat
13.0
(0.51)
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-047P500
AK-R2-360P500
278
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
AK-R2-030P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2
Accessories
Chapter 12
Recommended thermostat control wiring to prevent dynamic brake overheating.
Figure 104 - Thermostat Control Wiring
R (L1)
3-Phase
Power
S (L2)
T (L3)
(M)
Contactor
Power Off
Power On
M
M
Power Source
DB Resistor Thermostat
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Recommended Dynamic Brake
Modules for Option DB1 (IP67 Resistor)
Application Type 1
Drive and
Motor Size
kW
Cat. No. ➊
Application Type 2
Resistance
Ohms ± 5%
Continuous
Power kW
Max Energy
kJ
Max Braking
Torque % of
Motor
Braking
Torque % of
Motor
Duty
Cycle %
Braking
Torque % of
Motor
Duty
Cycle %
380…480 Volt AC Input Drives
0.37 (0.5)
284R-360P500-M➋
360
0.086
17
305%
100%
47%
150%
31%
0.75 (1)
284R-360P500-M➋
360
0.086
17
220%
100%
23%
150%
15%
1.5 (2)
284R-360P500-M➋
360
0.086
17
110%
100%
12%
110%
11%
2.2 (3)
284R-120P1K2-M➋
120
0.26
52
197%
100%
24%
150%
16%
4 (5)
284R-120P1K2-M➋
120
0.26
52
124%
100%
13%
124%
10%
➊ Drive rating and DB part numbers are not interchangeable. Only use specified resistor. Customer is responsible to evaluate if
performance meets application requirement.
➋ Length is user-selectable based on a suffix added to the catalog number. For a length of 500±10 mm, add -M05 to the end of the
catalog number. For a length of 1000±10 mm, add -M1 to the end of the catalog number.
Note: Duty Cycle that is listed, is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration.
For constant regen at full speed, duty cycle capability is half of what is listed.
Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100% braking torque
where possible.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
279
Chapter 12
Accessories
Application Type 2 represents more than 100% braking torque where possible, up
to a maximum of 150%.
Figure 105 - Bulletin 284 Dynamic Brake Resistor Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
A
H
B
C
D
J
E
F
Cat. No.
A
mm (in.)
284R-091P500
284R-120P1K2
284R-120P1K2
89 ± 3
(3.5 ± 0.12)
B
mm (in.)
C
mm (in.)
215 ± 5
(8.46 ± 0.2)
420 ± 5
(16.54 ± 0.2)
M05 = 0.5 m
M1 = 1 m ➊
D
mm (in.)
235 ± 5
(9.25 ± 0.2)
440 ± 5
(17.32 ± 0.2)
G
E
mm (in.)
F
mm (in.)
G
mm (in.)
H
mm (in.)
J
mm (in.)
60 ± 2
(2.36 ± 0.08)
127
(5)
12.54
(0.49)
60 ± 2
(2.36 ± 0.08)
50 ± 1.5
(1.97 ± 0.06)
➊ Length is user-selectable based on the suffix added to the catalog number. For a length of 500 ±10 mm, add
-M05 to the end of the catalog number. For a length of 1000 ±10 mm, add -M1 to the end of the catalog number.
Note: The customer must protect the resistor in the event of a shorted switch in
the VFD. This is done via PLC control. An example ControlLogix program can
be downloaded from http://samplecode.rockwellautomation.com
280
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Appendix
A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart
Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit
on Industrial Machinery
Introduction
In the general multiple-motor branch circuit case, installing a motor controller
that is not listed for group installation, violates the NEC and NFPA 79.
Each ArmorStart motor controller is listed for group installation. This appendix
explains how to use this listing to apply ArmorStart motor controllers in
multiple-motor branch circuits.
Background
The NEC®is NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. NFPA 79 is the Electrical
Standard for Industrial Machinery. The 2012 NEC refers to NFPA 79 in Article
670's first informational note.
Group installation means that a single set of fuses or a single circuit breaker
protects a branch circuit that supplies two or more motors and their controllers.
Both the NEC and NFPA 79 have rules for installing controllers in these
multiple-motor branch circuits. Both also have special rules for controllers that
are not listed for group installation and general rules for those that are.
The special rules for controllers that are not listed for group installation restrict
some variables. These restricting rules are found in the NEC's 430.53(A),
430.53(B), and 430.53(C)(2)(b) and NFPA 79's 7.2.10.2, 7.2.10.3, and the
7.2.10.4(1) condition “…does not exceed that permitted by 7.2.10.1…”. . For
example, for 480V motors, the NEC's 430.53(A) limits each motor's rating to
1 Hp or less and the protective device rating to 15 amperes or less. The following
will not address these special cases.
The following addresses this general case: if a motor controller is listed for group
installation, the NEC and NFPA 79 permit (1) installing it in a branch circuit
with other motors having any mix of horsepower ratings and (2) protecting all
wiring and controllers with a single set of fuses or a single circuit breaker large
enough to operate this mix of motors. The rules for this general case are found in
the NEC's 430.53(C) and 430.53(D) and NFPA 79's 7.2.10.4 and 7.2.10.5.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
281
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
For this general case, the following conclusions apply:
Importance of a motor controller being listed for group installation
• Unless a motor controller is listed for group installation, its listing covers
only individual motor circuit installation, and installing it in a general
multiple-motor circuit violates the NEC and NFPA 79.
• This listing is physically important because it ensures the controller's short
circuit current rating is valid with the larger fuses and circuit breakers
necessary to operate the multiple-motor circuit.
• If a motor controller is not listed for group installation, the installer must
add fuses or a circuit breaker in each motor controller's input circuit.
• So, the group installation listing is important because it ensures the
controller's short circuit current rating applies to the multiple-motor
branch circuit and eliminates the requirement for the additional input
circuit protective device(s).
From the perspective of the ArmorStart product family, being listed for group
installation means one set of fuses or one circuit breaker may protect a branch
circuit that has two or more of these motor controllers that are connected to it.
This appendix refers to this type of branch circuit as a multiple-motor branch
circuit. The circuit topology that is shown in Figure 106, is one configuration,
but not the only possible configuration, of a multiple-motor branch circuit. In
these circuits, a single set of fuses (or a single circuit breaker) protects multiple
motors, their controllers, and the circuit conductors. The motors may be any
mixture of power ratings and the controllers may be any mixture of motor
controller technologies (magnetic motor controllers and variable-frequency AC
drive controllers).
This appendix addresses only NFPA 79 applications. This is not because these
products are only suitable for industrial machinery, but because industrial
machinery is their primary market. In fact, while all versions of the ArmorStart
products may be applied on industrial machinery, the versions that have the
Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option may also be used in applications governed
by NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), (see “ArmorStart Product
Family”).
282
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Listing requirements for a “factory assembly” and “separate
assemblies”
• The first sentence of the NEC's 430.53(C) relies on two terms that the
NEC does not define: “”factory assembly” and “separate assemblies”. But
the text also requires both to be “listed”: “listed factory assembly” or
“separate assemblies listed for such use”. 45A of UL 508C contains the
430.53(C) listing requirements for drives. 52A of UL 508 contains the
430.53(C) listing requirements for contactor-based motor controllers.
Neither contains the term “factory assembly” or the term “separate
assemblies” and each requires this marking: “Suitable for motor group
installation…”.
• Therefore, the terms “factory assembly” and “separate assemblies” do not
change the listing requirements. All drives and contactor-based motor
controllers that are listed for 430.53(C) installation are marked “Suitable
for motor group installation…”.
In the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79, motor controllers that are listed for group
installation may be installed in multiple-motor branch circuits according to
either of two alternative sets of requirements. The first is found in 7.2.10.4(2),
the second in 7.2.10.4(3). The requirements of 7.2.10.4(3) are similar to those in
430.53(C) of NFPA 70, while the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2) are found only in
NFPA 79. This appendix explains the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2), rather than
those of 7.2.10.4(3), because this is the simpler method to use when applying the
ArmorStart family of motor controllers.
The user must determine the requirements – NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 – to use for
the application. When making this determination, it is necessary to understand
the ArmorStart product characteristics and useful to understand the definition of
industrial machinery. The section of this appendix, “ArmorStart Product Family”,
specifies whether a motor controller is suitable for installation according to
NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 (or both). The definition of industrial machinery is found
in 3.3.56 of NFPA 79 and 670.2 of Article 670, Industrial Machinery, in NFPA
70.
These conventions are used throughout this appendix. First, although all
equipment is connected to a three-phase electrical supply, all figures are shown as
one-line diagrams. Second, although all ArmorStart motor controllers are listed
for group installation with both fuses and a specific family of inverse time circuit
breakers, this appendix considers only fuses. This is done to avoid repetitive
explanations with minor, but necessary qualifications, for circuit breakers.
Generally, the principles for selecting the fuses also apply to selecting inverse time
circuit breakers. Third, all references, unless indicated otherwise, are to NFPA 79
– 2012.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
283
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Note: The following example uses an ArmorStart LT circuit. This provides a
more comprehensive example,
Figure 106 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit
Electrical Supply
Disconnecting
Means
Final
Overcurrent
Device
Single Set of Fuses
NFPA 79, 3.3.10 Branch Circuit. The Circuit
Conductors Between the Final Overcurrent Device
Protecting the Circuit and the Outlet(s). [70:100]
Any Mixture of Motor Controller
Technologies
½ HP
Bulletin 294
2 HP
Bulletin 294
5 HP
Bulletin 291
5 HP
Bulletin 290
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Overload
Class 10
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
2 Hp
5 Hp
Nameplate*
* Each Controller is Listed for Group
Installation with Specified Maximum
Protection
1/2 Hp
5 Hp
1 Hp
Two or More Motors with any
Mixture or Power Ratings
ArmorStart Product Family
This section contains a brief description of the attributes of the ArmorStart LT
motor controllers that are relevant to applying them in multiple-motor branch
circuits. These same relative attributes are can be assumed for ArmorStart.
controllers
The term motor controller refers to the device that stops and starts the motor.
The ArmorStart product family consists of two types of motor controllers. The
Bulletin 290 and 291 controllers are magnetic motor controllers that use an
electromechanical contactor to stop and start the motor. The Bulletin 294 motor
controllers use a variable-frequency AC drive to stop, start and vary the speed of
the motor. This appendix refers to the Bulletin 290, 291 and 294 products as
either motor controllers or just controllers.
Each ArmorStart motor controller incorporates an integrated overload relay and
motor disconnecting means. The Underwriters Laboratories’ (UL) listing for
each motor controller confirms that the motor controller – including its integral
overload relay and motor disconnecting means — is suitable for motor group
installation.
284
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
The suitability of each ArmorStart LT motor controller for installation according
to either NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 depends on the means of connecting the power
circuit wiring. All controllers are suitable for installation in multiple-motor
branch circuits on industrial machinery according to 7.2.10.4 of NFPA 79. The
controllers that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option are also suitable
for installation in multiple-motor branch circuits according to 430.53(C) and
430.53(D) of NFPA 70 (NEC). The controllers that have the Power Media
Gland Plate Option are suitable for installation only on industrial machinery.
These versions are limited to industrial machinery because the UL listing for the
power media connectors themselves and their matching cable assemblies covers
installation only on industrial machinery.
Multiple-Motor Branch
Circuits and Motor
Controllers Listed for Group
Installation – General
Multiple-motor branch circuits, like that shown in Figure 106, have this
fundamental tradeoff: protecting more than one controller with a single set
of fuses requires more electrical and mechanical robustness in each controller.
In exchange for eliminating the cost and space necessary for a dedicated set of
fuses in front of each controller, the construction of each controller itself must be
more robust. For the circuit configuration shown in Figure 106 to be practical,
the ampere rating of the fuse must be large enough to operate all motors, without
opening, under normal starting and running conditions. This rating of fuse must
be larger than the rating permitted to protect a circuit that supplies only a single
motor and its controller. In general, as the rating of the fuse increases, so does the
magnitude of fault currents that flow until the fuse opens. This higher magnitude
of fault current results in more damage to the controller. Therefore, the
additional controller robustness is necessary to withstand these higher fault
currents, without controller damage, that could result in a shock
or fire hazard.
Consequently, to the controller, being listed for group installation mostly means
the UL testing is performed with fuses that have this practical, and higher,
ampere rating. This testing verifies that it is safe to apply this controller in a
multiple-motor branch circuit, provided the fuse is of the same class and does
not have a rating exceeding that marked on the controller.
The example in Figure 107, illustrates this increase in the maximum ampere
rating of fuse that is permitted to protect a controller. This example compares the
rating of the fuse used in the UL testing of two variable-frequency AC drivebased motor controllers. Both controllers have a rated power of 0.5 Hp and a
rated output current of 1.5 A. The controller that is shown on the left is intended
for installation in individual-motor branch circuits. The controller that is shown
on the right is the ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294 controller that must be listed for
group installation to be installed, as intended, in multiple-motor branch circuits.
For this example, assume that all testing is done with fuses of the same class.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
285
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
The UL investigation of both controllers is done according to UL 508C, Power
Conversion Equipment. The controllers are connected to the test supply through
the three-phase conductors and equipment grounding conductor and then
covered with cotton in areas that are likely to vent hot gases and sparks during
the tests. During the test, electrical faults are impressed on the output of, and
internal to, these variable-frequency AC drive-based controllers. Increasing the
ampere rating of the fuses increases the magnitude of the fault currents that flow
through, and damage, the controller before the fuses open. Afterwards, the
damage to the controller is evaluated to determine whether a potential shock or
fire hazard exists when protected by fuses having this ampere rating. One
criterion of the evaluation is the examination of the equipment grounding
conductor that must not open during the test as this could leave exposed
conductive parts in an energized state (shock hazard). Another criterion is that
the cotton must not ignite as this indicates the expulsion from the controller
of hot gases or molten metal fragments (fire hazard).
Referring to the controller on the left, UL 508C permits the individual-motor
testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to
protect an individual-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70 and
NFPA 79, this is 400 percent of the full-load current rating of the largest motor
that the controller can supply. In UL 508C, this is taken to be 400 percent of the
rated output current of the controller, or 6 A.
Referring to the controller on the right, UL 508C permits the group installation
testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to
protect a multiple-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70
(430.53(C)) and NFPA 79 (7.2.10.4(3)), this is 250 amperes. This value, derived
from the installation requirements of 430.53(C) and 430.53(D) of NFPA 70, is
determined by the largest size of power conductor that the ArmorStart LT
controller can accept, 10 AWG. Because the UL 508C test covers all possibilities
in NFPA 70 and NFPA 79, it permits the maximum value of 250 amperes. This
covers 7.2.10.4(2), which permits only 100 amperes. However, in this case, the
manufacturer, Rockwell Automation, chose to test and mark with the lower value
of 45 A. This value was chosen as the tradeoff between the maximum number
and type of controllers in the branch circuit – limited by the maximum fuse
rating - and the electrical and mechanical robustness engineered into each
controller.
Therefore, to make its use in the multiple-motor branch circuit of Figure 106
practical, the 0.5 Hp, Bulletin 294 controller was engineered to be robust enough
to safely contain the damage when protected by a fuse having a rating
of 45 A, rather than just 6 A.
286
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Figure 107 - UL508C Variable-Frequency AC Drive Motor Controller Evaluation
Short-Circuit Test Circuit
Short-Circuit Test Circuit
UL 508C –
test with 6
ampere max
½ HP Motor
Controller
Rated Output
Current = 1.5 A
6A fuse max
Max = 400% * Rated Output Current
= 400% * 1.5 A = 6 A
Manufacturer’s choice Reduce rating for test
to 45 A
Max rating for 10 AWG
= 250 A
Max permitted
rating for test
fuse based on
Rated Output
Current
Max permitted rating
for test fuse based
on maximum size
of power conductors
Maximum
conductor size
= 10 AWG
Bulletin 294
½ HP Motor
Controller
Suitable for
motor group
installation
Rated Output
Current = 1.5 A
45 A fuse max
Maximum
conductor size
= 10 AWG
Motor
Maximum Fuse Ampere
Rating According to
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)
Motor
This section uses Figure 108 to explain the requirements from 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) that are relevant to, and permit, the multiple-motor branch circuit of
Figure 106.
The following is the complete text of 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and an
abbreviated version of Table 51 from the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79. The table is
abbreviated to cover the size of conductors that are generally relevant to the
ArmorStart LT motor controllers.
Complete Text
“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors or one or more motor(s) and other load(s), and
their control equipment shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch
circuit where short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by a single
inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses, provided the following
conditions under (1) and either (2) or (3) are met:
(1) Each motor controller and overload device is either listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection or selected such
that the ampere rating of the motor branch short-circuit and ground-fault
protective device does not exceed that permitted by 7.2.10.1 for that individual
motor controller or overload device and corresponding motor load.
(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection
device does not exceed the values in Table 51 for the smallest conductor in the
circuit.”
(3) …(not considered in this appendix)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
287
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Table 51 - Abbreviated Table 7.2.10.4
Table 7.2.10.4 Relationship Between Conductor Size and Maximum Rating or Setting of Short-Circuit
Protective Device for Power Circuits Group Installations
Conductor Size (AWG)
Maximum Rating
Fuse or Inverse Time*
Circuit Breaker
(amperes)
…
…
…
…
14
60
12
80
10
100
8
150
6
200
…
…
The following text and Figure 108 provide an explanation of 7.2.10.4(1) and (2).
In the following, the text not relevant to Figure 106 is replaced by ellipsis points
(…). Then each individual requirement is underlined and followed by an
underlined letter in parentheses. This underlined letter in the following text
corresponds to the letter in Figure 108.
“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors (a)…and their control equipment (b) shall be
permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit (c) where short-circuit and
ground-fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a
single set of fuses (d), provided the following conditions under (1) and…(2)…are
met:
(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation
with specified maximum branch-circuit protection (e) …
(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection
device does not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4 for the smallest conductor in
the circuit.” (f )
Summarizing the requirements relevant to Figure 106: 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) permit two or more ArmorStart LT motor controllers to be installed
in a single branch circuit provided (1) all motor controllers are listed for group
installation, (2) the fuse does not exceed the maximum rating that Table 51
permits to protect the smallest conductor and (3) the fuse complies with the
maximum fuse ratings of all controllers.
288
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Figure 108 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit
single set
d “...a
of fuses…”
“The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit
and ground-fault protection device does
not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4
for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
f
Branch circuit (shown as dotted lines) –
all of the conductors on the load side
of the single set of fuses
c “...shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit…”
“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”
e
“Each motor controller
and overload device is ...
listed for group
installation with specified
maximum branch-circuit
protection…”
Max. Ratings
Sym. Amps RMS
Fuse
5 KA 10 KA
45A 45A*
* Type CC, J and T fuses only
e
Markings that satisfy
7.2.10.4(1)
b
a
½ HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
2 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
5 HP
Bulletin 291
Overload
Class 10/15/20
5 HP
Bulletin 290
Overload
Class 10/15/20
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
“... and their control
equipment … ”
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
“Two or more motors ...”
* Each controller is listed for group installation with the same specified maximum protection
Explanatory Example
The example addresses the overcurrent protection of the conductors, controllers
and motors. Protection for three overcurrent conditions is considered: motor
running overloads, short-circuit (line-to-line) faults, and ground-faults (line-toground). The short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection is governed by
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and explained in Requirements 1,2 and 3 and
Figure 109. The overload protection, explained in Requirement 4, is governed by
7.3.1 and 7.3.1.1. Overload coordination depends on each conductor having the
minimum ampacity given by 12.5.3 and 12.5.4. The method for determining this
minimum ampacity is explained in Requirement 5 and Figure 110.
The example branch circuit is shown in Figure 109 and Figure 110. The circuit
topology consists of a set of 10 AWG conductors that supply multiple sets of
14 AWG conductors. Each set of 14 AWG conductors supply a controller and
motor. These conductor sizes are chosen to be the smallest conductors that have
sufficient ampacity, without derating, for the loads each must carry. All wiring is
customer-supplied, rather than the ArmorConnect Power Media, because all
controllers have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option. Fuses protect the
branch circuit.
The example addresses five basic requirements that the motor controllers, fuses,
and conductors must satisfy. The letters in the circles on Figure 109 and
Figure 110 are referenced in the explanations as letters in parentheses. Ellipses
points (…)
are used to replace NFPA 79 text that is not applicable to the multiple-motor
branch circuit that is shown in Figure 109 and Figure 110. Unless indicated, all
text is from NFPA 79.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
289
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Figure 109 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit —
Conductor and Controller Protection
Electrical Supply 480Y/277V
Available Fault Current
Sym. Amps RMS 9 KA
Disconnecting
Means
a
Fuses
45 A Max,
CC, J or T
Branch short-circuit
and ground-fault
protection device
d
Combined Load Conductors
10 AWG
Controller
ratings
further
restrict the
fuse
AWG
14
12
10
8
-
Max
Fuse
(A)
60
80
100
150
-
Conductor
protection 60 A max,
any class
Conductor
protection
c
Determine
fuse class
and max
rating for
conductor
protection
7.2.10.4(2) “smallest
conductor in
the circuit”
= 14 AWG
14 AWG
14 AWG
14 AWG
5 HP
Bulletin 291
Overload
Class 10/15/20
5 HP
Bulletin 290
Overload
Class 10/15/20
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
Nameplate*
14 AWG
b
Table 7.2.10.4
2 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
14 AWG
Compare to
controller max
fuse ratings
d
½ HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
14 AWG
a
14 AWG
5 KA 10 KA
45A 45A*
* Type CC, J and T fuses only
14 AWG
Max. Ratings
Sym. Amps RMS
Fuse
14 AWG
14 AWG
“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”
“Smallest
conductor”
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
* Each controller is suitable for group installation with the same maximum ratings of fuse.
** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011
Figure 110 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit Minimum
Conductor Ampacity
Electrical Supply
Minimum Required Ampacity (MRA)
MRA = 1.25 * Max {controller input currents} + Sum {remaining controller input currents}
Controller input currents = {I1,I2,I3,I4,I5}
Max controller input current = I3 = I4, choose I3 as Max (either is ok)
MRA = 1.25 * I3 + (I1 + I2 + I4 + I5}
= 1.25 * 7.6 A + (1.8 A + 5.5 A + 7.6 A + 3.0 A) = 27.4 A
Combined Load Conductors
Min Amp. =
125% * 1.1A
2 HP
Bulletin
294
Min Amp. =
125% * 3.4 A
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
3.4 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
7.6 A
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
I5 =
3.0 A
1 HP
Bulletin
294
7.6 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
b
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011
290
14 AWG
I4 =
7.6 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 3.0 A
5 HP
Bulletin
290
a
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
10 AWG
b
14 AWG
5 HP
Bulletin
291
14 AWG
1.1 A
a
I3 =
7.6 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
14 AWG
I2 =
5.5 A
14 AWG
14 AWG
½ HP
Bulletin
294
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
14 AWG
I1 =
1.8 A
14 AWG
Min Amp. =
125% * 5.5 A
14 AWG
Min Amp. =
125% * 1.8 A
14 AWG
c
Min Amp. =
125% * 2.1 A
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
2.1 A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
1. Requirement One: Controller Ratings — The motor controllers and
overload relays must be listed for group installation with specified maximum
branch-circuit protection.
Text: “7.2.10.4(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”
Analysis: To apply the ArmorStart LT motor controllers in the multiple-motor
branch circuit that is shown in Figure 109, 7.2.10.4(1) must be satisfied; each
controller must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branchcircuit protection. The UL listing for each ArmorStart LT motor controller
confirms that it – including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting
means — is suitable for motor group installation with specified fuses, satisfying
7.2.10.4(1). The Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers are listed for group
installation according to UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment. The Bulletin
294E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508C, Power
Conversion Equipment.
Referring to Figure 110 (a) indicates the markings on the nameplate that satisfy
7.2.10.4(1). The marking “Suitable for Motor Group Installation” satisfies the
requirement to be listed for group installation. The ratings that are located
beneath the description “Max. Ratings” are the specified maximum branch
circuit protection. The (a) beside the fuse(s) indicates that the maximum
protection specified on the nameplate applies to these fuse(s).
2. Requirement Two: Conductor Short-circuit and Ground-Fault
Protection — The fuse must protect the conductors for short-circuit faults
and ground faults.
Text: “7.2.10.4(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and groundfault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 51 for the smallest
conductor in the circuit.”
Analysis: Referring to Figure 109, 7.2.10.4(2) must be satisfied. The fuse, as
indicated by the description in Figure 109 (a), is the branch short-circuit and
ground-fault protection device. The word circuit means the branch circuit.
The conductors of the branch circuit start at the load side of the fuses and end
at the input to the motor, including the conductors between the motor
controllers and the motor. The smallest conductor in the circuit is any one
of the 14 AWG conductors that supply each controller and motor. The note
at (b) indicates the conductor protection is based on the smallest conductor,
14 AWG. Referring to Table 51 a 14 AWG conductor may be used in a circuit
that is protected by a fuse of any class having a rating of 60 amperes or less (c).
Therefore, selecting a fuse of any class with a maximum rating of 60 amperes
satisfies the conductor protection requirement of 7.2.10.4(2).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
291
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Supplementary Note 1: The value that is specified in Table 51 is the maximum
rating of fuse that 7.2.10.4(2) permits to protect that size of conductor. The
rating of the fuse may be set to the maximum value given by Table 51 for the
smallest conductor without further justification. However, if any controller, or
other component, has a maximum rating of fuse that is less than the Table 51
value, the maximum rating of the fuse protecting the branch circuit must be
reduced to the lower value so that all components are applied according to their
ratings. For example, as shown in Requirement Three, a lower value may be
necessary to protect the motor controller within its ratings because its specified
maximum protection is less than the rating that Table 51 permits for the smallest
circuit conductor. Another reason to use a lower rating of fuse is to provide more
conservative conductor and controller protection. However, in all cases it is
important to ensure the ampere rating is sufficient to start and operate the motors
without nuisance opening of the fuse(s).
Supplementary Note 2: The note at (b) points to the conductor on the output
of the 0.5 Hp Bulletin 294E controller to emphasize that the smallest conductor
in the circuit includes the conductors between each controller and motor. This
includes the output of the variable-frequency AC drive-based Bulletin 294E
controllers; even though these drives have electronic short-circuit protection.
According to NFPA 79, the fuse, and not the drive’s electronic short-circuit
protection, provides the short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection for these
output conductors.
Supplementary Note 3: Generally, connecting a smaller conductor to a larger
conductor requires the installation of fuses at the connection. This connection
may be made without this fuse, in some cases, by using a tap rule that indirectly
protects the smaller conductor by limiting two things: the ratio of the ampacity
of the larger conductor to the ampacity of the smaller conductor and the
maximum length of the smaller conductor (see, for example, 7.2.8.2). When
applying 7.2.10.4(2), such a tap rule is neither applicable nor necessary. In
Figure 109, the smaller 14 AWG conductors may be connected to combined load
conductors of any size because 7.2.10.4 does not indirectly protect the smaller
conductor by limiting the ratio of the larger to smaller conductor ampacities and
the conductor length. Instead, Table 51 protects the smallest conductor directly
by specifying the maximum rating of fuse that may protect a branch circuit that
contains a conductor of that size.
3. Requirement Three: Controller Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault
Protection — Each motor controller must be protected according to its own
ratings, that is, applied in accordance with its listing.
Text: “(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”
Analysis: See (d) in Figure 109. The characteristics of the fuse(s) permitted to
protect the conductors (see Requirement 2) must now be compared to those in
the controller’s ratings. To comply with the listing of each motor controller and
overload relay, the fuse(s) must comply with the maximum branch-circuit
protection specified in the controller markings. Therefore, the fuse(s) must be
of a class marked on all controllers and the rating of the fuse(s) must not exceed
292
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
the rating that is marked on any of the controllers. The markings of each
controller specify that a fuse having a maximum rating of 45 A may protect the
motor controller. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available
fault current of 5000 A or less, the class of the fuse is not specified and may be any
class. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault current
from 5000 to 10000 A, the class of the fuse must be CC, J
or T. Since the electrical supply has an available fault current of 9000 A, selecting
a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A or less ensures each motor controller
is applied within its own ratings.
Supplementary Note 1: The rating of the fuse must not exceed the rating that is
permitted by 7.2.10.4(2) to protect the smallest conductor in the circuit.
Selecting a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A, being less than 60 A, also
protects the conductors (see Requirement 2). Although the ArmorStart LT
products presently have a maximum fuse rating of 45 A, future controllers may
have maximum fuse ratings that exceed 60 A. In this case, the maximum rating of
fuse is limited by the rating to protect the 14 AWG conductors, 60 A. The
maximum rating that is permitted for the controller, 45 A, is a maximum rating
and can be reduced, for more conservative protection, provided nuisance opening
of the fuses do not occur.
Supplementary Note 2: In this appendix, a fuse having a rating of any class
means a fuse having the let-through characteristics of an Class RK-5 fuse. Class
RK-5 fuses are assumed to have the maximum let-through of any class of fuse. For
this reason, the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are marked for use with
fuses, without a restriction to a particular class, have been tested with and are
intended to be used with fuses having a class of RK-5. Of course, fuses of a class
that have lower let-throughs than Class RK-5, such as Class CC, J or T, are also
acceptable. A fuse having a rating of any class also restricts the fuse to those that
have been evaluated for use as branch-circuit protection devices. This means that
semiconductor fuses, used to protect power electronic equipment, or
supplemental fuses cannot be used to protect the multiple-motor branch circuit.
Supplementary Note 3: There are four complementary ratings relevant to the
“specified maximum branch-circuit protection” of 7.2.10.4(1). They are: the fuse
class, the maximum fuse rating, the voltage rating and connection of the source
(480Y/277 V), and the available fault current of the source. Applying the
controllers according to these four ratings means that a fault on the output of all
controllers, and internal faults for Bulletin 294 controllers, will not result in a
shock or fire hazard.
Supplementary Note 4: In this example, the assumption is made that the
available fault current at the controller is that of the source on the line side
of the fuses. Although it is true that the wiring impedance between the fuses
and the first controller reduce the fault current available at the controllers, this
reduction is neglected by assuming the first controller, the 0.5 Hp, Bulletin 294
controller, is very close to the fuses.
4. Requirement Four: Overload Protection — The motors, conductors and
controllers must be protected against motor overload conditions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
293
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Text:
“7.3.1 General. Overload devices shall be provided to protect each motor, motor
controller, and branch-circuit conductor against excessive heating due to motor
overloads or failure to start.”
“7.3.1.1 Motors. Motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance with
Article 430, Part III, of NFPA 70.”
Analysis: Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integral
overload relay. This overload function must be set in accordance with Article 430,
Part III of NFPA 70. Selecting the ampacity of the circuit conductors
appropriately (see Requirement 5) ensures the overload relays, when set
according to 7.3.1.1, will protect the conductors against overheating due
to motor overloads.
Supplementary Note: Each individual controller overload relay directly protects
the conductors that are connected to the input and output of that controller and
the motor that the controller supplies. The combined load conductor is
protected by the tripping of one or more of the controller overload relays, that
remove(s) the overloaded motor(s) before the combined load conductor
overheats.
5. Requirement: Conductor Ampacity —The minimum ampacity
of conductors.
Text:
“12.5.3 Motor circuit conductors supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity
not less than 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating.”
“12.5.4 Combined load conductors shall have an ampacity not less than … 125
percent of the full-load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of
the full-load current ratings of all other connected motors…”
Analysis: Referring to Figure 110, (a), (b) and (c) explain the method for
calculating the minimum required conductor ampacity for each of these
conductors: input and output conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers
(a), input and output conductors of Bulletin 294E controllers (b) and combined
load conductors that supply Bulletin 290E, 291E, and 294E controllers (c). The
currents I1 through I5 are the input currents to the controllers. For the Bulletin
290E and 291E controllers, these are the same as the output motor currents. For
the Bulletin 294E controllers, these currents are the rated input currents.
The example does not address conditions of use such as an ambient temperature
exceeding 30 °C or more than three current-carrying conductors in a cable or
raceway. In a particular application, these conditions of use may require derating
of the ampacity that is given in Table 12.5.1. This example assumes that, under
the conditions of use, both conductors have sufficient ampacity for the
application. This means the 14 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less
than 9.5 A and the 10 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than 27.4 A.
294
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Input and Output Conductors
for Mechanical Controllers (a)
Appendix A
AmorStart models that use an electromechanical contactor to control the motor,
the input current like the output current, is just the current to the motor.
Therefore, the minimum conductor ampacity for both input and output
conductors is 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating, as specified in the
text of 12.5.3 (a).
Referring to Figure 110, the full-load current rating of a three-phase, 460 V, 5 Hp
induction motor is 7.6 A. Using this value, both the input and output conductors
must have an ampacity that is not less than 125% of 7.6 A or 9.5 A.
Input and Output Conductors
for Variable Frequency Drives
(b)
ArmorStart models that are a variable-frequency AC drive, are used to control
the motor. These drives use a power conversion method that generates input
currents that are larger than the output currents. The input currents are larger
because, unlike the output currents to the motor, they are not sinusoidal.
Consequently, when determining the minimum ampacity of the input
conductors, the requirement of 12.5.3 must be based on the rated input current
of the controller, rather than the full-load current rating of the motor. Therefore,
the minimum ampacity of the input conductors must be 125% of the controller
rated input current, while that of the output conductors must be 125% of the
motor full-load current rating.
Referring to Figure 110, the 1 Hp Bulletin 294E controller has a rated input
current of 3.0 A. Using the rated input current, the conductors from the
combined load conductors to the controllers must have an ampacity of 125%
of 3.0 A or 3.75 A. The output conductors must have an ampacity of 125% of
2.1 A or 2.6 A.
Combined Load Conductors
(c)
The requirement for the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors
is given by 12.5.4. When the combined load conductors supply one or more
Bulletin 294E controllers, the minimum ampacity calculation of 12.5.4 must
be made by substituting the rated input current of the Bulletin 294E controllers
for the full-load current rating of the motors that these controllers supply.
In Figure 110, the currents I1, I2, I3, I4, and I5 are the input currents to each
controller. I3 and I4 are the full-load current ratings of the 5 Hp motors. I1, I2
and I5 are the rated input currents of the Bulletin 294E controllers. Referring to
the explanatory text (c) in Figure 110, the method for calculating the minimum
ampacity of the combined load conductors follows: first, multiply the largest
input current to any controller – Bulletin 290E, 291E or 294E - by 125%. In this
case, the input currents to the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers, I3 and I4, are
the largest, 7.6 A. Because they are the same, either can be used. Choose I3 to
calculate 125% of the maximum. 125% of 7.6 A is 9.5 A. Second, sum the
remaining input currents (I1, I2, I4, I5) for a total of 17.9 A. Third, add the result
from the first step to the result from the second for a total of 27.4 A. Finally, the
minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is 27.4 A.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
295
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Supplementary Note 1: The input currents to the Bulletin 294E motor
controllers are larger than the output currents to the motor because the input
currents contain harmonics resulting from the power conversion process.
This harmonic content and the magnitude of the resulting non-sinusoidal input
currents depend on the impedance of the electrical supply. The value that is
specified for the rated input current is the maximum value over the range of
possible supply impedances. For this reason, the magnitude of current measured
on a particular electrical system may be less than the specified value.
296
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Appendix
B
CIP Information
High Level Product
Description
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller is an extension of the ArmorStart
DeviceNet controller. Three product types are offered:
Bulletin Number
Distributed Starter Type
280E
DOL
281E
Reversing
284E
Inverter
Product Codes and Name Strings
The following table lists the product codes and name strings that will be added
to the ArmorStart product family for EtherNet/IP.
CIP Explicit Connection
Behavior
Product Code
(hex)
Product Code
(decimal)
Identity Object Name String
0x91
145
ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 0.5…2.5 A 24V DC
0x92
146
ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 1.1…5.5 A 24V DC
0x93
147
ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 3.2…16 A 24V DC
0x9A
154
ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 0.3…1.5 A 24V DC
0xD1
209
ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 0.5…2.5 A 24V DC
0xD2
210
ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 1.1…5.5 A 24V DC
0xD3
211
ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 3.2…16 A 24V DC
0xDA
218
ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 0.3…1.5 A 24V DC
0x172
370
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 0.5 Hp
0x174
372
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 1 Hp
0x176
374
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 2 Hp
0x177
375
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 3 Hp
0x178
376
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 5 Hp
The ArmorStart controller allows run, jog and user outputs to be driven by
connected explicit messages when no I/O connection exists, or when an I/O
connection exists in the idle state, a single EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit
connection is allowed to send “explicit control” messages via an “Active Explicit”
connection.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
297
Appendix B
CIP Information
An EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection becomes the “explicit control”
connection when it becomes the first EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection to
send a “set” service to one of the following:
• The “value” attribute of any DOP instance (class code 0x09).
• The “data” attribute of any output (consumed) Assembly instance (class
code 0x04).
• Attribute 3 or 4 of the Control Supervisor Object (class code 0x29).
EDS Files
Most of the information that is contained in the EDS (Electronic Data Sheet)
files for the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP product line is able to be extracted via the
network.
CIP Object Requirements
The following CIP objects are covered in the following subsections.
Class
Object
0x0001
Identity Object
0x0004
Assembly Object
0x0006
Connection Manager Object
0x0008
Discrete Input Point Object
0x0009
Discrete Output Point Object
0x000F
Parameter Object
0x0010
Parameter Group Object
0x001D
Discrete Input Group Object
0x001E
Discrete Output Group Object
0x0029
Control Supervisor Object
0x002C
Overload Object
0x0047
Device Level Ring Object
0x0048
QoS Object
0x0097
DPI Fault Object
0x0098
DPI Alarm Object
0x00B4
Interface Object
0x00F5
TCP/IP Interface Object
0x00F6
Ethernet Link Object
For convenience, all objects that are accessible via the EtherNet/IP port
are included.
298
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x0001
Identity Object
The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object:
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
1
2
Get
Max Instance
UINT
9
Up to nine instances (Instance 1…9) of the Identity Object are supported. The
following table shows what each instance represents, and what the revision
attribute reports:
Instance
Name
Revision Attribute
1
EtherNet/IP Module
The firmware rev of the EtherNet/IP board main firmware.
2
EtherNet/IP Boot
The firmware rev of the EtherNet/IP board boot firmware.
3
FPGA
The rev of the FPGA program
A coded revision reflecting the revision attribute of the other various identity object
instances (excluding boot code). Major revisions are coded as: 0SSSMMMM
• 0 = reserved by DeviceNet
• SSS = Revision of Soft-start or inverter. Initial release = 0; We will be limited
to support for 8 major revisions.
• MMMM = Revision of Main ArmorStart board. Initial release = 1; We will be
limited to support for 15 major revisions.
4
Control Module
5
Main Control Board
Operating System
6
Main Control Board Boot Code
7
The Internal PF 40 Inverter
8➊
MCB IIC Daughter Board
The firmware rev of the MCB IIC Daughter Board
9➊
BASE IIC Daughter Board
The firmware rev of the Base IIC Daughter Board
The firmware rev of the Main ArmorStart board OS stored in flash memory.
The firmware rev of the Main ArmorStart board boot code stored in flash memory.
The firmware rev of the Inverter as read from the RS-485 connection.
➊ These instance numbers assume the next available instance base on the unit configuration. (If the unit is a DOL (No Drive) and there
is an MCB Daughter board present its instance number will be 7.)
IMPORTANT
Attempts to access Attribute 10 of all DeviceNet Main Control Board instances are
blocked. If Attribute 10 (Heartbeat Interval) is accessed, an “Attribute Not Supported”
error will be generated.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
299
Appendix B
CIP Information
Instance 1 of the Identity Object contains the following attributes:
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Vendor
UINT
1
2
Get
Device Type
UINT
22
3
Get
Product Code
UINT
Starter Rating specific
4
Get
Revision
Major Revision
Minor Revision
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
See table above.
5
Get
Status
WORD
Bit 0…0 = Not Owned; 1 = Owned by Master
Bit 2…0 = Factory Defaulted; 1 = Configured
Bit 8 - Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 - Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 - Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 - Major Unrecoverable fault
6
Get
Serial Number
UDINT
Unique number for each device
7
Get
Product Name
String Length
ASCII String
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
Product Code specific
8
Get
State
USINT
Returns the value "3 = Operational"
9
Get
Configuration
Consistency Value
UINT
"Module FRS"
102 ➊
Get
Build Number
UDINT
Build number of EtherNet/IP Module firmware.
➊ Instance 1 only.
The following common services are implemented for Instance 1. Service requests
to other instances are serviced through the bridge.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x01
Yes
Yes
Get_Attributes_All
0x05
No
Yes
Reset
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attributes_Single
The Type 0 and 1 reset service types, reset the Control Module. The EtherNet/IP
module performs the Type 0 or 1 reset on itself.
300
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x0004
Assembly Object
The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object:
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
1
The following static Assembly instance attributes are supported for each
Assembly instance.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
1
Get
Number of Members in Member List
UINT
Member List
Array of STRUCT
Array of CIP paths
Member Data Description
UINT
Size of Member Data in bits
Member Path Size
UINT
Size of Member EPATA in bytes
Member Path
Packed
EPATH
Logically encoded member name
2
Get
Data Type
Value
—
3
Conditional
Data
Array of BYTE
4
Get
Size
UINT
100
Get
Name String
STRING
—
Number of bytes in attribute 3
—
The following services are implemented for the Assembly Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
0x18
No
Yes
Get_Member
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
301
Appendix B
CIP Information
I/O Assemblies
The following table summarizes the Assembly instances that are supported in the
ArmrorStart EtherNet/IP product:
Instance
Type
Description
3
Consumed
Required ODVA Consumed Instance
52
Produced
Required ODVA Produced Instance
150
Produced
Default Bulletin 280E/281E Produced Assembly
151 ➊
Produced
Default Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly
162
Consumed
Default Consumed Instance for DOL and Reversing Starters
166 ➊
Consumed
Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type Starters
191
Consumed
Empty assembly for Input Only I/O Connection
192
Consumed
Empty assembly for Listen Only I/O Connection
➊ These assemblies are selectable on Inverter Type ArmorStart units only.
Instances 3 and 52 are required by the ODVA Motor Starter Profile. When used
as an EtherNet/IP Class 1 connection point, the I/O data attribute is simply
passed through the bridge.
Instance 3
This is the required output (consumed) assembly.
Instance 3 ODVA Starter
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Run Fwd
Instance 52
This is the required input (produced) assembly.
Instance 52 ODVA Starter
302
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
—
—
—
—
—
—
Running
—
Fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
Instance 150
This is the default input (produced) assembly for Bulletin 280E, 281E starters.
Instance 150 "Starter Stat" - Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E, 281E Starters
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
0
Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
1
Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
2
Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
3
Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
4
—
—
—
Ready
RunningReverse
RunningForward
WarningPresent
TripPresent
5
—
—
DisconnectClosed
Hand
In3
In2
In1
In0
6
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt00DeviceOut
7
Logic Enable
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
8
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int00DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord0Param
9
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int00DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord0Param
10
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int01DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord1Param
11
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int01DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord1Param
12
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int02DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord2Param
13
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int02DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord2Param
14
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int03DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord3Param
15
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int03DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord3Param
Note: Byte 0 - 3 refers to PLC communication status. All 1s (bit high) indicates a
connection fault (communication fault) exists or all 0s (bit low) connection
is normal.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
303
Appendix B
CIP Information
Instance 151
This is the default input (produced) assembly for Inverter Type Distributed
Starters.
Produce Assembly - Instance 151 “Drive Status” - 284E Starters
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
0
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
1
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
2
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
3
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
4
AtReference
Network
ReferenceStatus
NetControlStatus
Ready
RunningReverse
RunningForward
WarningPresent
TripPresent
5
OutputContactor
Status
BrakeContactor
Status
DisconnectClosed
Hand
In3
In2
In1
In0
6
OutputFrequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
7
OutputFrequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
8
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt00DeviceOut
9
LogicEnable
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
P10DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
10
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)” - Int00DeviceOut
11
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)” - Int00DeviceOut
12
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)” - Int01DeviceOut
13
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)” - Int01DeviceOut
14
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)” - Int02DeviceOut
15
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)” - Int02DeviceOut
16
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)” - Int03DeviceOut
17
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)” - Int03DeviceOut
Note: Byte 0 - 3 refers to PLC communication status. All 1s (bit high) indicates a
connection fault (communication fault) exists or all 0s (bit low) connection
is normal.
** Contactor
304
Reference
Contactor 1
Source Brake Contactor status
Contactor 2
Output Contactor status
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
Instance 162
This is the standard output (consumed) assembly with
Network Inputs.
Instance 162 Default Consumed DOL and Reversing Starter
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
OutB
OutA
—
—
—
ResetFault
RunReverse
RunForward
1
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt00DeviceIn
2
Pt15DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Instance 166
This is the standard output (consumed) assembly for Inverter Type Distributed
Starters with network inputs.
Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
Out B
Out A
—
JogReverse
JogForward
ResetFault
RunReverse
RunForward
1
DriveInput4
DriveInput3
DriveInput2
DriveInput1
DecelCtrl_1
DecelCtrl_0
AccelCtrl_1
AccelCtrl_0
2
FreqCommand (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
3
FreqCommand (High) (xxx.x Hz)
4
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt00DeviceIn
5
Pt15DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt9DeviceIn
Pt8DeviceIn
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
305
Appendix B
CIP Information
Connection Manager Object
CLASS CODE 0x0006
The following class attributes are supported for the Connection Manager Object.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
1
2
Get
Max Instance
UINT
—
3
Get
Number of Instances
UINT
—
4
Get
Optional Attribute List
Array of UINT
—
6
Get
Max Number Class Attribs
UINT
—
Two Class 1 connections for I/O transfer are supported.
Six Class 3 explicit connections are supported.
The following instance attributes are supported:
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get/Set
Open Requests
UINT
Number of Forward Open service requests received.
2
Get/Set
Open Format Rejects
UINT
Number of Forward Open service requests that were rejected
due to bad format.
3
Get/Set
Open Resource Rejects
UINT
Number of Forward Open service requests that were rejected
due to lack of resources.
4
Get/Set
Open Other Rejects
UINT
Number of Forward Open service requests that were rejected
for reasons other than bad format or lack of resources.
5
Get/Set
Close Requests
UINT
Number of Forward Close service requests received.
6
Get/Set
Close Format Requests
UINT
Number of Forward Close service requests that were rejected
due to bad format.
7
Get/Set
Close Other Requests
UINT
Number of Forward Close service requests that were rejected
for reasons other than bad format.
8
Get/Set
Connection Timeouts
UINT
Total number of connection timeouts that have occurred in
connections that are controlled by this Connection Manager
The following services are implemented for the Connection Manager Object.
Implemented for:
306
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0E hex
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
4E hex
No
Yes
Forward_Close
54 hex
No
Yes
Forward_Open
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
Class 1 Connections
Class 1 connections are used to transfer I/O data, and can be established to the
assembly object instances. Each Class 1 connection establishes two data
transports, one consuming and one producing. The heartbeat instances are used
for connections that shall access only inputs. Class 1 uses UDP transport.
• Total numbers of supported Class 1 connections equals 2 (total for:
exclusive owner + input only + listen only)
• Supported Actual Packet Interval (API): 2…3200 ms (Note that the
minimum API can be higher if processor resources become a problem)
• T->O (Target to Originator) Connection type: point-to-point, multicast
• O->T (Originator to Target) Connection type: point-to-point
• Supported trigger type: cyclic, change-of-state
The producing instance can be assigned to multiple transports, using any
combination of multicast and point-to-point connection types.
Only one Exclusive-owner connection are supported at each time. If there is
already an Exclusive-owner connection that is established and an originator tries
to establish a new Exclusive-owner connection an “Ownership conflict” (general
status = 0x01, extended status = 0x0106) error code is returned.
For a connection to be established the requested data sizes must be an exact
match of the connections points that the connection tries to connect to. If the
requested and actual sizes don’t match, an “Invalid connection size” (general
status = 0x01, extended status = 0x0109) error code will be returned.
Exclusive Owner Connection
This connection type is used for controlling the outputs of the module and shall
not be dependent on any other condition. Only one exclusive owner connection
can be opened against the module.
If an exclusive owner connection is already opened “Connection in use” (general
status = 0x01, extend status = 0x0100) shall be returned an error code.
• Connection point O -> T shall be Assembly object, Instance 3, 162
or 166 (162 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 166 for product codes
> 0x100 only).
• Connection point T -> O shall be Assembly object, Instance 52, 150
or 151 (150 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 151 for product codes
> 0x100 only).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
307
Appendix B
CIP Information
Listen Only Connection
This connection is dependent on another connection to exist. If that connection
(exclusive owner or input only) is closed, the listen only connection shall be
closed as well.
It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the Forward_Open
be zero.
• Number of supported listen only connections equals two (shared with
exclusive owner and listen only connection).
• Connection point O -> T shall be Assembly object, Instance 192 (Listen
only heartbeat)
• Connection point T -> O shall be Assembly object, Instance 52, 150
or 151 (150 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 151 for product codes
> 0x100 only)
Class 3 CIP Connections
Class 3 CIP connections are used to establish connections to the message router.
The connection is used for explicit messaging. Class 3 CIP connections use TCP
connections.
• Three concurrent encapsulation sessions are supported
• Six concurrent Class 3 CIP connections are supported
• More than one Class 3 CIP connection per encapsulation session are
supported
• Supported Actual Packet Interval (API): 100…10000 ms
• T->O Connection type: point-to-point
• O->T Connection type: point-to-point
• Supported trigger type: application
308
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Discrete Input Point Object
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x0008
The following class attributes are currently supported for the Discrete Input
Point Object:
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
2
2
Get
Max Instance
UINT
4
Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported. All instances
contain the following attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
3
Get
Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
115
Get/Set
Force Enable
BOOL
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
116
Get/Set
Force Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Point
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
309
Appendix B
CIP Information
Discrete Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0009
The following class attributes are supported.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
1
2
Get
Max Instance
UINT
4 or 10
Four instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported for DOL/
Reverser units. Ten instances are supported for Drive units. The following table
summarizes the DOP instances.
Instance
Name
Alternate Mapping
Description
1
Run Fwd Output
0029-01-03
Run Forward output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the
ArmorStart CPU to the actuator.
2
Run Rev Output
0029-01-04
Run Reverse output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the
ArmorStart CPU to the actuator.
3
User Output 1
None
4
User Output 2
None
5
Drive Input 1
None
6
Drive Input 2
None
7
Drive Input 3
None
8
Drive Input 4
None
9
Drive Jog Fwd
None
10
Drive Jog Rev
None
These are the two ArmorStart user outputs for all starter types.
These four instances exist for Inverter units only. They are drive the outputs on
the main control board that are connected to Drive Inputs 1…4.
This instances exists for Inverter units only.
All instances contain the following attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
3
Get
Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
5
Get/Set
Fault Action
BOOL
0 = Fault Value attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
6
Get/Set
Fault Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
7
Get/Set
Idle Action
BOOL
0 = Fault Value attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
8
Get/Set
Idle Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
113
Get/Set ➊
Pr Fault Action
BOOL
0 = Pr Fault Value attribute, 1 = Ignore
114
Get/Set ➊
Pr Fault Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
115
Get/Set
Force Enable
BOOL
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
116
Get/Set
Force Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
117
Get/Set
Input Binding
STRUCT:
USINT
Array of USINT
Size of Appendix I encoded path
Appendix I encoded path
NULL path means Attribute 3 drives the output.
Otherwise, this is a path to a bit in the Bit Table.
➊ For DOP Instances 1, 2, 9 and 10, Attributes 113 and 114 have “Get” only access, and their values are always 0.
310
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Point
Object.
Implemented for:
Parameter Object
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
CLASS CODE 0x000F
The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
—
2
Get
Max Instance
UINT
—
8
Get
Parameter Class Descriptor
WORD
—
The number of instances of the parameter object depend upon the type of
Control Module that the EtherNet/IP board is connected to.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
311
Appendix B
CIP Information
The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
1
Get/Set
Value
2
Get
Link Path Size
3
Get
4
Data Type
Value
Specified in Descriptor
—
USINT
—
Link Path
Array of:
BYTE
EPATH
—
Get
Descriptor
WORD
—
5
Get
Data Type
EPATH
—
6
Get
Data Size
USINT
—
7
Get
Parameter Name String
SHORT_STRING
—
8
Get
Units String
SHORT_STRING
—
9
Get
Help String
SHORT_STRING
—
10
Get
Minimum Value
Specified in Descriptor
—
11
Get
Maximum Value
Specified in Descriptor
—
12
Get
Default Value
Specified in Descriptor
—
13
Get
Scaling Multiplier
UINT
—
14
Get
Scaling Devisor
UINT
—
15
Get
Scaling Base
UINT
—
16
Get
Scaling Offset
INT
—
17
Get
Multiplier Link
UINT
—
18
Get
Divisor Link
UINT
—
19
Get
Base Link
UINT
—
20
Get
Offset Link
UINT
—
21
Get
Decimal Precision
USINT
—
The following services are implemented for the Parameter Object.
Implemented for:
312
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x01
No
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
0x4b
No
Yes
Get_Enum_String
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Parameter Group Object
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x0010
The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
—
2
Get
Max Instance
UINT
—
The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Group Name String
SHORT_STRING
—
2
Get
Number of Members
UINT
—
3
Get
1st Parameter
UINT
—
4
Get
2nd Parameter
UINT
—
n
Get
Nth Parameter
UINT
—
The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Group
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x01
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
313
Appendix B
CIP Information
Discrete Input Group Object
CLASS CODE 0x001D
No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Group Object.
A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported and contains
the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
3
Get
Number of Instances
USINT
4
4
Get
Binding
Array of UINT
List of DIP Instances
6
Get/Set
Off_On_Delay
UINT
—
7
Get/Set
Off_On_Delay
UINT
—
The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
No
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Discrete Output Group Object CLASS CODE 0x001E
No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group Object.
Instance 1 exists for all ArmorStart units. Instance 2 exists for drive units only.
Instances 1 contains the following instance attributes.
314
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
3
Get
Number of Instances
USINT
4
Get
Binding
Array of UINT
6
Get/Set
Command
BOOL
0 = Idle, 1 = Run
104
Get/Set
Network Status Overrride
BOOL
0 = No Override (go to safe state)
1 = Override (run local logic)
105
Get/Set
Comm Status Overrride
BOOL
0 = No Override (go to safe state)
1 = Override (run local logic)
4 for DOL/Soft Starter 10 for Inverters
List of DOP Instances
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
Instance 2 contains the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
3
Get
Number of Instances
USINT
4
Get
Binding
Array of UINT
7
Get/Set
Fault Action
BOOL
0 = Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
8
Get/Set
Fault Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = On
9
Get/Set
Idle Action
BOOL
0 = Idle Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
10
Get/Set
Idle Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = On
113
Get/Set
Pr Fault Action
BOOL
0 = Pr Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Ignore
114
Get/Set
Pr Fault Value
BOOL
0 = OFF, 1 = On
4
5, 6, 7, 8
The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Group
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
No
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
315
Appendix B
CIP Information
Control Supervisor Object
CLASS CODE 0x0029
No class attributes are supported.
A single instance (Instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object is supported and
contains the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
3
Get/Set
Run 1
BOOL
These Run outputs also map to DOP
Instances 1 and 2
4➊
Get/Set
Run 2
BOOL
—
7
Get
Running 1
BOOL
—
8➊
Get
Running 2
BOOL
—
9
Get
Ready
BOOL
—
10
Get
Tripped
BOOL
—
12
Get/Set
Fault Reset
BOOL
0->1 = Trip Reset
100
Get/Set
Keypad Mode
BOOL
0 = Maintained, 1 = Momentary
101
Get/Set
Keypad Disable
BOOL
0 = Not Disabled, 1= Disabled
115
Get
Warning Status
WORD
Bits 0…1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = PL Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = PR Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 5 = CP Warning
Bit 6 = I/O Warning
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = PI Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 9 = DN Warning
Bits 10…12 = Reserved
Bit 13 = HW Warning
Bit 14 = Reserved
Bit 15 = DB Warning
124
Get/Set
Trip Enable
WORD
Bit enumerated trip enable word
130
Get/Set
Trip Reset Mode
BOOL
0 = Manual, 1 = Auto
131
Get/Set
Trip Reset Level
USINT
0 = 100%, Default = 75
150 ➋
Get/Set
High Speed Ena
BOOL
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
151
Get
Base Enclosure
WORD
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 2 = PLe Cat 4
Bits 3…15 Reserved
WORD
Bit 0 = Output Fuse
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
WORD
Bit 0 = Conduit
Bit 1 = Round Media
Bit 2 = 28xG Gland
Bits 3…15 = Reserved
152
153
316
Value
Get
Get
Base Options
Wiring Options
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Attribute ID
154
Access Rule
Get
Name
Starter Enclosure
Data Type
WORD
Bit 0 = Full Keypad
Bit 1 = Safety Monitor
Bit 2 = Source Brake
Bit 3 = CP Brake
Bit 4 = Dynamic Brake
Bit 5 = Output Contactor
Bit 6 = EMI Filter
Bit 7 = 0…10V Analog In
Bit 8 = Fused Dyn Brake
Bits 9…15 = Reserved
Get
Starter Options
WORD
156
Get
Last Pr Trip
UINT
157 ➋
158 ➋
Get
Get
DB Status
DB Fault
Value
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = NEMA 4x
Bit 2 = 28xG Ple Cat4
Bits 3…15 Reserved
155
Appendix B
—
WORD
Bit 0 = DB Faulted
Bit 1 = DB Overtemp Warning
Bit 2 = DB On
Bit 3 = DB Flt Reset Inhibit
Bits 4…15 = Reserved
WORD
Bit 0 = DB Overtemp
Bit 1 = DB OverCurrent
Bit 2 = DB UnderCurrent
Bit 3 = DB Shorted Switch
Bit 4 = DB Open
Bit 5 = Reserved
Bit 6 = DB Bus Voltage Link Open
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = DB Comms
Bits 9…15 = Reserved
➊ Reversing Starters and Inverter Starters only.
➋ Inverter Starters only
The following common services are implemented for the Control Supervisor
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
No
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
317
Appendix B
CIP Information
CLASS CODE 0x002C
Overload Object
No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object.
A single instance (Instance 1) of the Overload Object is supported for DOL and
Reversing Starters. Instance 1 contains the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
3
Get/Set
FLA Setting
BOOL
xxx.x amps
4
Get/Set
Trip Class
USINT
—
5
Get
Average Current
INT
xxx.x amps
7
Get
% Thermal Utilized
USINT
xxx% FLA
8
Get
Current L1
INT
9
Get
Current L2
INT
10
Get
Current L3
INT
190
Get/Set
FLA Setting Times 10
BOOL
xxx.xx amps
192
Get
Average Current Times 10
UINT
xxx.xx amps
193
Get
Current L1 Times 10
UINT
194
Get
Current L2 Times 10
UINT
195
Get
Current L3 Times 10
UINT
xxx.x amps
xxx.xx amps
The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object.
Implemented for:
318
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
No
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Object
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x0047
The following class attributes are supported for the DLR Object.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
2
A single instance (Instance 1) are supported with the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Network Topology
USINT
0 = Linear, 1 = Ring
2
Get
Network Status
USINT
0 = Normal
1 = Ring Fault
2 = Unexpected Loop Detect
3 = Partial Network Fault
4 = Rapid Fault/Restore Cycle
10
Get
Active Supervisor Address
Struct of
UDINT
Array of 6
USINT
Ring Supervisor
12
Get
Capability Flags
DWORD
0x00000002
The following common services are implemented for the DLR Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x01
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
319
Appendix B
CIP Information
CLASS CODE 0x0048
Qos Object
The following class attributes are supported for the QoS Object.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
1
A single instance (Instance 1) are supported and it contains the following
instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Set
802 1Q Tag Enable
USINT
0 = Disable (Default)
1 = Enable
4
Set
DSCP Urgent
USINT
Default = 55
5
Set
DSCP Scheduled
USINT
Default = 47
6
Set
DSCP High
USINT
Default = 43
7
Set
DSCP Low
USINT
Default = 31
8
Set
DSCP Explicit
USINT
Default = 27
The following common services are implemented for the QoS Object.
Implemented for:
320
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x0097
DPI Fault Object
The DPI Fault Object is implemented in the DeviceNet Main Control Board.
The following class attributes are supported:
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Class Revision
UINT
1
2
Get
Number of Instances
UINT
4
3
Get
Fault Cmd Write
USINT
0 = NOP, 1 = Clear Fault, 2 = Clear Flt Queue
4
Get
Fault Instance Read
UINT
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing
information about the Fault that tripped the Device.
6
Get
Number of Recorded Faults
UINT
The number of Faults recorded in the Fault Queue.
Four instances of the DPI Fault Object are supported. Instance 1 is the most
recent fault while 4 is the oldest. The have the following instance attributes:
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
0
Get
Full/All Info
Struct of:
—
—
Fault Code
UINT
—
—
Fault Source
Struct of:
—
—
DPI Port Number
USINT
0
—
—
Device Object Instance
USINT
0x2c
—
—
B Fault Text
BYTE[16]
See table below.
—
—
Fault Time Stamp
Struct of:
—
—
—
Timer Value
ULDINT
—
—
—
Timer Description
WORD
—
—
—
Help Object Instance
USINT
—
—
—
Fault Data
1
Get
Basic Info
Struct of:
—
—
Fault Code
UINT
—
—
Fault Source
Struct of:
—
—
DPI Port Number
USINT
0
—
—
Device Object Instance
USINT
0x2C
—
—
Fault Time Stamp
Struct of:
—
—
—
Timer Value
ULINT
—
—
—
Timer Description
WORD
—
3
Get
Help Text
Data Type
Value
—
See table below.
—
—
STRING
—
See table below.
—
See table below.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
321
Appendix B
CIP Information
The following services are supported:
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
Yes
No
Set_Attribute_Single
The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL
and Reversers.
Table 52 - Bulletin 280E, 281E
322
Fault Code
Fault Text
Help Text
1
Hdw Short Ckt
The built in 140M Circuit Breaker has tripped.
2
Sfw Short Ckt
The wire protection algorithm detected an unsafe current surge.
3
Motor Overload
4
Fault 4
5
Phase Loss
6
Fault 6
—
7
Fault 7
—
8
Fault 8
—
9
Fault 9
—
10
Fault 10
—
11
Fault 11
—
12
Fault 12
—
13
Control Pwr Loss
Indicates the loss of control power. This fault can be disabled.
14
Control Pwr Fuse
The Control Power Fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
15
Input Short
Flags a shorted sensor, input device, or input wiring mistake.
16
Output Fuse
The Output Fuse has blown. Remove all power and replace the fuse.
17
Over Temp
Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded.
18
Fault 18
19
Phase Imbalance
20
Fault 20
21
A3 Power Loss
Unswitched (A3) Power was lost or dipped below the 12V DC threshold.
22
Internal Comm
Communication with an internal component has been lost.
23
Fault 23
—
24
Fault 24
—
25
Fault 25
—
26
Fault 26
—
27
MCB EEPROM
This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
28
Base EEPROM
This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
29
Fault 29
Load has drawn excessive current that is based on trip class selected.
—
Indicates missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled.
—
Indicates an imbalanced supply voltage.
—
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
—
CIP Information
Appendix B
Table 52 - Bulletin 280E, 281E
Fault Code
Fault Text
Help Text
30
Wrong Base
The ArmorStart controller is connected to the wrong base type.
31
Wrong CTs
This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
32
Fault 32
—
33
Fault 33
—
34
Fault 34
—
35
Fault 35
—
36
Fault 36
—
37
Fault 37
—
38
Fault 38
—
39
Fault 39
—
40
Unknown Fault
—
41
Fault 41
—
42
Fault 42
—
43
Fault 43
—
44
Fault 44
—
45
Fault 45
—
The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for VFD
units.
Table 53 Bulletin 284E
Fault Code
Fault Text
Help Text
1
Hdw Short Ckt
2
Fault 2
3
Motor Overload
The Load has drawn excessive current.
4
Drive Overload
150% load for 1 min. or 200% load for 3 sec. exceeded
5
Phase U to Gnd
A Phase U to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor.
6
Phase V to Gnd
A Phase V to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor.
7
Phase W to Gnd
A Phase W to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor.
8
Phase UV Short
Excessive current is detected between phases U and V.
9
Phase UW Short
Excessive current is detected between phases U and W.
10
Phase VW Short
Excessive current is detected between phases V and W.
11
Ground Fault
12
Stall
13
Control Pwr Loss
Indicates the loss of control power. This fault can be disabled.
14
Control Pwr Fuse
The Control Power Fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
15
Input Short
Flags a shorted sensor, input device, or input wiring mistake.
16
Output Fuse
The Output Fuse has blown. Remove all power and replace the fuse.
17
Over Temp
Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded.
The built in 140M Circuit Breaker has tripped.
—
A current path to earth ground at one or more output terminals.
The drive is unable to accelerate the motor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
323
Appendix B
CIP Information
Table 53 Bulletin 284E
Fault Code
Fault Text
Help Text
18
Heatsink OvrTmp
The Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value.
19
HW OverCurrent
The drive output current has exceeded the hardware limit.
20
SW OverCurrent
Programmed parameter 198 (SW Current Trip) has been exceeded.
21
A3 Power Loss
Unswitched (A3) Power was lost or dipped below the 12V DC threshold.
22
Internal Comm
Communication with the internal Power Flex drive has been lost.
23
Drive Comm Loss
The RS-485 port on the internal Power Flex stopped communicating.
24
Power Loss
Drive DC Bus Voltage remained below 85% of nominal bus voltage.
25
Under Voltage
DC Bus Voltage fell below the minimum value.
26
Over Voltage
DC Bus Voltage exceeded the maximum value.
27
MCB EEPROM
This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
28
Base EEPROM
This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
29
Drive EEPROM
The drive EEPROM checksum checks have failed.
30
Wrong Base
31
Fan RMP
32
Power Unit
A major failure has been detected in the drive power section.
33
Drive I/O Brd
A failure has been detected in the drive control and I/O section.
34
Restart Retries
Automatic fault reset and run retries exceeded.
35
Drive Aux In Flt
The drive auxiliary input interlock is open inside the ArmorStart.
36
Analog Input
37
Drv Param Reset
38
SCV Autotune
The drive automatic tuning function was either aborted or failed.
39
Source Brake
The source brake fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
40
Unknown Fault
41
DB1 Comm
Communication with an internal DB1 board has been lost.
42
DB1 Fault
A fault has been detected with the operation of the Dynamic Brake.
43
DB Switch Short
44
Fault 44
45 ➊
Incompatible COMM
Device
The ArmorStart controller is connected to the wrong base type.
The internal cooling fan is not running properly.
(PF Fault Code 29)
Internal Drive Parameters (Parameters > 100) have been defaulted.
—
The Dynamic Brake switch is shorted.
—
The Software version of the Drive is not compatible with the ArmorStart.
➊ The Fault text for this error is not return by the device, and is only reported as “Fault 45”.
324
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x0098
DPI Alarm Object
The following class attributes are supported:
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Class Revision
UINT
1
2
Get
Number of Instances
UINT
4
3
Set
Alarm Cmd Write
USINT
0=NOP, 1=Clear Fault, 2=Clear Flt Queue
74
Get
Alarm Instance Read
UINT
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information
about the Fault that tripped the Device.
6
Get
Number of Recorded Faults
UINT
The number of Faults that are recorded in the Fault Queue.
Four instances of the DPI Alarm Object are supported with the following
instance attributes. Instance 1 is the most recent fault while 4 is the oldest. See
Table 52 on page 322 and Table 53 on page 323 above for fault codes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
0
Get
Full/All Info
Struct of:
—
—
—
Alarm Code
UINT
—
—
—
Alarm Source
Struct of:
—
—
—
DPI Port Number
USINT
—
—
—
Device Object Instance
USINT
—
—
—
Alarm Text
STRING
—
—
—
Alarm Time Stamp
Struct of:
—
—
—
Timer Value
ULINT
—
—
—
Timer Descriptor
WORD
—
—
—
Help Object Instance
USINT
—
—
—
Alarm Data
1
Get
Basic Info
Struct of:
—
—
—
Alarm Code
UINT
—
—
—
Alarm Source
Struct of:
—
—
—
DPI Port Number
USINT
—
—
—
Device Object Instance
USINT
—
—
—
Alarm Time Stamp
Struct of:
—
—
—
Timer Value
ULINT
—
—
—
Timer Descriptor
WORD
—
3
Get
STRING
—
Help Text
Data Type
—
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Value
—
325
Appendix B
CIP Information
The following services are supported.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
Yes
No
Set_Attribute_Single
The table below lists Warning Codes, Warning Text, and Warning Help Strings
that do not match the fault text.
326
Fault Code
Fault Text
101
IP67/4X Mismatch
102
DB Terminal
Help Text
The Base enclosure type does not match the Control Module
enclosure type.
A warning has been detected with the operation of the Dynamic Brake.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x00B4
Interface Object
The following class attribute are supported.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
1 for DOL
2 for Inverters
A single instance (Instance 1) of the Interface Object is supported with the
following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Min/Max
Default
Description
7
Get/Set
Prod Assy Word 0
USINT (rev 1)
UINT (rev 2)
—
1
Defines Word 0 of Assy 120
8
Get/Set
Prod Assy Word 1
USINT (rev 1)
UINT (rev 2)
—
5
Defines Word 1 of Assy 120
9
Get/Set
Prod Assy Word 2
USINT (rev 1)
UINT (rev 2)
—
6
Defines Word 2 of Assy 120
10
Get/Set
Prod Assy Word 3
USINT (rev 1)
UINT (rev 2)
—
7
Defines Word 3 of Assy 120
13
Get/Set
Starter COS Mask
WORD
0 - 0xFFFF
0xFFFF
15
Get/Set
Autobaud Enable
BOOL
0-1
1
16
Get/Set
Consumed Assy
USINT
0 to 185
162 (VFD 166)
3, 162 (also for drives 166, 191, and 192)
17
Get/Set
Produced Assy
USINT
100 to 187
150 (VFD 151)
52, 150, 161 (also for drive 151)
19
Get/Set
Set To Defaults
BOOL
0 to 1
0
23
Get
I/O Produced Size
—
0 t0 20
—
—
24
Get
I/O Consumed Size
USINT
0 to 16
—
—
30
Get
DNet Voltage
UINT
—
—
50
Get/Set
PNB COS Mask
WORD
0 to 0x00FF
0
Change of state mask for PNBs
64
Get/Set
Unlock Identity
USINT
—
0
Multiple Identity Object instances are unlocked when
this attribute is set to the value 0x99.
Change of state mask for starter bits
1= enabled, 0 = disabled
0 = No action, 1 = Reset
DeviceNet Voltage
The following common services are implemented for the Interface Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x0E
No
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
327
Appendix B
CIP Information
TCP/IP Interface Object
CLASS CODE 0x00F5
The following class attributes are supported.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
1
One instance of the TCP/IP Interface Object are supported with the following
instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
1
Get
Status
DWORD
Data Type
Value
2
Get
Configuration Capability
DWORD
0x00000014
—
3
Get/Set
Configuration Control
DWORD
0 = Configuration from NVS
2 = Configuration from DHCP
4
Get
Physical Link Object
Struct of
UINT
Padded EPATH
2 words
NULL Enet Link Object Instance
IP Address
Network Mask
Gateway Address
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Default Domain Name for not fully qualified host names
5
Get/Set
Interface Configuration
Struct of
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
STRING
6
Get/Set
Host Name
STRING
8
Get/Set
TTL Value
USINT
Time to Live value for EtherNet/IP multicast packets
Allocation Control
Reserved
Number of multicast addresses to allocate (1…4)
Multicast starting address.
—
9
Get/Set
Multicast Config
Struct of
USINT
USINT
UINT
UDINT
11
Get/Set
LastConflictedDetected
Struct of
AcdActivity
USINT
State of last ACD Activity when last conflicted detected.
Default = 0
RemoteMAC
Array of 6
USINT
MAC address of a remote node from the ARP DPU in which a
conflict was detected. Default = 0
ArpPdu
Array of 28
USINT
Copy of raw ARP DPU in which a conflict was detected.
Default = 0
The following common services are implemented for the TCP/IP Interface
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code
328
Class
Instance
Service Name
No
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
CIP Information
Ethernet Link Object
Appendix B
CLASS CODE 0x00F6
The following class attributes are supported.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
Data Type
Value
1
Get
Revision
UINT
3
2
Get
Max Instance
UINT
2
3
Get
Number of Instances
UINT
2
One instance of the Ethernet Link Object are supported with the following
instance attributes.
Attribute ID
Access Rule
Name
1
Get
Interface Speed
UDINT
10 or 100 Mbit/Sec
2
Get
Interface Flags
DWORD
See ENet/IP Spec
3
Get
Physical Address
ARRAY of 6 USINTs
MAC Address
Interface Counters
Struct of:
In Octets
In Ucast packets
In NUcast packets
In Discards
In Errors
In Unknown Protos
Out Octets
Out Ucast packets
Out NUcast packets
Out Discards
Out Errors
—
—
4
Get
Data Type
Value
5
Get
Media Counters
Struct of:
Alignment Errors
FCS Errors
Single Collisions
SQE Test Errors
Deferred Transmits
Late Collisions
Excessive Collisions
MAC Transmit Errors
Carrier Sense Errors
Frame Too Long
MAC Receive Errors
6
Get/Set
Interface Control
Struct of:
Control Bits
Forced Interface Speed
—
7
Get
Interface Type
USINT
—
8
Get
Interface State
USINT
—
9
Get/Set
Admin State
USINT
—
10
Get
Interface Label
SHORT_STRING
Instance 1: Port 1
Instance 2: Port 2
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
329
Appendix B
CIP Information
The following common services are implemented for the Ethernet Link Object.
Implemented for:
330
Service Code
Class
Instance
Service Name
0x01
No
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Appendix
C
Using DeviceLogix
DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the
ArmorStart controller. The program is embedded in the product software so that
there is no additional module that is required to use this technology. To program
DeviceLogix, you need the latest AOP for ArmorStart EtherNet/IP for
ControlLogix or other Logix family PLCs.
In addition to the actual programming, DeviceLogix can be configured to
operate under specific situations. It is important to note that the DeviceLogix
program only runs if the logic has been enabled. This can be done within the
“Logic Editor.” The operation configuration is accomplished by setting the
“Network Override” and “Communication Override” parameters. The following
information describes the varying levels of operation:
• If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled, the ONLY time
DeviceLogix runs is if there is an active I/O connection with a master, i.e.
the master is in Run mode. At all other times, DeviceLogix is running the
logic, but does NOT control the state of the outputs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
331
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix
• If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, then
DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run
mode and if a network fault such as Duplicate MAC ID or module Bus off
condition occurs.
• If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, the
device does not need any I/O connection to run the logic. As long as there
is control power and a DeviceNet power source that is connected to the
device, the logic controls the state of the outputs.
• DeviceLogix provides a “Motion Disable” function that is driven from the
DeviceLogix program. When this is active all motor run commands are
disabled, including the HOA. The run command is disabled regardless of
where the command is initiated from such as DeviceLogix or DeviceNet.
DeviceLogix Programming
DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only
limited to the imagination of the programmer. Keep in mind that the application
of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines.
DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators such as AND,
OR, NOT, timers, counters, and latches. Decision making is done by combining
these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs
used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device
hardware. Hardware I/O is the physical Inputs and Outputs that are on the
device, such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the
ArmorStart.
There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the
most common are listed below:
• Increased system reliability
• Fast update times (1 - 2 ms possible)
• Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
• Operation independent of PLC or network status
• Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
• Critical operations can be safely shut down through local logic
332
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Using DeviceLogix
DeviceLogix Programming
Example
Appendix C
The following example shows how to program a simple logic routine to interface
the ArmorStart EtherNet I/P controller with a remote hard-wired startstop
station. In this case, the I/O is wired as shown in Table 54.
Table 54 - Hardware Bit Assignments and Description for the ArmorStart
Input Table
Output Table
Bit
Description
Bit
Description
In 0
Start Button
Run Forward
Contactor Coil
In 1
Stop Button
N/A
N/A
In 2
N/A
—
—
In 3
N/A
—
—
IMPORTANT
Before programming logic, it is important to decide on the conditions under which the
logic will run. As defined earlier, the conditions can be defined by setting parameter 8
(Network Override) and parameter 9 (Comm. Override) to the desired value.
1. While in the AOP, click the DeviceLogix tab. Click the Launch Editor
button.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
333
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix
2. Select Function Block or Ladder editor. Note that once selected, you are
not able to switch back without recreating the logic.
3. Refer to the tool bar at the top of the DeviceLogix editor window, click the
Move/Logical group and select the RSTD (Latch Reset). Move it to the
work space and click to drop it.
334
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Using DeviceLogix
Appendix C
4. From the toolbar, Click the “Bit Input” button and select In 0 from the
Hardware Boolean tree. This is the remote start button based on the
example I/O table.
5. Place the input to the left of the reset function. To drop the input on the
page, left click the desired position.
6. Place the mouse cursor over the tip of In 0. The tip turns green. Click the
tip when it turns green.
7. Move the mouse cursor toward the Set input of the reset function. A line
follows the cursor. When a connection can be made, the tip of the RSL
function also turns green. Click the on Input and the line is drawn from In
0 to the Set Input of the reset function.
Note: If this was not a valid connection, one of the pin tips would have turned
red rather than green. Left double-clicking the unused portion of the grid or
pressing the “Esc” key at any time cancels the connection process.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
335
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix
8. From the toolbar, Click the “Bit Input” button and select In 1 from the
pull-down menu. This is the remote stop button based on the example I/O
table.
9. Place the input to the left of the reset function.
10. Connect the input to the reset input of the reset function.
336
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Using DeviceLogix
Appendix C
11. From the toolbar, Click the “Bit Output” button and select “Run
Forward” from the hardware boolean tree. Run Forward is the relay
controlling the coil of the contactor.
12. Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the reset
function block.
13. Connect the output of the reset function block to Run Forward.
14. Click the “Verify” button that is located in the toolbar or select “Logic
Verify” from the “Tools” pull-down menu.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
337
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix
15. Click file close. The program is not saved automatically. Fill in the
information on following window and accept changes. This saves the
program but has not been downloaded in the product.
16. The last step is to enable the logic via the pull-down menu.
17. Click OK. To download the DeviceLogix program, you must go on-line
with the PLC and allow the download. Ensure that the PLC is in the
Program position. If in any other position, the download will not occur
and an error will be generated.
18. The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active.
338
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Using DeviceLogix
Import and Export
Appendix C
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP AOP provides users an import or export function.
The export function allows the DeviceLogix program to be saved to a file. This
file can then be imported into a similar product of same function regardless of
horsepower. Importing of DeviceLogix between unlike products is not allowed,
for example Bulletin 284E and Bulletin 280E.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
339
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix
Notes:
340
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Appendix
D
Renewal Parts
Bulletin 280E, 281E
Control Module Renewal Part - Product Selection
Figure 111 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure
280 E – F 12Z – N B – R
– Option 1
Bulletin Number
280 Full Voltage Starter
281 Reversing Starter
Option 1
3
Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad
Communications
E
EtherNet/IP
3FR
Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad
with Forward/Reverse
Motor Connection
R
Round
Enclosure Type
F
Type 4/12 (IP67)
Overload Selection
Current Range
A
0.24…1.2
B
0.5…2.5 A
C
1.1…5.5 A
D
3.2…16 A
Contactor Size/Control Voltage
24V DC
12Z
Control Module
N
Control Module Only
23Z
Table 55 - Full Voltage Starters – IP67/NEMA Type 4
kW
Hp
Cat. No.
Current Rating
[A]
230V AC
50 Hz
400V AC
50 Hz
200V AC
60 Hz
230V AC
60 Hz
460V AC
60 Hz
24V DC
0.24…1.2
0.18
0.37
—
—
0.5
280E-F12Z-NA-R
0.5…2.5
0.37
0.75
0.5
0.5
1
280E-F12Z-NB-R
1.1…5.5
1.1
2.2
1
1
3
280E-F12Z-NC-R
3.2…16
4
7.5
3
5
10
280E-F23Z-ND-R
Table 56 - Reversing Starters – IP67/NEMA Type 4
kW
Hp
Cat. No.
Current Rating
[A]
230V AC
50 Hz
400V AC
50 Hz
200V AC
60 Hz
230V AC
60 Hz
460V AC
60 Hz
24V DC
0.24…1.2
0.18
0.37
—
—
0.5
281E-F12Z-NA-R
0.5…2.5
0.37
0.75
0.5
0.5
1
281E-F12Z-NB-R
1.1…5.5
1.1
2.2
1
1
3
281E-F12Z-NC-R
3.2…16
4
7.5
3
5
10
281E-F23Z-ND-R
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
341
Appendix D
Renewal Parts
Base Module Renewal Part - Product Selection
Figure 112 - Bulletin 280E Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure
280 E – F N – 10 – C
Bulletin Number
280 Base Module
Communications
E
EtherNet/IP
Motor Connection
C
Conduit Entrance
R
ArmorConnect Power Media
Enclosure Type
F
Type 4/12 (IP67)
Short Circuit Protection (Bulletin 140M)
10
10 A Rated Device
25
25 A Rated Device
Control Module
N
Control Module Only
Table 57 - Bulletin 280E Full Voltage Starters and Bulletin 281E Reversing Starters –
IP67/NEMA Type 4, with Conduit Entrance
kW
Current Rating
[A]
230V AC
50 Hz
Hp
400V AC
50 Hz
200V AC
60 Hz
230V AC
60 Hz
460V AC
60 Hz
Cat. No.
0.24…1.2
0.18
0.37
—
—
0.5
280E-FN-10-C
0.5…2.5
0.37
0.75
0.5
0.5
1
280E-FN-10-C
1.1…5.5
1.1
2.2
1
1
3
280E-FN-10-C
3.2…16
4
7.5
3
5
10
280E-FN-25-C
Table 58 - Bulletin 280E Full Voltage Starters and Bulletin 281E Reversing Starters –
IP67/NEMA Type 4, with ArmorConnect Connectivity
kW
Hp
Current Rating
[A]
230V AC
50 Hz
400V AC
50 Hz
200V AC
60 Hz
230V AC
60 Hz
460V AC
60 Hz
Cat. No.
0.24…1.2
0.18
0.37
—
—
0.5
280E-FN-10-R
0.5…2.5
0.37
0.75
0.5
0.5
1
280E-FN-10-R
1.1…5.5
1.1
2.2
1
1
3
280E-FN-10-R
3.2…16
4
7.5
3
5
10
280E-FN-25-R
Table 59 - Motor and Brake Cables - See Motor and Brake Cables
342
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Renewal Parts
Appendix D
Control Module Renewal Part - Product Selection
Bulletin 284E
Figure 113 - Bulletin 284E Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure
284 E – F V D2P3 Z – N – R – Option 1 – Option 2 – Option 3
Bulletin Number
284 VFD Starter
Option 3
EMI EMI Filter
OC
Output Contactor
Communications
E
EtherNet/IP
Enclosure Type
F
Type 4 (IP67)
Torque Performance Mode
V
Sensorless Vector Control,
Volts per Hz
Option 2
DB
DB Brake Connector
DB1 DB Brake Connector for IP67 Dynamic
Brake Resistor
SB
Source Brake Connector
Control Module
N
Control Module Only
Control Voltage
Z
24V DC
Option 1
3
Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad with Jog Function
Blank Status Only
Output Current
Motor Media Type
R
Round
Table 60 - Bulletin 284E Control Module with Sensorless Vector Control,
IP67/NEMA 4
Input Voltage
380…480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
kW
Hp
24 V DC
Control Voltage
0.4
0.5
284E-FVD1P4Z-N-R
0.75
1.0
284E-FVD2P3Z-N-R
1.5
2.0
284E-FVD4P0Z-N -R
2.2
3.0
284E-FVD6P0Z-N-R
3.0
5.0
284E-FVD7P6Z-N-R
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
343
Appendix D
Renewal Parts
Base Module Renewal Part - Product Selection
Figure 114 - Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure
284 D – F N – 10 – C – Options
Bulletin
Number
Option 2 & 3 — Brake Cable Options
SM
Safety monitor
Communications
D
DeviceNet
Line Media
C
Conduit
R
ArmorConnect™ Power Media
Enclosure Type
F
Type 4/12 (IP67)
Base
N
Short-Circuit Protection
Bulletin 140 Current Rating (A)
10
10 A Rated Device
25
25 A Rated Device
Base Only — no starter
Table 61 - Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part, IP67/Type 4/12, Up to 600V AC With Conduit
Entrance
Input Voltage
kW
Hp
Output Current
Cat. No.
200..240V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4…0.75
0.5…1.0
2.3 A
280D-FN-10-C
1.5
2.0
7.6 A
280D-FN-25-C
380…480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4…2.2
0.5…3.0
1.4…4.0 A
280D-FN-10-C
3.0
5.0
6.0…7.6 A
280D-FN-25-C
460…600V 50/60Hz
3-Phase
0.75…1.5
1.0…2.0
1.7....3.0 A
280D-FN-10-C
2.2...4.0
3.0...5.0
4.2...6.6 A
280D-FN-25-C
Table 62 - Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part, IP67/Type 4/12, Up to 600V AC with
ArmorConnect Connectivity
344
Input Voltage
kW
Hp
Output Current
Cat. No.
200..240V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4…0.75
0.5…1.0
2.3 A
280D-FN-10-R
1.5
2.0
7.6 A
280D-FN-25-R
380…480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4…2.2
0.5…3.0
1.4…4.0 A
280D-FN-10-R
3.0
5.0
6.0…7.6 A
280D-FN-25-R
460…600V 50/60Hz
3-Phase
0.75…1.5
1.0…2.0
1.7....3.0 A
280D-FN-10-R
2.2...4.0
3.0...5.0
4.2...6.6 A
280D-FN-25-R
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Renewal Parts
Appendix D
Table 63 - Motor Cables
Description
Cable Rating
Length [m (ft)]
Cat. No.
90° M22 Motor
Cordset
IP67/Type 4/12
3 m (9.8)
280-MTR22-M3
6 m (19.6)
280-MTR22-M6
14 m (45.9)
280-MTR22-M14
3 m (9.8)
284-MTRS22-M3
6 m (19.6)
284-MTRS22-M6
14 m (45.9)
284-MTRS22-M14
1 m (3.3)
280-MTR22-M1D
3.0 m (9.8)
280-MTR22-M3D
90° M22 Motor
Cordset (Shielded)
90° Male/ Straight
Female- M22
Pathcords
IP67/Type 4/12
IP67/Type 4/12
Table 64 - Dynamic Brake Cable
Description
Cable Rating
Length [m (ft)]
Cat. No.
90° M25 Source Brake Cable
IP67/Type 4/12
3m (9.8)
285-DBK22-M3
Table 65 - Source Brake Cable
Description
Cable Rating
Length [m (ft)]
Cat. No.
90° M25 Source Brake
Cable
IP67/Type 4/12
3m (9.8)
285-BRC25-M3
6 m (19.6)
285-BRC25-M6
14 m (45.9)
285-BRC25-M14
Table 66 - Miscellaneous
Description
Notes
Internal Replacement Fan
—
Alignment Pin
Replacement ONLY if base and control module have
provision for it. Cannot retrofit without placement
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Qty
Cat. No.
—
284-FAN
2/each
284-PIN
345
Appendix D
Renewal Parts
Replacement Fuses
Description
Output Fuse
Fast acting, high-interupting capacity, tubular fuse
Rating: 2.5 A, 250V
Dimension [mm (in.)]: 20 (0.787) x 5 (0.197)
Littlefuse PN 021602.5
Control Fuse
UL Listed Class CC, CSA HRC-1
Rating: 7 A, 600V
Dimensions [in.]: 1.5 x 0.405
Cooper Bussman PN KTK-R-7
or
Littlefuse PN KLKR007.T
Source Brake Fuse (For use with Bulletins 284 and 283 with Brake option CB/SB)
UL Listed Class CC, CSA HRC-1
Rating: 3 A, 600V
Dimensions [in.]: 1.5 x 0.405
Cooper Bussman PN KTK-R-3
or
Littlefuse PN KLKR003.T
Replacement Parts
Description
Replacement At-Motor Disconnect Handle Kit
Includes (1) handle, (1) guard, and (3) screws
Cat. No.
280-DISHDL
Replacement Fan for 284 Control Module
284-FAN
Replacement Guide Pins (2 pins per package) ➊
284-PIN
➊ These pins are replacement parts for factory-installed alignment pins. They cannot be retrofitted in the field. The base module and
control module require mating features as indicated in the following diagrams.
346
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Appendix
E
System Design Considerations When
Using a Line Reactor
General Rule
Generally a line reactor for an ArmorStart controller is not required. Customers
familiar with Rockwell Automation PowerFlex drives may ask this when
installing an ArmorStart controller.
Reasons to Use
The most common reason's to use a line reactor are to:
• Extend the working life of the DC- bus capacitors by reducing the
associated heating impact that is caused by ripple noise currents in these
capacitors.
• Reduce the impact of line disturbances on other equipment that result
VFD input switching.
• Reduce the RMS input current that is associated with peak changes in
current that results from VFD input switching, allowing the use of smaller
input conductors and transformers.
• Mitigate the impact of power system transients on the drive.
Repeated line disturbances in current and voltage can lead to premature input
power structure failure for AC drives. One way to mitigate these types of issues is
to add impedance to the incoming power line to the drive. Impedance comes in
the form of transformers, line reactors, and conductors. When a large power
distribution system (>100 kVA) is feeding many small VFDs, the associated input
impedance can be lower than 1%. This low impedance can result in voltage and
current disturbances that negatively impact performance and the overall life of an
AC drive. A line reactor is one possible solution to absorb these power line
disturbances. This does not mean that a reactor must be used in every situation.
Conductors add impedance. On Machine solutions are generally further away
from the power distribution panel therefore the length of cable adds impedance.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
347
Appendix E
System Design Considerations When Using a Line Reactor
ArmorStart Design
The ArmorStart design incorporates features and additional components that
allow for better heat transfer keeping the internal components cooler. This cooler
design assures longer life of the DC bus capacitors that extend the life of the
VFD. In addition, if line disturbance mitigation is necessary, the ArmorStart can
be equipped with an EMI filter and shielded motor cable reducing the impact of
the power switching components. However, if users specify input line reactors or
transformers the recommendation is to group the ArmorStarts at the distribution
panel under one line reactor (not individual reactors or transformers).
Lastly, when full voltage ArmorStarts controllers are included with VFD
ArmorStart controllers, and line reactors are used, the starting currents of the full
voltage ArmorStart controllers can be significant. The current must be accounted
for in the selection of the line reactor or there is a risk of nuisance faults.
348
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Appendix
F
Application Examples
Manual Brake Control
If the user wants to activate the mechanical brake (source brake option) of the
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E there are several parameters that need attention. The
following configuration allows the brake to operate normally during running and
when the Bulletin 284 is not running, allows the release of the brake for
maintenance.
See the consume assembly (164 for DeviceNet or 166 for EtherNet/IP).
1. Select which Drive Input (1, 2, 3, 4) you will use to trigger the release of the
brake. Configure the corresponding parameter that references the Drive
Input P151, P152, P153, or P154.
Table 67 - Selecting Drive Input
Parameter Number
Parameter Name
Description
Factory Default
Group
Selects the function for the digital inputs.
See Table 24 on
page 179
Drive Advanced Setup
Digital In 1 Sel
Digital In 2 Sel
151…154
Digital In 3 Sel
Digital In 4 Sel
• Set the Drive In you select to "27", Em Brk Release - If EM Brake
function enabled, this input releases the brake manually.
27 ➊
Em Brk Rls
If EM Brake function enabled, this input releases the brake. See parameter 155 and set to EM Brk Cntrol (22).
➊ Provides programmable control of Em Brk via digital input (1...4)
2. Set P137, Stop Mode to one of the following:
• 8 = Ramp + EM B, CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. Stop
command clears active fault.
• 9 = Ramp + EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
349
Appendix F
Application Examples
3. Set P155, Relay Out Sel, to "22" EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake is energized.
• Program Parameter 260 (EM Brk OFF Delay) for desired action.
– Sets the time that the drive remains at minimum frequency (P134)
before ramping to the commanded frequency.
EM Brk OFF Delay
Parameter Number
260
Sets the time that the drive remains at
minimum frequency before ramping
to the commanded frequency and
energizing the brake coil relay when
Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to
Option 8 or 9.
Related Parameters
134, 137
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UNIT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.01 sec
Minimum Value
0.01 sec
Maximum Value
10 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
• Program Parameter 261 (EM Brk On Delay) for desired action.
• (P137)
EM Brk On Delay
Parameter Number
261
Sets the time that the drive remains at
minimum frequency before stopping
and de-energizing the brake coil relay
when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is
set to Option 8 or 9.
Related Parameters
134, 137
Access Rule
GET/SET
Data Type
UNIT
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Units
0.01 sec
Minimum Value
0.01 sec
Maximum Value
10.00 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
Frequency
261 [EM Brk On Delay]
pA
cce
l
Ram
pD
ece
l
R am
260 [EM Brk Off Delay]
Minimum Freq
Start
Commanded
350
EM Brk
Energized (Off)
Time
Stop
Commanded
EM Brk
De-Energized (On)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Drive Stops
Application Examples
Appendix F
4. See the consume assembly below. The Drive Input that was configured in
step #1, is used to control the mechanical brake.
Default Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
Out B
Out A
—
JogReverse
JogForward
ResetFault
RunReverse
RunForward
1
DriveInput4
DriveInput3
DriveInput2
DriveInput1
DecelCtrl_1
DecelCtrl_0
AccelCtrl_1
AccelCtrl_0
2
FreqCommand (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
3
FreqCommand (High) (xxx.x Hz)
4
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt00DeviceIn
5
Pt15DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt9DeviceIn
Pt8DeviceIn
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
351
Appendix F
Application Examples
Bulletin 284 - VFD Preset
Speed Example
DeviceLogix can be used to select one of multiple preset frequencies
cooperatively with the PLC or independently based on user input. This can be
done using the four digit inputs or the frequency control bits in DeviceLogix.
The digital inputs provide the user the most flexibility, but can be more complex
to configure. If a preset speed is needed, the simpler approach is to use frequency
control that is found in the produced network bits of DeviceLogix. If you prefer
not to apply DeviceLogix for preset speeds, then implement the digit inputs to
select preset speed via Instance 166 found in Chapter 5. The following example
demonstrates the use of frequency control bits in DeviceLogix
Frequency control (Freq Cntl) bits allow a maximum of 4 Preset Speeds, each
preset has a predefined accel or decel reference. If more are required, then digital
inputs must be configured and properly used. The example focuses on Frequency
Control 2,1,0 in the Produced Network Bit Table 68. Note that there are other
capabilities that are shown in the table that are not reviewed in this example.
Figure 115 below shows all available network outputs supported by Bulletin
284.Referring to Table 68 the preset frequencies are defined in parameter
170,171,172 and 173 of Bulletin 284. Also note the truth table that selects each
of those frequencies. For example if Freq Cntl bit 2=1, 1=1, and 0=0 then the
controller frequency is based on Parameter 172 (Preset Freq 2).
Figure 115 - Bulletin 284E Produced Network Bits in DeviceLogix Output
352
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Application Examples
Appendix F
Table 68 -
See table 22 - Parameters 170…177 Preset Freq Options for predefined accel
and decel
Accel2
Accel1
—
Description
0
0
—
No Command
0
1
—
Accel 1 Enable
1
0
—
Accel 2 Enable
1
1
—
Hold Accel Rate Selected
Decel 2
Decel 1
—
—
0
0
—
No Command
0
1
—
Decel 1 Enable
1
0
—
Decel 2 Enable
1
1
—
Hold Decel Rate Selected
Freq Ctrl 2
Freq Ctrl 1
Freq Ctrl 0
0
0
0
No Command
0
0
1
Freq Source = P136 (Start Source)
0
1
0
Freq Source = P169 (Internal Freq)
0
1
1
Freq Source = Comms
1
0
0
P170 (Preset Freq 0) (Accel/Decel 1)
1
0
1
P171 (Preset Freq 1) (Accel/Decel 1)
1
1
0
P172 (Preset Freq 2) (Accel/Decel 2)
1
1
1
P173 (Preset Freq 3) (Accel/Decel 2)
—
Using parameters 170-173, set them to 0,10,30, and 60 respectively. Figure 116
shows the preset frequencies 0-3.
Figure 116 - P170-173 Preset Frequency Settings
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
353
Appendix F
Application Examples
In this example, DeviceLogix receives data from the PLC program. The
communication and network overrides are disabled as shown below.
Figure 117 shows the DeviceLogix program. This allows the user to select one
of three predefined frequencies that are based on two network bits.
Figure 117 - DeviceLogix Program
Once you exit the DeviceLogix editor, verify that the logic is “Enabled” otherwise
the preset frequency control does not operate. See Figure 118.
Figure 118 -
354
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Application Examples
Appendix F
This simple PLC program is used to select one of three preset speeds, speed 1, 2,
or 3. For the purpose of this example speed 1, 2, & 3 are BOOL bits but they can
be any valid input. Notice that there is an interlock for speed 1 and speed 2 to
ensure that they do not trigger simultaneously. This would accidentally cause
speed 3 to run.
Download the finished program file to the PLC. In order for the parameters and
DeviceLogix program to update in the device, verify the PLC is in program
mode, and open the AOP for the Bulletin 284E.
Select the Parameters and DeviceLogic tab. This forces a correlation between the
program file and the device. If a difference exists either upload from the device or
download from the project to the device. In this example, choose to download.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
355
Appendix F
Application Examples
Figure 119 is an example of the parameter correlation when a difference occurs
between the project and the device.
Figure 119 -
Figure 120 is an example of the DeviceLogix correlation when a difference occurs
between the project and the device.
Figure 120 - DeviceLogix Correlation
356
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Application Examples
Appendix F
Note the caution statement before download.
After the DeviceLogix correlation is successful, the following window is
displayed.
After both correlations are complete place the PLC in run mode and test the
program by exercising speed 1, 2, and 3 bits.
IMPORTANT
To download a new DeviceLogix program, connect to the PLC and stay in program
mode. There can be no active I/O connections to the device or the download fails. Open
the AOP and select the DeviceLogix tab to start the correlation process. If a difference
exists, then an upload or download is necessary.
Operation
When bit Speed_1 is ON then the Bulletin 284E accelerates to 10 Hz or
decelerate using accel/decel Time 2
When bit Speed_2 is ON then the Bulletin 284E accelerates to 30 Hz or
decelerate using accel/decel Time 2
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
357
Appendix F
Application Examples
DeviceLogix Ladder Editor
Example
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP supports DeviceLogix in a ladder programming
environment. When using the ladder editor, additional explanation is needed
with regard to naming conventions. Fault bits such as “Overload Trip” are tagged
“FB0, FB1, FB2, etc. Status bits such as “Running Fwd” are tagged SB0, SB1, SB2,
etc. Outputs such as “Run Reverse” are tagged DOP0, DOP1 etc. Produced
Network Bits such as “Fault Reset” are tagged PNB0, PNB1, etc.
This document helps users interpret the naming conventions.
ArmorStart 280 and 281 Status Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose status bits in the ladder editor.
The following table contains the status bit definitions for ArmorStart 280D and
281D units:
Status Bit Declaration
0 = Tripped
1 = Running Fwd
2 = Running Rev
3 = Ready
4 = Net Ctl Status
5 = At Reference
6 = Keypad Hand
7 = HOA Status
8 = 140M On
9 = Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists
10 = IO Cnxn Exists
11 = Explicit Cnxn Fault
12 = IO Cnxn Fault
13 = IO Cnxn Idle
14 = Current Flowing
15 = Keypad Hand Direction
358
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Application Examples
Appendix F
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Fault Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose fault bits in the ladder editor.
The following table contains the fault bit definitions for Bulletin 280D and
281D ArmorStart units:
Fault Bit Declaration
0 = Short Circuit
1 = Overload
2 = Phase Loss
3 = Control Power
4 = IO Fault
5 = Over Temp
6 = Phase Imbalance
7 = DNet Power Loss
8 = EEprom
9 = HW Flt
10 = PL Warning
11 = CP Warning
12 = IO Warning
13 = Phase Imbal Warn
14 = DN Warning
15 = HW Warning
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
359
Appendix F
Application Examples
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Outputs
The screen capture below shows how to choose outputs in the ladder editor.
The Bulletin 280 and 281 have the following bit definitions:
0 = Run Forward
1 = Run Reverse
2 = User Output A
3 = User Output B
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network Bits in the ladder editor.
The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for Bulletin
280 and 281 ArmorStart units
Produce Network bit declaration
0 = Net Output 0
1 = Net Output 1
2 = Net Output 2
3 = Net Output 3
4 = Net Output 4
5 = Net Output 5
6 = Net Output 6
7 = Net Output 7
8 = Net Output 8
9 = Net Output 9
10 = Net Output 10
11 = Net Output 11
12 = Net Output 12
13 = Net Output 13
14 = Net Output 14
15 = Fault Reset
16 = Motion Disable
17 = Keypad Disable
360
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Application Examples
Appendix F
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Status Bits
The following table contains the status bit definitions for ArmorStart 284
Status bit declaration
0 = Tripped
1 = Warning
2 = Running Fwd
3 = Running Rev
4 = Ready
5 = Net Ctl Status
6 = Net Ref Status
7 = At Reference
8 = Drive Opto 1
9 = Drive Opto 2
10 = Keypad Jog
11= Keypad Hand
12 = HOA Status
13 = 140M On
14 = Contactor 1
15 = Contactor 2
16 = Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists
17 = IO Cnxn Exists
18 = Explicit Cnxn Fault
19 = IO Cnxn Fau
20 = IO Cnxn Idle
21 = Keypad Hand Direction
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Fault Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose Fault Bits in the ladder editor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
361
Appendix F
Application Examples
The following table contains the fault bit definitions for ArmorStart 284
Fault bit declaration
0 = Short Circuit
1 = Overload
2 = Phase Short
3 = Ground Fault
4 = Stall
5 = Control Power
6 = IO Fault
7 = Over Temp
8 = Phase Over Current
9 = DNet Power Loss
10 = Internal Comm
11 = DC Bus Fault
12 = EEprom
13 = HW Flt
14 = Reset Retries
15 = Misc. Fault
16 = CP Warning
17 = IO Warning
18 = DN Warning
19 = HW Warning
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Outputs
The screen capture below shows how to choose outputs in the ladder editor.
The Bulletin 284 bit definitions:
0 = Run Forward
1 = Run Reverse (Reserved)
2 = User Output A
3 = User Output B
4 = Drive Digital In 1
5 = Drive Digital In 2
6 = Drive Digital In 3
7 = Drive Digital In 4
8 = Jog Forward
9 = Jog Reverse
362
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Application Examples
Appendix F
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network Bits in the
ladder editor.
The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for Bulletin
284 ArmorStart units
0
Produce network bit declaration
0 = Net Output 0
1 = Net Output 1
2 = Net Output 2
3 = Net Output 3
4 = Net Output 4
5 = Net Output 5
6 = Net Output 6
7 = Net Output 7
8 = Net Output 8
9 = Net Output 9
10 = Net Output 10
11 = Net Output 11
12 = Net Output 12
13 = Net Output 13
14 = Net Output 14
15 = Fault Reset
16 = Accel 1
17 = Accel 2
18 = Decel 1
19 = Decel 2
20 = Freq Select 1
21 = Freq Select 2
22 = Freq Select 3
23 = Motion Disable
24 = Keypad Disable
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
363
Appendix F
Application Examples
Reporting Examples
How to Report the RPM of the 284 Internal Fan
To get the fan RPM of the fan, an explicit "get single" message instruction is
needed using a service of 0x000E.
The fan RPM can be read using the following CIA Class 0x00B4, Instance 1, and
Attribute 103. The nominal fan rpm value is 2800-3000 RPM. The ArmorStart
trips once the fan speed falls below 62% (1736)
There is no FAN FAULT warning. The user needs to develop their own warning
PLC code using the CIA message referred above for critical applications.
How to report the Heat Sink Temperature of the 284
To get the heat sink temperature of the 284, an explicit "get single" message
instruction is needed.
The heat sink temperature can be read using the following CIA Class 0x000F,
Instance 124, and Attribute 1.
Service: e (hex) Class: f (hex) Instance: 124 Attribute: 1 (hex)
364
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Application Examples
Appendix F
How to Report the Last Four Faults
By default, the ArmorStart controller provides only the last fault as a parameter.
To retrieve the last four faults, a PLC message instruction is required. Class
0x0097 DPI Fault Object is used to extract a structure of information that is
related to the last four faults. The following example shows how to configure an
explicit message to get all four fault logs. To retrieve information on all four
faults, the instance value must be indexed from 1, 2, 3, and 4, where 1 is the most
recent fault information. If more detailed information is needed, change the
attribute to 0.
How to Report an IP Address Conflict Detection
Refer CIP Class 0x00F5 address conflict detection. This is stored in non-volatile
memory and can be accessed through the TCP/IP Interface Object, instance 1,
attribute 11 (“LastConflictDetected”) via Message instruction.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
365
Appendix F
Application Examples
Demand Torque Off
Considerations
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP does not support safety torque off internally, therefore
this capability must be implemented external to the ArmorStart controller within
the safety circuit. To achieve a required safety performance without damage to
the ArmorStart 284 its required to have some coordination between the safety
safety circuit and the VFD enable. When there is a demand of the safety system it
is important that the ArmorStart VFD is disabled before any line side contactor
opening. One way to accomplish this digitally is to configure one of digital inputs
via parameter 151- 154 to option 9. Then using the consumed instance 166 and
the previously defined digit input to disable the VFD before the safety contactors
opening. This disables the ArmorStart allowing the contactors to open without
damaging the VFD. Alternatively, if the safety circuit removes A1-A2 (switched
control power) power before the safety contactors open this results in the same
behavior and prevents damage to the VFD.
Keypad Disable with
DeviceLogix
HOA operation can be prevented dynamically without parameter modification,
as follows:
The DeviceLogix program that is shown below turns off the keypad if both
inputs are true and the keypad is in either “OFF” or “AUTO” mode.
Note: If the user is already pressing the “HAND” button, the program does not
disable the keypad; if the inputs are on after the “HAND” mode is actuated.
Motion Disable
366
The motion disable program disables motion regardless of the HOA status, PLC
control, or DeviceLogix. Once motion disable is turned off, the ArmorStart or
PLC resumes control of the motor again. The motion disable does not disable the
HOA keypad. The keypad operation appears normal but it does not control the
run command until the motion disable is off.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support you can find technical and application notes, sample code, and links to
software service packs. You can also visit our Support Center at https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ for software
updates, support chats and forums, technical information, FAQs, and to sign up for product notification updates.
In addition, we offer multiple support programs for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting. For more
information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/online-phone.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada
1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada
Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/overview.page, or contact your local
Rockwell Automation representative.
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015
Supersedes Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Copyright © 2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement